Political Development of Western Europe

profilepeppepan
secondbook-DemocracyGoesintoReverse.pdf

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: Democracy Goes into Reverse

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.4

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

D uring april, the hottest month of the year in Thailand, all activity

in Bangkok slows to a molasses pace. With temperatures rising to

well over 100 degrees Fahrenheit, many residents leave town, head-

ing north or to the islands east and south of the city, and the slow- moving

fl ow of traffi c releases a cloud of smog into the steaming air. In mid- April,

the entire country shuts down for a week for the Thai New Year, leaving the

few people still in the capital marveling at their sudden ability to drive across

the city in minutes rather than hours.

But in the spring of 2010, Bangkok was anything but quiet. Tens of thou-

sands of red shirted protesters descended upon the city to protest against the

government, which they viewed as illegitimate and unsympathetic to the

working class, and to call for a new election. They mostly hailed from poorer

villages in the rural northeast, or from working class suburbs of Bangkok.

At fi rst, the protests seemed like a village street party. Demonstrators snacked

on sticky rice and grilled chicken, and danced in circles to bands playing

mor lam, a northeastern Thai music that, with its wailing guitars and plain-

tive, yodeling vocals, resembles an Asian version of Hank Williams. Amid a

rollicking, almost joyous atmosphere, over 100,000 red shirts soon gathered

around a makeshift stage in central Bangkok to demand the resignation of

the government.

Within weeks, however, the demonstrations turned violent, leading to

the worst bloodshed in Bangkok in two de cades. On April 10, some dem-

onstrators fi red on police and launched grenades at the security forces. The

troops cracked down hard, sometimes shooting randomly into the crowds.1

By the end of the day, twenty- four people had been killed.

Democracy Goes into Reverse

1

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

2 Democracy Goes into Reverse

That was just a warm- up for late May. By that time, the red shirts had

been camped out for weeks in the central business district, shutting down

commerce and paralyzing traffi c. The government and the armed forces,

which had rejected the protesters’ demands for an immediate election, de-

cided to take a tougher line. Advancing into the red shirts’ encampment,

heavily armed soldiers created virtual free- fi re zones, shooting at anyone

who moved and reportedly posting snipers in buildings above the streets to

take out red shirts. A prominent general who had joined the red movement

was killed by a bullet to the forehead as he stood talking with a reporter

from the New York Times.2 The red shirts battled back, setting fi re to the

stock exchange, the largest mall in the city, and other symbols of elite privi-

lege. On the eve ning of May 19, fl ames engulfed the Bangkok skyline, dwarf-

ing the temples of the old city and the glass- and- steel high rises of the

fi nancial district.3 By the end of May, most of the red shirts had gone home,

but the battle had ended at a terrible cost. The clashes had resulted in the

killing of over one hundred people, most of them civilians, and the govern-

ment had declared a state of emergency in most provinces, giving it the

equivalent of martial law powers to detain people without having to charge

them with committing a crime.

Such violence has become increasingly common in a country that was

once among the most stable in Southeast Asia and an example to other

developing nations of demo cratic consolidation. Four years before the red

shirt protests, a different group of protesters had launched Thailand into

turmoil, gathering on the main green in the old city of Bangkok, near the

Grand Palace, with its glittering spires inlaid with tiny gems. Then it was

thousands of middle- class urbanites from Bangkok— lawyers, doctors, shop-

keep ers, and others— demanding the removal of Prime Minister Thaksin

Shinawatra, a charismatic populist, mostly backed by the rural poor, who

had been elected by large majorities but was clearly disdainful of demo cratic

institutions.

Dressed in the yellow of Thailand’s revered monarch, King Bhumibol

Adulyadej, the middle- class protesters were led by a group with the Or-

wellian name People’s Alliance for Democracy (PAD). Like the Demo cratic

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 3

People’s Republic of Korea (North Korea) or the old German Demo cratic

Republic, the PAD was neither demo cratic nor representative of many people.

Its platform for change called for reducing the number of elected seats in

Parliament, essentially to slash the power of the rural poor, who constitute

the majority of Thais.4 “The middle class— they disdain the rural masses and

see them as willing pawns to the corrupt vote buyers,” said one former U.S.

ambassador to Thailand.5

Thaksin had used his power to eviscerate the civil ser vice, silence the

media, and allegedly disappear po liti cal opponents. He declared a “war on

drugs” in which more than two thousand people were killed by the security

forces, frequently with gunshots to the back of the head, and often despite

the fact that they had no links to narcotics.6 He also cracked down on dissent.

In one horrifi c incident in October 2004, Thai security forces rounded up

hundreds of young men in southern Thailand after demonstrations against

the government at a local mosque. The security forces stacked them inside

stifl ing, insuffi ciently ventilated trucks; eighty- fi ve people died of suffoca-

tion.7 On a daily basis Thaksin spread fear among potential critics. At the

offi ces of the Bangkok Post its tough investigative reporters, who had sur-

vived on cheap whiskey and cigarettes through coups, street protests, and

wars, were completely dispirited. One editor said they were scared even to

touch stories related to Thaksin, for fear the prime minister’s cronies would

buy the paper and fi re them.8

Still, Thaksin had been elected twice, and he dominated Thai politics

largely because he was the most compelling, or ga nized, and dynamic poli-

tician in the country. In a lengthy cable analyzing Thaksin’s appeal— and

released to the public by Wikileaks— Ralph Boyce, a former U.S. ambassa-

dor to Thailand who was no fan of Thaksin’s repressive policies, admitted:

“Thaksin’s personality, sophisticated media pre sen ta tion, focused populist

message, and traditional get- out- the- vote or ga niz ing, combined to allow

[Thaksin’s party] to leave . . . its closest rival in the po liti cal dust . . .

Thaksin . . . has no equal in Thailand on how to attract po liti cal attention.”

In 2005 Thaksin trounced the Demo crat Party, which was favored by

most yellow shirts, and in 2006, when he called a new election, the Demo crats

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

4 Democracy Goes into Reverse

simply refused to participate. By that time the Demo crats, once the most

powerful party in Thailand, had been reduced to a small rump in Parlia-

ment, holding less than one hundred out of the fi ve hundred seats in total.

Instead of contesting the 2006 election, then, the yellow shirts, who shared

po liti cal leanings with the Demo crat Party, tried to paralyze the country.

They stormed Parliament and shut it down, trapping lawmakers and forc-

ing some se nior ministers to fl ee, James Bond– style, over a fence and into

a nearby building. Later, they laid siege to the main international airport,

throwing commerce into turmoil and severely damaging tourism, one of

the country’s main sources of foreign exchange.

After months of rallies, Thaksin’s government was fi nally ousted in a

coup in 2006, but this only led to more chaos. For nearly a de cade now, Thai-

land has weathered one street protest after another, with both sides disdain-

ing demo cratic institutions and refusing to resolve their differences at the

ballot box instead of in the streets, often with bloody results. After Thaksin

and, later, other pro- Thaksin parties were prevented from assuming power

despite their electoral mandates, Thailand’s working classes formed their

own movement. They donned red clothing— Thaksin’s color— in response

to the yellow shirts. (The red shirts’ offi cial name was the United Front for

Democracy Against Dictatorship.) Just as the yellow shirts had tried to cre-

ate havoc and paralyze the economy, so too the red shirts attempted to

destroy what was left of demo cratic culture and order. They laid siege to

Parliament, forcing lawmakers loyal to the yellow shirts to fl ee. In April

2009, they stormed a meeting of Southeast Asian nations in the resort town

of Pattaya, forcing many visiting Asian leaders to hide inside their hotel,

and ultimately causing the meeting to be canceled, to the great embarrass-

ment of the Thai government.9 Finally, in the spring of 2010, the red shirts

converged on Bangkok.

In July 2011, despite efforts by Thailand’s middle classes and its mili-

tary to prevent the red shirts from taking power, the red shirts’ favored

party, called Puea Thai, won national elections again, forming a majority in

parliament. The electoral victory handed the prime ministership to Yingluck

Shinawatra, the party’s leader— and the youn gest sister of former prime

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 5

minister Thaksin. Soon, Thailand was boiling again, as Thaksin’s oppo-

nents revolted against his sister’s government, warning that if Thaksin re-

turned to Bangkok— and to power— they might well riot in the streets

again, shutting down the city once more.

In the late 1990s, the possibility of such a breakdown of democracy in Thai-

land seemed remote. After a massive pop u lar demonstration of hundreds

of thousands in Bangkok ousted a military regime in 1992, Thais believed

they had fi nally created a stable democracy. At the Bangkok Post, young re-

porters often seemed downright jubilant. During the day, they crawled

through traffi c in their cars to research investigative pieces unthinkable

under past dictatorships; at night, they often attended informal strategy ses-

sions about how to make good on the promises written into the new, pro-

gressive constitution passed in 1997. That groundbreaking constitution

guaranteed many new rights and freedoms, created new national institutions

to monitor graft, and strengthened po liti cal parties at the expense of un-

elected centers of power— the palace, the military, big business, and the elite

civil service— that together had run Thailand since the end of the absolute

monarchy in the 1930s. It also set the stage for elections in 2001 that were

probably the freest in Thailand’s history. Meanwhile, the media utilized its

new freedoms, along with new technologies like the Internet and satellite

tele vi sion, to explore formerly taboo topics like po liti cal corruption and

labor rights.

By the early 2000s, many Thais felt great pride in their nation’s demo-

cratic development. Outsiders noticed, too. “Thailand’s freedom, openness,

strength, and relative prosperity make it a role model in the region for what

people can achieve when they are allowed to,” U.S. Assistant Secretary of

State James Kelly declared in 2002.10 Besides Kelly, former Secretary of

State Madeleine Albright and then Secretary of State Colin Powell, among

others, heaped praise on Bangkok. Powell declared in 2002, “Thailand has

lived up to our expectations in so many ways.”11 In its 1999 report, the inter-

national monitoring or ga ni za tion Freedom House ranked Thailand a “free”

nation.12

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

6 Democracy Goes into Reverse

Today, Thailand looks almost nothing like a model emerging democ-

racy. The never- ending cycle of street protest, by both the middle class and

the poor, paralyzes policy making, hinders economic growth, and deters

investment at a time when authoritarian competitors like China and Viet-

nam are vacuuming up foreign capital. Few Thais now trust the integrity

of the judiciary, the civil ser vice, or other national institutions. Even the

king, once so revered that Thais worshipped him like a god, has seen his

impartiality questioned.13 The Thai military now wields enormous infl u-

ence behind the scenes, a dramatic reversal from the 1990s, when most

Thais believed the military had returned to the barracks for good.14 A once

freewheeling media has become increasingly shuttered and servile. The

government now blocks over one hundred thousand websites, more than in

neighboring Vietnam.15 Once- groundbreaking Bangkok newspapers now

read like Asian versions of the old Pravda, lavishing praise on the red shirts

or the yellow shirts depending on the paper’s point of view.16 The Thai

government even began locking up Americans visiting the country who’d

written blog posts about the Thai monarchy years earlier. Even after Thak-

sin’s sister took the reins of power, little changed, with arrests and Web

blocking continuing as before.

Many middle- class Thais, faced with the breakdown of their once-

vibrant democracy, seem to believe their country is somehow singular— that

its collapse is due to a coincidence of factors that are unique to the country

and hard for a foreigner to understand: the end of the reign of Bhumibol,

who’d long played a stabilizing role; the Asian fi nancial crisis, which pushed

the country toward pop u lism; and the unfortunate rise of Thaksin, a man

with little commitment to the rule of law. “We were just unlucky,” a se nior

Thai government offi cial said. “If we’d not had Thaksin, if His Majesty

could have been more involved, like in 1992, things would have been much

different. . . . It’s a Thai situation.” 17

But demo cratic meltdowns like Thailand’s have become depressingly com-

mon. In its annual international survey, the most comprehensive analysis of

freedom around the globe, Freedom House, which uses a range of data to

assess social, po liti cal, and economic freedoms in each nation, found that

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 7

global freedom plummeted in 2010 for the fi fth year in a row, the longest

continuous decline in nearly forty years. At the same time, most authoritar-

ian nations had become more repressive, stepping up their oppressive mea-

sures with little re sis tance from the demo cratic world. Overall, Freedom

House reported, twenty- fi ve nations went backward, in terms of freedom,

in 2010 alone, while only eleven made any gains; among the decliners were

critical regional powers like Mexico and Ukraine. This despite the fact that

in 2011 one of the most historically authoritarian parts of the world, the

Middle East, seemed to begin to change. The decline, Freedom House noted,

was most pronounced among what it called the “middle ground” of nations,

primarily in the developing world— nations that have begun demo cratizing

but are not solid and stable democracies.18 Indeed, the number of electoral

democracies fell in 2010 to its lowest number since 1995.19 “A ‘freedom

recession’ and an authoritarian resurgence have clearly emerged as global

trends,” writes Freedom House’s director of research, Arch Puddington.

“Over the last four years, the dominant pattern has been one of growing

restrictions on the fundamental freedoms of expression and association in

authoritarian settings, and a failure to continue demo cratic progress in pre-

viously improving countries.”20 Freedom House also found an increasing

“truculence” among authoritarian regimes. This truculence actually was

only made stronger by the Arab Spring, which led autocratic regimes like

China and Uzbekistan to crack down harder on their own populations. The

International Federation for Human Rights, an or ga ni za tion that monitors

abuses around the world, found in its late- 2011 annual report that the Arab

uprisings had little impact on a dire, deteriorating climate for human rights

defenders worldwide.21

Indeed, in the fall of 2011 Rus sia, which along with China is one of the

most powerful authoritarian nations, made clear that any hopes of change

were just a mirage, as Prime Minister Vladimir Putin, who has dominated

Rus sia for more than a de cade, announced that, in a secret deal with Presi-

dent Dmitry Medvedev, Putin would once again assume the presidency in

2012 and potentially serve two more terms, which would keep him in con-

trol of the Kremlin until 2024, longer than some Soviet leaders had lasted.

Putin had been constitutionally barred from serving another presidential

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

8 Democracy Goes into Reverse

term after his fi rst two terms ended in 2008, and once Medvedev assumed

the presidency some Rus sian liberals had hoped that he would introduce

reforms, despite his history as a close confi dante of Putin’s. Indeed, in offi ce

Medvedev declared that Rus sia’s criminal justice system needed to be over-

hauled, and that the country should open up its po liti cal system, but his

announcement that he had secretly agreed with Putin to manipulate the

presidency and prime ministership to put Putin back in power showed that

he, too, was at heart hardly a demo crat. When Rus sia’s fi nance minister ques-

tioned the handoff of power from Medvedev back to Putin, he was sum-

marily fi red, in a clear message.

The stagnation of democracy predates this fi ve- year period, Freedom

House noted; since 2000 democracy gained little ground around the world,

before sliding backward beginning in the mid- 2000s. “Since they were fi rst

issued in 1972, the fi ndings in Freedom in the World have conveyed a story of

broad advances,” Freedom House reported. “But freedom’s forward march

peaked around the beginning of the [2000s].”

Even as some demo crats were celebrating the Arab Spring and hoping

that, as in 1989, its revolutions might spread to other parts of the world, a

mountain of other evidence supported Freedom House’s gloomy conclu-

sions. Another of the most comprehensive studies of global democracy,

compiled by Germany’s Bertelsmann Foundation, uses data examining de-

mocracies’ ability to function, manage government, and uphold freedoms

to produce what it calls the “transformation index.” The overall goal of the

index is to analyze the state and quality of democracy in every developing

nation that has achieved some degree of freedom. To do so, Bertelsmann

looks at a range of characteristics including the stability of demo cratic insti-

tutions, po liti cal participation, the rule of law, and the strength of the state,

among other areas. And the most recent index found “the overall quality

of democracy has eroded [throughout the developing world]. . . . The key

components of a functioning democracy, such as po liti cal participation and

civil liberties, have suffered qualitative erosion. . . . These developments

threaten to hollow out the quality and substance of governance.” The index

concluded that the number of “highly defective democracies”— democracies

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 9

with institutions, elections, and po liti cal culture so fl awed that they no lon-

ger qualifi ed as real democracies— had roughly doubled between 2006 and

2010. By 2010, in fact, nearly 53 of the 128 countries assessed by the index

were categorized as “defective democracies.”

Sixteen of these fi fty- three, including regionally and globally powerful

states like Rus sia and Kenya, qualifi ed as “highly defi cient democracies,”

countries that had such a lack of opportunity for opposition voices, prob-

lems with the rule of law, and unrepresentative po liti cal structures that they

were now little better than autocracies. The percentage of “highly defi cient

democracies” in the index has roughly doubled in just four years. And in

Africa, which had been at the center of the global wave of demo cratization

in the late 1990s and early 2000s, the deterioration was most pronounced.

Between 2008 and 2010, Bertelsmann found, sub- Saharan Africa was

home to nine of the thirteen nations in the developing world that suffered

the greatest deterioration in the quality of their po liti cal systems. Among

these backsliders were Senegal, Tanzania, and Madagascar, which once were

among the greatest hopes for democracy on the continent.

Even nations that have been held up as demo cratic models have re-

gressed over the past fi ve to ten years, according to both the Freedom House

and the Bertelsmann studies. When they entered the Eu ro pe an Union in

the late 1990s and early 2000s, Hungary, Poland, the Czech Republic, and

Slovakia were considered success stories and would join the older democ-

racies of Western Eu rope as solid, consolidated demo cratic systems. But in

their de cade inside the EU, all of these new entrants actually have been

downgraded repeatedly by Freedom House, showing that their demo cratic

systems, election pro cesses, and commitments to civil liberties have deterio-

rated.22 Populist and far- right parties with little commitment to demo cratic

norms gained steadily in popularity; public distaste for democracy in these

supposed success stories skyrocketed, so much so that in one 2006 survey

publics in Central Eu rope showed the most skepticism about the merits of

democracy of any region of the world.23 Hungary deteriorated so badly that

its press freedoms reverted to almost Soviet- type suppression, with its gov-

ernment using harsh new laws and other attacks to silence the media.24

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

10 Democracy Goes into Reverse

The third major international study of democracy, the Economist

Intelligence Unit’s (EIU) “index of democracy,” only further confi rmed the

decline. The EIU’s annual survey of the entire world analyzes democracy

using categories for electoral pro cess, pluralism, po liti cal participation, po-

liti cal culture, functioning of government, and civil liberties including press

freedom and freedom of association. In its most recent study, it found that

democracy was in retreat across nearly the entire globe. “In all regions, the

average democracy score for 2010 is lower than in 2008,” noted the report.

In ninety- one of one hundred sixty- seven countries it studied, the democ-

racy score had deteriorated in that time period, and in many others it had

only remained stagnant. Of the seventy- nine nations that it assessed as hav-

ing some signifi cant demo cratic qualities, only twenty- six made the grade as

“full democracies,” while the other fi fty- three were ranked only as “fl awed

democracies” because of serious defi ciencies in many of the areas it assessed.

“Democracy is in retreat. The dominant pattern in all regions . . . has been

backsliding on previously attained progress,” the survey concluded.

In some of the specifi c categories that it examined to assess democracy,

such as media freedom, the EIU found that backsliding was even more severe

than the broader decline in the democracy index. More than thirty nations,

including regional powers— and onetime examples of democratization—

like Rus sia, Hungary, Mexico, and Turkey, witnessed sharp increases in

media and online repression between 2008 and 2010. The Economist Intel-

ligence Unit’s 2011 Democracy Survey, released roughly a year after the

Arab uprisings began, had just as much gloom. As in 2010, it similarly found

that “democracy has been under intense pressure in many parts of the

world,” and that the quality of democracy had regressed on nearly every

continent in 2011.

Like Freedom House and the Bertelsmann Foundation, the EIU found

that, with only a few exceptions, backsliding was occurring in nearly every

developing region of the world. It found that authoritarianism was becom-

ing more entrenched in Central Asia, demo cratization was being reversed

in Africa, authoritarian populists were emerging in Latin America, and

po liti cal participation was plummeting in the former Soviet states of East-

ern and Central Eu rope, undermining the region’s demo cratic transitions.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 11

Assessing the data, and the severe reversals, the EIU was glum about the

future, though it recognized that the Middle East had nowhere to go but

up, given its long- entrenched authoritarianism. “The threat of backsliding

now greatly outweighs the possibility of future gains [in demo cratization

worldwide],” the survey concluded.

Old- fashioned coups also have returned. In Latin America, Asia, and

even most of Africa, coups, which had been a frequent means of changing

governments during the Cold War, had become nearly extinct by the early

2000s. But between 2006 and 2010 the military grabbed power in Guinea,

Honduras, Mauritania, Niger, Guinea- Bissau, Bangladesh, Thailand, Fiji,

and Madagascar, among other states.

In many other developing nations, such as Mexico, Pakistan, and the

Philippines, the military did not launch an outright coup but managed to

restore its power as the central actor in po liti cal life, dominating the civilian

governments that clung to power only through the support of the armed

forces. Freedom House, in fact, notes that the global decline in democracy

in the past fi ve years has been the result, in part, of weakening civilian

control of militaries across the developing world. The civilian Thai prime

minister in the late 2000s, Abhisit Vejjajiva, who took power in 2008, owed

his survival in offi ce to the military’s backing, and se nior army offi cers made

clear to him, in private, that if they withdrew their support, his government

could easily collapse. Unsurprisingly, the Thai military’s bud get more than

doubled between 2006 and 2011, with much of the expenditures going to-

ward tools to control Thailand’s own population, rather than toward fi ght-

ing potential foreign enemies. After Thaksin’s sister became prime minister,

the armed forces negotiated a deal with her that gave the military total

control over its own bud get, with little civilian authority— and which es-

sentially preserved its ability to interfere in politics indefi nitely. Philippine

president Gloria Macapagal- Arroyo relied upon the armed forces to enforce

a crackdown against opponents. According to several local human rights

groups, more than a thousand left- leaning activists, opposition politicians,

and other government opponents were killed between 2001 and 2010, and

one comprehensive study found that “the [Philippine] military [is] an im-

portant veto actor in the competition among the country’s po liti cal elites.”25

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

12 Democracy Goes into Reverse

“It’s almost like we’ve gone back to the [Ferdinand] Marcos era,” prominent

rights activist and lawyer Harry Roque Jr. said as he waited in his offi ce for

the security forces to come and interrogate him.26 “There’s the same type of

fear, the same abuses, the same attitude by the military that their actions

will never face consequences.” Within months of the election of Arroyo’s

successor, Benigno Aquino, in 2010, the Philippine military seemed ready

to bolster its power even more. Several prominent former military offi cers

reportedly launched a new movement called “Solidarity for Sovereignty,”

designed to step in if the president’s government, as one of them put it, “self-

destructed.”27

Similarly, in Pakistan, though General Pervez Musharraf, who took

power in a coup in 1999, eventually returned leadership to a civilian govern-

ment nearly a de cade later, Pakistan’s army clearly had reestablished itself

as the central power in policy making. After interludes of civilian control in

the 1990s, the army has again “assumed control as well as oversight of pub-

lic policy. . . . The military has carved out a role and position in the public

and private sectors, including industry, business, agriculture, education and

scientifi c development, health care, communications, and transportation,”

reported military analysts Siegfried Wolf and Seth Kane. In early 2010, when

the Pakistani leadership held talks in Washington on the future of the bilat-

eral relationship with the United States, there was no doubt about who was

the key player on the Pakistani side: not civilian president Asif Ali Zardari

but army chief of staff Ashfaq Kayani.28 Similarly, after American Spe-

cial Forces swooped into Pakistan in the spring of 2011 to kill Osama bin

Laden, it was Kayani who essentially enunciated the Pakistani govern-

ment’s response to America.

Indeed, in another recent comprehensive study, this time of Asia, re-

searchers from the Institute for Security and International Studies in Thai-

land concluded, “Any short- term prospects for civilian control in the young

democracies of South and Southeast Asia are gloomy indeed.” Yet support for

democracy has become so tepid in many parts of the developing world that

many of these coups or military interventions were cheered. After the coup

against Thaksin in Thailand in 2006, many urban Thais openly celebrated.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 13

“Academic contacts [of U.S. diplomats] could only be described as ebullient

[about the coup,]” reported the American embassy in Bangkok in one cable

written after the coup.

Across the Middle East, armed forces also have dominated the Arab

Spring and Summer, putting the lie to the idea that the Arab uprising is

going to bring democracy to the region. Instead, in the near term the Arab

uprisings appear to be entrenching the power of militaries in the region,

sparking massive unrest, scaring middle- class liberals into exodus, and po-

tentially empowering Islamists. Protesters may have challenged leaders from

Yemen to Egypt, but the loyalty of the military has determined whether these

rulers stay in power, and during any transition the militaries have, by de-

fault, become the dominant— and sometimes only— national institutions.

In Bahrain, the military’s willingness to continue to support the regime of

Sheikh Hamad bin Isa al- Khalifa allowed the royal family to crush pro-

tests, to enlist the support of armies from other Gulf states, including Saudi

Arabia, and to maintain a tight grip on power after antigovernment protests

fl ared in early 2011.

As in Bahrain, armies have used this power to ensure that they will re-

main at the center of politics for years to come, in part because middle classes

in the region fear that the end of dictatorships like Hosni Mubarak’s could

usher in chaos, insecurity, and bloodshed if the military does not step in.

Egypt’s generals, write po liti cal analysts Jeff Martini and Julie Taylor, “are

determined to . . . protect their privileged position. . . . The generals now

hope to create a system of carefully shaped [institutions] that will preserve

their power and reduce the chances that any single po liti cal group can chal-

lenge them.” Indeed, they note, during Egypt’s transition the generals have

insisted the military be exempted from parliamentary scrutiny, enjoy power

over an elected president, and maintain the legal right to intervene in poli-

tics under a broad array of circumstances.

By the summer and fall of 2011, as this book was being written, the

Egyptian military increasingly demonstrated that it had no interest in giv-

ing up the power it had amassed over de cades, and that it had learned how to

use a po liti cal vacuum to bolster its own power, as it had many times in the

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

14 Democracy Goes into Reverse

country’s past. In 2011, the Egyptian military controlled nearly every aspect

of the country’s supposed transition. It passed legislation outlining the terms

of potential new elections without consulting with the public, a move that

led some protesters to rally again, in central Cairo, to demand that the mili-

tary remove itself from politics. The army also has expanded laws used to

jail dissidents, imprisoning many who have criticized the military since the

fall of the Mubarak regime, and has helped ensure that the armed forces’

business interests, which are vast, will remain protected under any future

Egyptian government. When liberal Egyptians, including some Christians,

protested against the military’s power in post- Mubarak Egypt in early

October 2011, chanting, “The people want to bring down the fi eld mar-

shal,” riot police and other armed security forces beat protesters mercilessly

and ultimately opened fi re, killing at least twenty- four people and wound-

ing some two hundred.29 Ultimately, the antiarmy sentiment grew so fi erce

that, in November, crowds gathering once again in Tahrir Square in down-

town Cairo battled with riot police and other security forces, as they de-

manded that the military release its hold on power and ensure that, in the

future, it could not dominate an elected government. Thousands, possibly

even tens of thousands of demonstrators, packed into the square, which had

been the site of the initial protests that toppled Mubarak nearly a year earlier.

The security forces attacked the crowds with rubber bullets, tear gas, and

batons, killing at least one person and injuring more than a thousand, ac-

cording to press reports.30 Though the military appeared to cede some

ground after these protests, allowing the constitution to be altered to place

the military formally under civilian control, it retained broad powers that

seemed inimical to democracy, including, essentially, the right to overturn

civilian governments if it desired.

Meanwhile, in the autumn of 2011 Islamists made signifi cant gains

nearly everywhere in the region. The fi rst elections held, post- Arab Spring,

in Tunisia, were a triumph for democracy in the Arab world. People across

Tunisia waited patiently in long lines to vote, and monitors reported that

polling was free, fair, and peaceful, which was hardly expected— anticipating

chaos, Tunisia had deployed some forty thousand policemen at polling sites.31

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 15

Following the voting, many Tunisians took to public spaces to celebrate the

fact they voted, despite diffi culties in the year since they had toppled their

autocrat: Tunisia’s economy had weakened, partly because of the war next

door in Libya, and in a freer po liti cal climate grievances about economic

in e qual ity increasingly bubbled to the surface in poorer parts of Tunisia.

But in October 2011, Tunisians defi ed many predictions of a disastrous elec-

tion. Overall, nearly 90 percent of eligible voters cast a ballot, a huge turn-

out. Because of quotas imposed in the electoral laws, some 30 percent of

seats in the new parliament would go to women. Still, when the results

came in, it was clear that Al Nahda, the main Islamist party, had won a siz-

able victory, mostly at the expense of the secular, liberal Progressive Demo-

cratic Party. Al Nahda’s leadership, which openly styled themselves after

Turkey’s progressive Islamists, said all the right things about their commit-

ment to building Tunisian demo cratic institutions, upholding individual

freedoms, and separating mosque and state.32 (Before the election, the transi-

tional government had banned parties that theoretically did not demonstrate

a commitment to democracy, and so prevented a more avowedly Islamist and

Salafi st party from even contesting the poll.)33

But unlike Turkey, where Islamists took de cades to demonstrate their

allegiance to the secular state, and today have been governing for more than

ten years, in Tunisia, which was less than a year from autocratic rule, many

middle- and upper- class Tunisians had doubts about Al Nahda’s real long-

term commitment to the secular state. (Al Nahda had been banned under

Tunisia’s dictatorship.) Before the election, groups of activists allied with Al

Nahda had stormed a private Tunisian tele vi sion station, trying to close it

down for showing what they deemed sacrilegious content; in the past, Al

Nahda activists had attacked rivals by throwing acid in their faces, among

other tactics.34 And in the run- up to the election, hard- line Salafi sts clearly

enjoyed something of a re nais sance in Tunisia, making their presence felt

throughout society. In June radicals attacked people attending a fi lm in

Tunis, and they also have attacked some artists whom they have deemed

“un- Islamic.”35 Many liberal, middle- class Tunisians continued to express

doubt about Al Nahda despite its leadership’s vows to uphold democracy;

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

16 Democracy Goes into Reverse

applications to leave Tunisia and gain passports more than doubled in 2011.

These doubts boded poorly for the country’s future, since these middle classes

and elites would be critical for growth, development, and demo cratic con-

solidation.

Perhaps Al Nahda’s success would be fl eeting. A study released in early

2011 in the Journal of Democracy found that, by surveying parliamentary

elections in twenty- one countries, Islamic parties tended to do best in

the initial elections after the end of authoritarian rule, a period when they

tended to be the most or ga nized group in the country. Over time, as elec-

tions became more regular, their support tended to wane, and wound up

averaging about 15 percent of the vote.36 Islamist parties also tended to

become more moderate over time, as they tried to appeal to less religious

swing voters, in order to possibly gain enough votes to govern. Still, this

study does not necessarily predict the future: Islamist parties in the post—

Arab Spring countries tend to be better entrenched, better or ga nized, and

even more dominant than in places where they have competed in the past,

such as Indonesia, where religious- oriented parties were hardly as power-

ful as a group like Egypt’s Muslim Brotherhood or Salafi sts, who adopted a

harder- line position than the Brotherhood. In the initial rounds of Egypt’s

parliamentary elections, held in December, the Brotherhood and the more

extreme Salafi sts gained overwhelming victories, even in areas long consid-

ered some of the most liberal parts of Egypt, such as Cairo; liberal and sec-

ular parties generally placed very poorly, split among themselves and unable

to sometimes garner even enough votes to make it into Parliament. The

Islamists’ dominance of the voting set them up in prime position to write

Egypt’s new constitution.

In Libya the death of Muammar Qadaffi led, in the short run, to chaos

in Tripoli and other towns, and a clear rise in the power of Islamists in what

was already the most religiously conservative country in north Africa. The

post- Qadaffi interim leadership quickly brought up the possibility of legal-

izing polygamy in order to create a more pious nation, infuriating some

Libyan women’s groups.37 They further suggested that sharia should be the

basis of law in the new Libya, and many Libyans agreed that, in post-

Qadaffi elections, Islamists would dominate, since as in Egypt they had built

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 17

a strong underground or ga ni za tion in Libya during the authoritarian

period. Youssef Sherif, a leading Libyan intellectual, told reporters, “Every

day the Islamists grow stronger. When there is a parliament, the Islamists

will get the majority.”38 Indeed, despite having worked through NATO to

end Qadaffi ’s regime, many se nior American offi cials essentially accepted

that by ousting the Libyan dictator they were likely to empower an Islamist

government, given Libya’s religious conservatism— and they had little trust

that Islamists in Libya would uphold a semblance of a secular state. Militias

wielding Soviet- designed Kalashnikov assault rifl es and rocket launchers

roamed the country, often engaging in banditry to support themselves, and

the weak transitional government had trouble disarming anyone.39 One of

the most powerful post- Qadaffi leaders to emerge, with his own group of

armed backers, was a man who previously had led a hard- line or ga ni za tion

linked to Al Qaeda.40 As in Egypt, some Libyan liberals now are wonder-

ing whether the Libyan transitional government will turn into an autocracy

of its own— or whether perhaps it actually should, since holding elections

anytime soon could lead to more chaos or to an Islamist takeover.41

The strengthening of military rule in many developing nations has been

disastrous for reform, despite the militaries’ contention that they are the

only institutions standing in the way of civil strife or Islamist rule. Indeed,

human rights groups such as Amnesty International found that, since the

winter of 2010– 11, human rights abuses actually have increased in nearly

every Middle Eastern nation, including Syria, Egypt, and Bahrain, where

at least fi ve hundred people were detained for protesting between February

and September 2011.42

Despite the fact that militaries could hardly be called agents of reform,

middle classes in many developing nations, both in the Middle East and

in other parts of the world, often continued to support the armed forces

as potential antidotes to pop u lar democracy— democracy that might em-

power the poor, the religious, and the less educated. In this way, Egyptian

liberals’ concerns about the fruits of democracy were not unique. Overall,

in fact, an analysis of military coups in developing nations over the past

twenty years, conducted by my research associate Daniel Silverman and

myself, found that in nearly 50 percent of the cases, drawn from Africa,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

18 Democracy Goes into Reverse

Latin America, Asia, and the Middle East, middle- class men and women

either agitated in advance for the coup or, in polls or prominent media cov-

erage after the coup, expressed their support for the army takeover.

Although the uprisings in the Middle East have led to unrest, civil

strife, and renewed military rule, they have had little impact on other parts

of the world— a sharp contrast to 1989, when the revolts in Eastern Eu rope

helped catalyze change in other parts of the Soviet Union, as well as in

China. Picking up from the Tunisian uprising, a small group of Chinese lib-

erals in early 2011 attempted to launch their own “jasmine revolution,” be-

ginning with an online manifesto calling for protests. But their numbers

likely never exceeded a few hundred people, and the Chinese government

quickly quashed their movement, closing down websites and arresting

organizers. More important, these protests gained little traction with the

Chinese public, which knew relatively little about the demonstrations in

the Middle East and, as we will see later, is far more satisfi ed with their

country’s leadership than Egyptians or Tunisians were with theirs. In sub-

Saharan Africa, too, the Arab uprisings ultimately had minimal impact;

protests broke out in places from Malawi to Burkina Faso to Uganda, but

none succeeded in toppling rulers; in response to the uprisings, the militar-

ies in many of these African countries were able to further entrench their

power. In Zimbabwe, the military has come to dominate the power struc-

ture of Robert Mugabe’s regime, making him and his allies even more

indebted to the armed forces. Overall, concluded Northwestern Univer-

sity’s Richard Joseph in a survey of the current state of politics in sub-

Saharan Africa, “the electoral authoritarian regime,” not democracy, has

become the most prevalent po liti cal system in Africa— a system that in-

cludes not only Mugabe but some of the other most entrenched autocrats,

such as Angola’s Jose Eduardo dos Santos, who has ruled his country

since 1979.43

In addition to these studies showing the return of coups, opinion polling

from many developing nations shows not only that the quality of democ-

racy is declining but also that public views of democracy are deteriorating

as well. The international public opinion group Program on International

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 19

Policy Attitudes uses extensive questionnaires to ask people in a range of

Latin American, African, Asian, and Middle Eastern nations about their

views on democracy, as compared with other potential po liti cal systems.

The regular “Afrobarometer” survey of the African continent has found

declining levels of support for democracy throughout much of sub- Saharan

Africa; in Nigeria, the largest nation on the continent, support for democ-

racy has plummeted over the past de cade. In several polls only 16 percent of

Rus sians said that it was “very important” that their nation be governed

demo cratically. Even in Kyrgyzstan, which despite its fl aws remains the

most demo cratic state in Central Asia, one comprehensive Gallup poll found

that a majority of the population did not believe that a po liti cal opposition is

very or somewhat important, and a sizable plurality said democracy was not

important to their country. Shortly after Kyrgyzstan’s presidential elections

in the fall of 2011, this disinterest in demo cratic politics became clear: losing

candidates and their supporters massed in public areas around the country,

trying to use protests to bring down the supposed victor.44

“Latinobarómetro” polls and studies of South America showed similar

dissatisfaction with democracy. In Ec ua dor, Guatemala, Paraguay, Colombia,

Peru, Honduras, and Nicaragua, either a minority or only a tiny majority

of people think democracy is preferable to any other type of government.

Overall, in the most recent Latinobarómetro survey, only a small majority

of people across Latin America supported democracy as a po liti cal system,

and less than 40 percent said they were satisfi ed with the way that democ-

racy works in practice in their country.45 In most countries in Latin Amer-

ica, these fi gures have either remained stagnant or slumped from where

they were a de cade ago. Many Latin Americans now say they do not even

have a functioning democracy at all.46 Meanwhile, in Pakistan, roughly

60 percent of respondents in a comprehensive regional survey said that the

country should be ruled by the army, one of the highest votes of support for

military rule in the world.

The global economic crisis, which continued to hit Eu rope hard in 2010

and 2011, only weakened public support for democracy in new democracies

in Central and Eastern Eu rope. A comprehensive study of Central and East-

ern Eu rope by the Eu ro pe an Bank for Reconstruction and Development

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

20 Democracy Goes into Reverse

(EBRD), released in 2011, found that the crisis had severely lowered people’s

support for democracy.47 “The more people were personally hit by the cri-

sis, the more they turned away from democracy,” it found.48 Support for

democracy had declined, since 2006, in all of the new Eu ro pe an Union

nations except Bulgaria. In some of these countries, such as the Slovak

Republic and Hungary, support for democracy fell, in the EBRD’s surveys,

by as much as twenty percentage points compared to 2006. This decline

provided an opportunity for stronger, even authoritarian, leaders. “Those

who enjoyed more freedoms wanted less democracy and markets when

they were hurt by the crisis,” the EBRD report noted.49

Even in East Asia, one of the most eco nom ical ly vibrant and globalized

regions of the world, polls show rising dissatisfaction with democracy.

In  fact, several countries in the region have developed what Asian demo-

cratization specialists Yu- tzung Chang, Yunhan Zhu, and Chong- min Park,

who studied data from the regular “Asian Barometer” surveys, have termed

“authoritarian nostalgia.” “Few of the region’s former authoritarian regimes

have been thoroughly discredited,” they write, noting that the region’s aver-

age score for commitment to democracy, judged by a range of prodemo-

cratic responses to surveys, has fallen in the most recent studies. An analysis

of the Asian Barometer data by Park found that, even in South Korea, one

of the supposed success stories of democracy in the developing world, the

percentage of South Koreans saying that under certain circumstances an

authoritarian government was preferable doubled between 1996 and 2006.

“An upward trend is unequivocal,” Park writes. “In times of crisis these

halfhearted citizens may not be mobilized to defend demo cratic institutions

and pro cesses.” Similarly, in Taiwan, another supposedly stable democracy,

the Asian Barometer survey found that only 40 percent of respondents agreed

that democracy was “preferable to all other kinds of government,” a low fi g-

ure. Only slightly more than 50 percent of Mongolians and Filipinos, two

other supposedly vibrant democracies, thought democracy was preferable to

all other kinds of government.

Even in developing nations where democracy has deeper roots, and

seems to be stronger, disillusionment with its po liti cal pro cesses, and with

demo cratically elected leaders, has exploded in recent years, as these leaders

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 21

have seemed unable to develop effective solutions for global and local eco-

nomic crises, other than biting austerity mea sures. From Indians demon-

strating in Delhi in support of hunger strikers attacking corruption in

Indian politics, to Israelis camping in the streets of Tel Aviv in the biggest

demonstrations in the country’s history to protest their leaders’ lack of inter-

est in basic economic issues, to the Occupy movement across the United

States and countries of Western Eu rope, people in even more established

democracies are increasingly turning to street protests to make their points,

since they believe they cannot be heard at the ballot box. They have become

convinced, they say, that the demo cratic pro cess has become so corrupted,

so dominated by entrenched interests, and so disassociated from pop u lar is-

sues, that they can change their countries only through massive rallies, even

if those protests use the street to bring down leaders fairly elected. “Our

parents are grateful because they’re voting,” one young woman told report-

ers in Spain, where tens of thousands of young people also have launched

full- time street protests against politicians’ lack of interest in the country’s

long- term unemployment crisis, which has led to unemployment of nearly

40 percent for recent university graduates of both sexes. “We’re the fi rst

generation to say that voting is worthless.”

This demo cratic decline is not concentrated in one region or one continent,

and, unlike previous waves of democracy regression such as those occurring

in the 1920s and 1930s, today’s decline includes a far wider array of nations,

from more regions of the globe, and is much less likely to be stopped. More

important, many of the countries that are regressing from democracy are

regional powers, including Rus sia, Kenya, Thailand, Argentina, Senegal, the

Philippines, Hungary, Venezuela, Mexico, Nigeria, and many others. Their

examples matter more to their regions than those of smaller, less infl uential

states. One of the key factors in determining whether a country will demo-

cratize is the international and regional climate, according to a study of de-

mocracies’ endurance by po liti cal scientists Adam Przeworksi, Michael

Alvarez, Jose Cheibub, and Fernando Limongi. So, when powerful countries

fail to demo cratize, this diffusion effect works in reverse, hindering the

cause of demo cratic change in their entire regions.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

22 Democracy Goes into Reverse

In many of these regionally important countries, the decline of democ-

racy has been so sharp that it has shocked people who lived through the

initial period of demo cratization. In the Philippines in the 1980s, crowds of

nonviolent Filipinos thronging Manila’s Edsa Avenue invented the “people

power” movement that inspired uprisings from the “color revolutions” in

Eastern Eu rope and Central Asia to the Ira ni an Green Movement of 2009,

to the Arab Spring of 2011, which swept through Egypt, Yemen, Syria, and

other nations. Now, as one demo cratically elected Philippine government

after the next becomes mired in corruption and self- dealing, Filipinos are

increasingly disenchanted with demo cratic rule.50

African nations that had made major progress in the previous de cade

also have regressed badly. Kenya, where, after the rule of longtime dictator

Daniel arap Moi, many people believed that the country— the wealthiest

and most globalized in east Africa— would become a vibrant democracy,

has collapsed into interethnic battles and newly repressive governments.

This decline is being repeated in Nigeria, the most vital nation in west

Africa. In Uganda, Yoweri Museveni, who had amassed enormous pop u lar

goodwill for ending confl icts and rebuilding the economy after the disas-

trous regimes of Milton Obote and Idi Amin, had promised to only serve

only four years when he became president in 1986. Yet he kept fi nding

reasons to stick around, until he fi nally forced through a constitutional re-

write in 2005 that removed presidential term limits altogether.51 By 2011,

after he won another presidential term in a fraudulent election, his security

forces had to repeatedly clear the streets of Kampala with massive shows of

force.

Under Vladimir Putin and his protégé Dmitri Medvedev, Rus sia,

which in the 1990s had developed a vibrant media and a robust if chaotic

democracy that provided an example to many other former Soviet states, has

discovered a nostalgia for Soviet repression. The last truly in de pen dent Rus-

sian po liti cal party, the Union, or Right Forces, merged with pro- Kremlin

parties several years ago, leaving virtually no opposition in the Duma.52

“Twenty years after the fall of the Berlin Wall, the basic idea that po liti cal

opposition is a useful, legitimate po liti cal phenomenon remains remarkably

weak in much of the [post- Soviet] region,” noted Thomas Carothers of the

Carnegie Endowment for International Peace in a study of democracy’s

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 23

global challenges. “Dominant po liti cal elites treat po liti cal opposition as

inherently disloyal.”53

By 2009, according to an analysis by Freedom House, the former Soviet

Union was one of the least free regions of the world—- even before Putin

announced that he would again be taking total control of Rus sia, the most

important post- Soviet state.54 Belarus, the country closest to Rus sia po liti-

cally and culturally, fl irted with reform but, by the end of the 2000s, had

retreated into an authoritarian, statist regime little different from the

Belarus of the early 1990s. Its long- serving leader, Alexander Lukashenko,

won reelection in 2010 with a farcical 80 percent of the vote; protesters who

gathered to demonstrate, sometimes simply by standing in public places and

sarcastically clapping their hands, were beaten and jailed.55 Two of the

greatest hopes for the former Soviet states, Georgia and Ukraine, also are

going backward, with Ukraine’s president, Viktor Yanukovych, installing

Putinesque policies that crushed any opposition and resulted in the arrests

and jailing of many politicians, including, in the summer of 2011, the oppo-

sition leader and former presidential candidate Yulia Tymoshenko, who was

given seven years in prison in a trial that was clearly predetermined. Along

with Tymoshenko’s trial, the Ukrainian government passed new mea sures

giving the president nearly unlimited powers and curtailing the country’s

vibrant civil society, and launched investigations of eleven other opposition

fi gures. Yanukovych simultaneously emasculated the Ukrainian parliament,

made much of the country’s court system subordinate to his decrees, and had

the country’s constitution altered to give the president domineering power.56

In Asia, other supposed success stories have regressed as well. The

Malaysian government, which once had vowed to uphold total freedom for

online media in order to promote the country as a high- tech hub, began

developing new ways to censor both the print and the online media. The

regime started arresting po liti cal opponents, whistleblowers, and civil soci-

ety leaders, including opposition leader Anwar Ibrahim, who himself faced

jail on dubious charges of sodomizing an aide.57 (Anwar ultimately was

acquitted and then hit with new charges related to or ga niz ing a po liti cal

protest.) Once such people are in custody, strange things can happen. In July

2009, a man named Teoh Beng Hock visited the offi ces of the country’s

anticorruption commission in order to testify about witnessing the misuse of

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

24 Democracy Goes into Reverse

public funds. The next day, he was found dead on the roof of the adjacent

building. Offi cials said he’d jumped from the anticorruption headquarters

to his death. In de pen dent forensic scientists later found evidence that Teoh

had been beaten and sodomized with an object before he “leaped” to his

death.58 In Cambodia, after the collapse of the Khmer Rouge and the end of

years of civil war, some 93 percent of eligible voters came to the polls in a

landmark fi rst free election in 1993, and the international community, which

oversaw— and paid for— the largest reconstruction effort to that time in

Cambodia, exulted in the turnout. But since then the country’s po liti cal

system has gone steadily downhill. Prime Minister Hun Sen, a rugged sur-

vivor of the Khmer Rouge years, has silenced nearly every opposition group,

intimidated the media, and overseen beatings and outright killings of many

po liti cal rivals.59

Meanwhile, Venezuela’s Hugo Chavez, like Thaksin an elected leader

with little dedication to constitutionalism or the rule of law, has pushed

his “Bolivarian revolution” closer to outright authoritarianism, as has Evo

Morales in Bolivia and Peruvian president Ollanta Humara.60 And in Mex-

ico, the security forces, working in collaboration with the president, have

taken advantage of the war on drugs to basically take over many Mexican

states, turning them into essentially army- run fi efdoms. Military personnel

now occupy hundreds of positions traditionally held by civilian personnel,

especially those in law enforcement. “The military is becoming the su-

preme authority— in some cases the only authority— in parts of some

states,” said Mexican po liti cal analyst Denise Dresser.

So many countries now remain stuck between authoritarianism and

democracy, reported Marc Plattner and Larry Diamond, co-editors of the

Journal of Democracy, that “it no longer seems plausible to regard [this

condition] simply as a temporary stage in the pro cess of demo cratic transi-

tion.”61

Despite the demo cratic recession of recent years, and the destructive impact

of the global economic crisis on democracy, even today most Western lead-

ers more or less unthinkingly assume that democracy will eventually tri-

umph worldwide. At the end of the Cold War, nearly all Western leaders

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 25

and po liti cal scientists believed demo cratic values had triumphed. The no-

tion of demo cratic victory was captured most famously in Francis Fuku-

yama’s essay “The End of History,” in which he claimed, “The triumph of

the West, of the Western idea, is evident fi rst of all in the total exhaustion of

viable systematic alternatives to Western liberalism.”62 This view, though

seldom so baldly stated, dominated most Western discourse on po liti cal

change in the 1990s and early 2000s and, despite the changes in the world,

still dominates today. The enormous relief triggered by the collapse of the

Soviet Union and the end of fi ve de cades of tightrope diplomacy between

the great powers seemed, as Robert Kagan noted, “to augur a new era of

global convergence. The great adversaries of the Cold War suddenly shared

many common goals, including a desire for economic and po liti cal integra-

tion.”63 Human progress, constantly marching forward, would spread de-

mocracy everywhere.

Of course, there is no consensus on the defi nition of democracy, but

nearly all such defi nitions include certain components of democracy. In

discussing democracy, this book uses a relatively widely accepted defi nition

also utilized by the Economist Intelligence Unit in its analyses of the quality

of democracy around the world. As the EIU notes, democracy means “gov-

ernment based on majority rule and the consent of the governed, the exis-

tence of free and fair elections, the protection of minorities and respect for

basic human rights. Democracy presupposes equality before the law, due

pro cess and po liti cal pluralism.” This book adds another component not

included in this basic defi nition: demo cratic po liti cal culture, which includes

respect for the concept of a loyal opposition, support for demo cratic po liti cal

institutions, and interest in and access to po liti cal participation, among

other components.

For a time, the rosy predictions of global demo cratization seemed

warranted. Po liti cal freedom indeed blossomed in a “fourth wave” of

demo cratization in the developing world in the 1990s and the early part of

this century. The old great- power adversaries, the United States and Rus sia,

worked together on challenges ranging from the fi rst Gulf War to the safe

decommissioning and storage of nuclear weapons. While authoritarians still

ruled most of Africa, Eastern Eu rope, and Asia in 1990, by 2005 democracies

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

26 Democracy Goes into Reverse

had emerged across these continents, and some of the most powerful develop-

ing nations, including South Africa, South Korea, and Brazil, had become

solid democracies. By 2005 more than half the world’s people lived under

demo cratic systems.64 With the color revolutions in Georgia, Ukraine, and

Kyrgyzstan, the fall of Saddam Hussein, the overthrow of the Taliban, the ap-

parent end of military interventions in Turkey, the stirrings of reform in small

Persian Gulf nations like Bahrain, and even a reformist presidency under

Muhammad Khatami in Iran, the Middle East and Central Asia, long the

exception to global demo cratic change, seemed ready to make the transition.

Increasingly confi dent Western leaders came to assume that liberal

demo cratic capitalism would conquer every nation on earth. President George

H. W. Bush promised a “new world order” in which “freedom and respect

for human rights fi nd a home among all nations.”65 George W. Bush declared

in his second inaugural that the United States would promote the demo-

cratization of the world, saying, “We will per sis tent ly clarify the choice

before every ruler and every nation— the moral choice between oppression,

which is always wrong, and freedom, which is eternally right.”66 In a meet-

ing with China president Jiang Zemin, Bill Clinton told Chinese leaders that

they stood “on the wrong side of history” by perpetuating authoritarian rule,

and later warned the Chinese leadership that trying to control the liberating

effects of new technologies was like trying to “nail Jell- O to the wall.”67

Of late, the Jell- O has been nailed. Not only has democracy experienced

its longest and deepest rollback in forty years, a confl uence of po liti cal, eco-

nomic, and social changes could halt global demo cratization indefi nitely.

Autocracies seem to be gaining not only strength but legitimacy, with au-

thoritarian regimes like China posting high growth rates and powerful

new democracies like Brazil and South Africa unwilling to join the West in

pushing for demo cratic change in the developing world.68 From Thailand

to Rus sia, middle classes and many leaders in developing nations that have

regressed from real democracy appear to have little appetite for a return to

demo cratic rule. Seeing the rise of Islamist parties, new sectarian rifts, and

the fl ight of many religious and ethnic minorities, the middle classes in

many of the countries in the Middle East and Africa where new revolts

have occurred in the past two years already have begun to doubt the value

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 27

of democracy, leading them to support renewed types of authoritarian rule,

including continued powers for the military.

To be sure, when viewed against the entire expanse of the twentieth and

twenty- fi rst centuries, or against even longer periods of human history, the

world today appears to be highly demo cratic. At the start of the twentieth

century, as we will see in the next chapter, only a tiny fraction of the coun-

tries in the world could have been called true democracies. Nearly all of

these democracies were in Western Eu rope, North America, and the for-

mer overseas territories of the British Empire.69 Together they constituted

no more than one- tenth of the world’s population. Empires ruled much of

Eu rope, Asia, and Africa. Even as recently as 1988, before the collapse of the

Berlin Wall, a small minority of the world’s people lived under democracy;

Central Asia and Eastern Eu rope had no democracies, and sub- Saharan

Africa had virtually no true democracies as well.

Compared with those bleak periods, the number of democracies in the

early twenty- fi rst century seems like a great advance. Many African nations

have made the beginnings of a transition to demo cratic rule, and real de-

mocracy is increasingly entrenched in Eastern Eu rope, the Baltics, and many

parts of East Asia. No one expects that democracy will backslide to its

weak global position in 1900; the prospect of democracy being wiped away

completely, as seemed possible in the 1930s, now appears all but impossible.

Indeed, the point of this book is not to suggest that democracy is in its death

throes, but that it is in decline over the past decade— a decline that should

be worrying because of its vast impact on human rights, economic free-

doms, and the international system. If policy makers do not recognize this

decline, and understand the complex reasons, examined later on, for de-

mocracy’s current weakness in many developing nations, they will fail to

reverse this trend. Worse, as the economic crisis lags on, publics in many

developing regions may become far more distrustful of demo cratic rule— a

prospect that could indeed help set the world back to the situation in 1988

or before.

Choosing to look at democracy’s decline over the past de cade is not arbi-

trary. Just as 1974, and then 1989, were watershed years for demo cratization,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

28 Democracy Goes into Reverse

so too was 2001 such a year, although not in a positive way. Over the subse-

quent de cade certain trends, which were less apparent in the 1980s or 1990s,

clearly indicated weakening democracy throughout the developing world.

Those trends began to materialize in 2001, and they would grow stronger

throughout the 2000s and into the early 2010s, as surveys such as those done

by Freedom House and the Economist Intelligence Unit, as well as my own

research, would show this distinct decline in democracy in many nations.

The global landscape that had begun to be transformed in 2001 in-

cluded the weakening of American power. In the months after the Septem-

ber 11, 2001, attacks, American power seemed to be at its zenith, but as the

United States became entangled in two long wars stemming in some ways

from that day, its power would ebb, with signifi cant consequences for Amer-

ica’s ability and willingness to attempt democracy promotion in the devel-

oping world. In 2001, too, both Rus sia and China would begin to consolidate

their leadership transitions, and in that year the foundations would be set

for the authoritarian great powers to reassert their dominance both at home

and in their near neighborhoods, where they would lead a backlash against

democracy. Also in 2001, broadband Internet began to become available to

a growing number of homes in developed countries, the fi rst step toward

what would become its widespread use, and would impact demo cratic

change in many developing nations. The early 2000s also saw the height of

the antiglobalization movement and the questioning of the Washington

consensus regarding economic liberalization, a change that would reverber-

ate through young democracies, as many citizens who had linked economic

and po liti cal reform would come to question whether democracy was nec-

essarily the best system to produce growth and development. Finally, in 2001

the initial signs of conservative, middle- class revolts against electoral democ-

racy would begin to emerge in many key developing nations, including

Pakistan, the Philippines, Venezuela, Rus sia, and others.

Though Thailand is not as unusual as many Thais seem to believe,

every country certainly has its own po liti cal history and circumstances.

Democracy was imposed by an occupier in Japan, midwifed by a king in

Spain, and fought over for de cades in Timor- Leste. Reversals of democracy

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 29

in each nation likewise have unique characteristics. In Thailand the king’s

prolonged illness has hurt demo cratic consolidation, while in Rus sia the

anarchy of the Boris Yeltsin era, in which a proud country teetered on the

brink of bankruptcy while oligarchs plundered its wealth, soured many

Rus sians on the freedoms of democracy. But the broad— and dangerous—

reasons for the global demo cratic rollback today differ relatively little.

Democracies have faced many challenges in the past, and at other

times countries that seemed to have demo cratized suffered serious rever-

sals, occasionally regressing, as in the case of Germany in the 1930s, to out-

right totalitarianism. But those reversals tended to be relatively isolated, and

eventually global democracy progressed once again. That progression can

no longer be taken for granted: today a constellation of factors, from the rise

of China to the lack of economic growth in new democracies to the West’s

fi nancial crisis, has come together to hinder democracy throughout the de-

veloping world. Absent radical and unlikely changes in the international

system, that combination of antidemo cratic factors will have serious staying

power.

Yet Western leaders do not seem to recognize how seriously democracy

is threatened in many parts of the developing world. Though some observ-

ers, like Freedom House, have begun to recognize how democracy has be-

come endangered, few have systematically traced how a form of government

once thought to be invincible has been found lacking in so many places

and consequently tossed aside, often by the very middle- class reformers who

once were democracy’s vanguard. Among se nior American offi cials, few

are willing to accept that the current climate is anything more than a blip in

democracy’s ultimate conquest of the globe, that the Arab Spring and Sum-

mer might not turn out to be like 1989’s year of demo cratic revolution— or

that a prolonged demo cratic rollback would have severe consequences for

global security, trade, and American strategic interests, not to mention the

well- being of millions of men and women across the developing world.

The offi cial national security strategy developed by the George W. Bush

administration, which enshrined democracy promotion as a central value of

U.S. foreign policy, carried the unstated assumption that, with U.S. backing,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

30 Democracy Goes into Reverse

democracy would continue to spread around the world. Although the

Obama administration’s 2010 national security strategy acknowledged

that this progress had met obstacles, experts within the administration

seemed to assume that, given the right adjustments in American policy,

the United States would soon be leading a renewed wave of global demo-

cratization.70

The United States is not the only entity that does not comprehend that

democracy’s progress may have stalled. In 2008, the Association of South-

east Asian Nations (Asean), the main regional grouping in Southeast Asia,

passed a new charter that made respect for human rights a core component

of membership. Even in private, se nior Asean offi cials argue that the region

is moving toward shared demo cratic values.71 This despite the fact that,

except in Indonesia, demo cratization and human rights have regressed

throughout Southeast Asia in the past ten years, as well as the fact that the

region is still no closer to having real shared values than it was when Asean

was formed more than four de cades ago.

African nations in 2001 agreed to a “New Partnership for Africa’s De-

velopment,” a continent- wide compact to instill norms of human rights and

good governance that was greeted with much celebration by Western do-

nors and many African leaders. Capturing this mood in 2006, the Sudanese

communications entrepreneur Mo Ibrahim launched a prize for the Afri-

can leader who best focused on development, governance, and education of

his or her people. Ten years into the “New Partnership,” African offi cials

continue to cite the compact and claim that the continent is moving toward

shared values of good governance and democracy, but this trend is hardly

evident. In 2010, unable to fi nd a leader who exemplifi ed reform and good

governance, the Ibrahim board decided not to award its annual gift.72

Prolonged demo cratic rollback will have serious implications. Evidence

suggests that one of the major reasons countries demo cratize is that nations

around them are demo cratizing.73 A halt to this process— particularly if

middle- class men and women lead this demo cratic breakdown or fl ee places

like the Middle East and Africa rather than standing for democracy—

could call into question many of the assumptions of the post– Cold War

world and could lead to a new era of confl ict. Though there have been ex-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 31

ceptions, in general the theory that democracies do not go to war against

other democracies has held true, while authoritarian states fi nd it much

easier to go to war, whether against democracies or against other autocra-

cies. Even without actual war, a divergence of core po liti cal values will make

it harder for nations around the world to make progress on critical inter-

national issues, from climate change to free trade. Demo cratic rollback could

impede commerce: despite the facile assumption by some Western business

leaders that authoritarian regimes provide more stable environments for

investment, in reality autocracies generally fail to provide the rule of law

and impartial judiciary that most Western investors require; prolonged

demo cratic rollback could thus worsen the global business climate. Finally,

a global demo cratic rollback will undermine perhaps the most critical foun-

dation of American soft power— its ideology— as competing ideologies like

China’s model of development grow more powerful.

Perhaps most important of all, a prolonged demo cratic rollback could

condemn the citizens of many of these countries, from Rus sia to Cambodia

to Venezuela, to increasing repression under ever more confi dent autocrats.

Already, over the past four years, activists not only in China but in Viet-

nam, Thailand, Venezuela, Rus sia, and many other countries whose gov-

ernments once allowed greater degrees of freedom have seen a much tighter,

less predictable po liti cal climate.

Grappling with this demo cratic decline and its potentially severe inter-

national consequences will require not only outlining the problem but also

gaining a deeper understanding of why democracy has faltered. To do so,

we must fi rst look back at the previous three waves of demo cratic change in

the twentieth century, as well as at the post– Cold War era of optimism and

Western triumphalism in the 1990s and early 2000s, the time of the fourth

wave of demo cratization in the developing world. By examining mistakes

made during the high point of the global demo cratic revolution, we may

understand how democracy has declined so rapidly and dramatically in a

number of developing nations across several continents. This decline has in-

cluded not only the rise of elected autocrats but also stark shifts in the views

of the general public about democracy in many countries— even those in the

Middle East. (We will not, however, examine the weakening of democracy

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

32 Democracy Goes into Reverse

in the established democracies of North America and Western Eu rope; even

though these nations’ po liti cal systems have many fl aws, unlike many devel-

oping nations they do not face regression to autocratic rule, and a full study

of the United States and Western Eu rope is well beyond the scope of this

book, though we will examine Central and Eastern Eu rope.)

To be sure, we must recognize that, particularly in the Middle East,

revolt and reform are in progress and sometimes can be hard to predict; this

book was written as the Arab Spring and Summer began to curdle, but its

outcomes remain very much uncertain.

Just as the demo cratic decline extends to nearly every part of the devel-

oping world, so too the reasons for the demo cratic rollback are diverse and,

often, intertwined. To understand why democracy has struggled over the

past de cade, and to consider ways to put global demo cratization back on

track, we have to examine not only why leaders like Putin and Chavez were

able to destroy demo cratic institutions, but also why the middle class allowed

these elected autocrats to do so, or accepted militaries reasserting their po liti-

cal power. The fact that the middle class, long considered the linchpin to

successful demo cratization, actually has turned against democracy in many

countries is perhaps the most striking and unsettling trend in democracy’s

global decline, and later on we will see in great detail how the middle class

has changed from a force for reform to an obstacle. In many countries, the

middle class acquiesced for a number of reasons: fear that democracy would

produce chaos, corruption, and weak growth; anger at the rise of elected

populists who disdain the rule of law; and worry that their own power will

be diminished. And as the middle class revolts, the working class often

fi ghts back, only further damaging demo cratic politics.

We also have to understand the international system. We have to ask

why today, even as middle- and working- class men and women in devel-

oping nations have allowed democracy to fail, many established democra-

cies, including the United States and emerging powers like South Africa

and Brazil, also have abandoned democracy promotion and human rights

advocacy. Indeed, with authoritarians like China wielding more power,

with established democracies in the West and the developing world reluc-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Democracy Goes into Reverse 33

tant to stand up for their values, or pursuing democracy promotion strate-

gies that too often focused on rhetoric, elections, and pro cess, the inter national

environment has become far more complicated and challenging for democ-

racy in the new millennium. And far too often, men and women in the

developing world have paid the price for these failures of democracy pro-

motion.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:45:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: How We Got Here

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.5

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

O nly ten years ago, few po liti cal leaders or theorists would have

predicted democracy’s decline. Even as late as the early 2000s, the

fourth wave of democracy, which in the 1990s and early 2000s

had swept through parts of Asia, Latin America, and— most notably—

Sub- Saharan Africa, still seemed to be holding up. And the fourth wave

built on three earlier waves of demo cratization, making it seem like the

natural extension of democracy’s global spread.

Throughout most of the twentieth century, democracy had been con-

fi ned to tiny islands of freedom in a generally repressive globe, dominated

by colonies, monarchies, and warlords. At the start of the twentieth cen-

tury, only twelve countries, nearly all in Western Eu rope and North Amer-

ica, could truly be called democracies, though roughly thirty nations had

established minimal demo cratic institutions and cultures, including Italy,

Argentina, Germany, Japan, and Spain. Po liti cal scientist Samuel Hunting-

ton would call this initial group of democracies, which gained freedoms in

the eigh teenth and nineteenth centuries and the early twentieth century, the

“fi rst wave” of democracy. These democracies— Britain, the United States,

the Scandinavian nations, France, Switzerland, and British dominions like

Canada and Australia— had their origins in the American and French

revolutions. This small group of countries generally shared long histories of

gradual demo cratic development, born in the theories of the Enlightenment,

the Eu ro pe an wars, and the civil strife of the early nineteenth century, and

the legal systems drafted in Eu rope and the United States after the French

and American revolutions.

Many of the fi rst wave democracies that came of age last, in the early

twentieth century, did not survive the First World War and the economic

How We Got Here

2

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 35

chaos of the 1930s. Spain, Italy, Austria, Germany, and many others crum-

pled in the face of a reverse wave of fascism and communism, and, as Hun-

tington notes, the initial demo cratic institutions that were germinating in

Poland, the Baltics, and in other parts of Central and Eastern Eu rope, as

well as in Brazil and Argentina, were snuffed out. Those countries that had

not already succumbed gave way to the military takeovers by fascist Ja-

pan, Italy, and Germany. Even at the end of the Second World War, de-

mocracy remained mostly limited to the same small club of countries in

Scandinavia, Western Eu rope, North America, and former British domin-

ions like Australia.

But the Second World War unleashed what would become known as

the second wave of global demo cratization. The Allies’ victory and occu-

pation of nations like Germany, Austria, and Japan allowed the occupiers

to foster a rebirth of demo cratic institutions and culture in those countries—

indeed, the new constitution drafted for Japan by its American occupiers

was far more liberal than Japa nese society would have accepted if Japa nese

leaders had drafted such a document themselves at that time. The defeat

of fascism, the triumph of the Anglo- American po liti cal model (at least in

areas not controlled by the Soviets), and the removal of Italy and Germany

as military powers provided space for Greece and Turkey to strengthen their

demo cratic institutions. In Latin America, meanwhile, Argentina, Venezu-

ela, Colombia, and Peru held demo cratic elections in the mid- 1940s.

By exhausting the British, German, Dutch, and French empires, the war

also triggered a wave of decolonization around the globe. A few of the newly

in de pen dent states, like India, Israel, and Malaysia, already had relatively sub-

stantial traditions of opposition politics and freedom of association, and were

able to build on those. Nigeria, India, Pakistan, Indonesia, and Malaysia,

among other newly free states, held initial elections and seemed to be put-

ting into place demo cratic institutions.

Countries like India, however, turned out to be the exception. As new states

emerged in Africa, Asia, and the Middle East in the 1950s and 1960s, many

Western po liti cal scientists and leaders believed that these new nations were

not fertile ground for democracy, at least not anytime soon. These countries

had little previous experience with elections and very few educated men

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

36 How We Got Here

and women, and they faced many challenges, from establishing education

systems to simply feeding their people. “Parliamentary democracy has a

dim future in Africa,” predicted a typical 1961 article titled “The Prospect

for Democracy in the New Africa.”1 In the late 1970s, in her famous Com-

mentary article “Dictatorships and Double Standards,” in which she pushed

the White House to back right- wing dictatorships as a bulwark against

revolutionary left- wing authoritarian regimes, Jeanne Kirkpatrick made a

similar argument, writing, “In the relatively few places where they exist,

demo cratic governments have come into being slowly, after extended prior

experience with more limited forms of participation.”2 Even as late as 1980,

then mayor of Paris (later president of France) Jacques Chirac told a group

of African leaders, “Multi- partyism is a po liti cal error, the type of luxury

that developing countries cannot afford.”3

With a few exceptions, like India’s Jawaharlal Nehru, who held a deep

and intense belief in Indian democracy, leaders of the former colonies es-

sentially echoed Kirkpatrick’s theme, publicly arguing that they could not

be expected to develop democracies overnight— not when they had so many

other priorities. Of course, postcolonial leaders in Africa and Asia had ulte-

rior motives for claiming that their people were not ready for democracy.

But without a doubt, most of the fi rst generation of postin de pen dence lead-

ers displayed little interest in democracy. Malawi’s fi rst postin de pen dence

leader, a Scottish- trained doctor named Hastings Banda who maintained

an intense love for all things Scottish and an obsession with Malawians’ per-

sonal grooming— his government banned long hair for men and pants for

women— named himself “Life President” of the country and had his picture

plastered inside every offi ce building and movie theater, as well as in most

homes.4 Banda, one of the most controlling of the postin de pen dence African

big men, certainly believed that his people couldn’t be trusted with the fran-

chise. Malawians, he told reporters, were “children” and needed a powerful

ruler to guide them.5

Theorists Huntington and Seymour Martin Lipset, meanwhile, ar-

gued that countries needed to attain a certain level of economic develop-

ment to create the conditions for successful democracy— a level of development

that virtually none of the postcolonial states had attained. The exact level of

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 37

development at which democracy solidifi es was diffi cult to pinpoint, but

many proponents of this modernization theory have argued that, once a

country reaches the income level, per capita, of a middle income nation, it

rarely returns to authoritarian rule. (Exceptions were states totally depen-

dent on oil wealth, in which a small elite could use oil simply to solidify its

control of power.) Economic development, these theorists argued, would

create such features as a sizable middle class, an educated populace, and

greater integration with the rest of the world.

In par tic u lar, development theorists like Huntington placed their bets

on the middle class as the primary moving force behind demo cratic change.

As the middle class grew in size, middle class men and women would build

new networks of business and society outside of the control of the state.

They would gain more education, build more ties to the outside world of

demo cratic ideas, and increasingly demand more social, po liti cal, and eco-

nomic freedoms. In addition, development would promote higher levels of

interpersonal trust, seen as critical to civic engagement in politics, to open

debate, and to forming opposition po liti cal parties. “In virtually every coun-

try [that had demo cratized] the most active supporters of demo cratization

came from the urban middle- class,” Huntington wrote.

For the most part, until the early 1970s, the theory that these poor, newly

in de pen dent nations could not support democracy seemed correct. Even

India suffered its own dramatic demo cratic reversal, when in the mid- 1970s

Prime Minister Indira Gandhi suspended the constitution and declared a

state of emergency, essentially making herself dictator. Indeed, in the 1960s

and 1970s democracy suffered another reverse wave, though this reverse did

not cancel out all the gains of the previous two waves. Military regimes took

power again in Greece and Turkey. Nearly every postcolonial African state

developed into some kind of authoritarian regime, often ruled by a domi-

neering in de pen dence leader like Kenya’s Jomo Kenyatta or Ghana’s Kwame

Nkrumah. Many of these nations also adopted highly centralized economic

policies, which not only failed to produce high growth rates but also con-

tributed to a general centralization of power in the hands of the ruling re-

gime. Postcolonial states that had seemed to offer prospects for democracy,

like Nigeria, Pakistan, Indonesia, and Burma, disintegrated into civil war

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

38 How We Got Here

or fell prey to military takeovers, such as the bloody civil confl ict in Indone-

sia in 1965– 66, where in the aftermath of a military takeover communal

riots killed as many as one million Indonesians.

And if Asia’s postcolonial leaders proved more successful eco nom ical ly

than their counterparts in Africa, opening their countries to international

trade and using the power of the state to support industrialization and pri-

mary education made them no less dictatorial than their African peers. The

leaders of South Korea, Taiwan, and Singapore— Park Chung Hee, Chiang

Kai- shek, and Lee Kuan Yew, respectively— established spartan, tightly con-

trolled states. Thailand’s military generals might allow American companies

and American soldiers into their country, but not American- style democ-

racy. When a group of prodemocracy opposition politicians criticized the

ruling Thai junta in 1949, the security forces grabbed four men from the

opposition, who never made it out of police custody. When the police fi nally

released their bodies, the corpses were pocked with bullet holes and showed

signs of torture, including swollen eyes and ears, burns over their bodies

(likely from lit cigarettes), and shattered legs.6 Overall, in the late 1960s and

early 1970s, in the second reverse wave, as many as one- third of the countries

that had been democracies in the early 1960s had reverted to authoritarian

rule by the early 1970s. The reverse wave, Huntington noted, sparked broad

pessimism that stable democracy could take hold anywhere in the develop-

ing world.

The international system enabled authoritarian rule and, generally,

posed a major obstacle to demo cratic change during the Cold War. The

Soviet Union crushed stirrings of demo cratic reform in Hungary, Czech o-

slo vak i a, and other Soviet satellites. Meanwhile, not only did many Western

leaders tolerate anticommunist autocracies, by the 1970s— with oil shocks

staggering the U.S. economy and the retreat from Vietnam denting Amer-

ican military confi dence— they also openly wondered whether democ-

racy could actually defeat communism around the world. In 1977 Henry

Kissinger, the former secretary of state and a believer in détente with the

Soviet Union, wrote, “Today, for the fi rst time in our history, we face the

stark reality that the [communist] challenge is unending.”7 Kissinger’s views

were widely shared among American policy makers and intellectuals, most

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 39

of whom in the 1970s and early 1980s accepted that the Soviet Union would

not reform, that communism and democracy would have to coexist indefi -

nitely, and that democracy might eventually turn out to be the historical

accident, restricted to a few societies of the West and perhaps doomed even

there.8

Even when Western allies crushed potential young democracies, Cold

War realities dominated. In 1975, as Portugal released its last colonial

possessions, the leaders of one of those possessions, East Timor, developed

plans to build an in de pen dent democracy on their tiny half- island. But that

year giant Indonesia invaded Timor with the tacit consent of the United

States and other powers, including the regional power, Australia. In a meet-

ing with Indonesian dictator Suharto, President Gerald Ford and Secretary

of State Kissinger made clear they would not stand in the way. “What ever

you do,” Kissinger told Suharto, according to documents later released

under the Freedom of Information Act, “We will try to handle it in the best

way possible.”9 Indonesia launched a brutal military occupation of East

Timor. According to an estimate by Geoffrey Robinson of the University

of California at Los Angeles, as many as 200,000 East Timorese— close to

half the population— died from the occupation in the late 1970s.10

In April 1974, in an event that was only later recognized as having launched

the third wave of demo cratization, leftist military offi cers in Portugal, frus-

trated with the government’s continued commitment to expensive and bloody

colonial wars, deposed the authoritarian regime that had ruled the country

for fi ve de cades. Thousands of Portuguese fl ocked into the streets of Lisbon,

gathering near the fl ower market, where they began waving carnations and

sticking them into soldiers’ gun barrels to show their support for the rebels.

The coup paved the way for an opening of the Portuguese po liti cal system,

and within a year of the “Carnation Revolution,” Portugal had held a free

election.

Beginning with the Carnation Revolution, democracy spread in the

third wave across southern Eu rope, to parts of East Asia and Latin Amer-

ica, and, after 1989, to much of post- Soviet Eastern Eu rope. Between the

mid- 1970s and the early 1990s, some thirty authoritarian nations would

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

40 How We Got Here

become demo cratic, and more would develop at least some trappings of

democracy. Of course, the idea of a “demo cratic wave”— political science

shorthand for sweeping change— could be overstated. Specifi c domestic

factors in each nation precipitated demo cratization, and it would be im-

possible to claim that po liti cal change in one nation necessarily sparked

change somewhere else. But in certain regions and at certain times, like

Latin America in the late 1970s and early 1980s, or Eastern Eu rope in 1989,

the sheer number of countries undergoing change in a short time meant that

reforms in Brazil or Poland did have a demonstration effect, infl uencing the

po liti cal situation in Argentina or Czech o slo vak i a. The Carnation Revolu-

tion, for instance, was watched carefully in neighboring Spain. Shortly after-

ward, with the death of Spanish dictator Francisco Franco, Spain embarked

on its own transition, in which King Juan Carlos helped manage a demo-

cratic opening.11 Reforms in Brazil and Argentina in the late 1970s and early

1980s encouraged the reformers in Chile, who had already begun pushing

back against dictatorship. Chile restored democracy in 1990 and built what

is now arguably the most stable demo cratic system in Latin America.12

Many of these third wave nations also had experienced rapid economic

growth in the 1970s, seemingly adding support to Huntington’s theory that

growth helps build a middle class and, thus, demo cratic change. In the late

1960s and early 1970s, economic reforms helped usher in high growth in

Spain and Greece and other southern Eu ro pe an nations, and several of the

Asian nations that would demo cratize in the third wave, including the

Philippines, South Korea, Thailand, and Taiwan, also posted high growth

rates in the 1970s and early 1980s. In the case of Korea, Thailand, and Tai-

wan, these growth rates were some of the highest in the world. The military

regimes running these nations often played a role in sparking the growth

through free market policies, but in Greece, Spain, and other nations, they

proved incapable of managing some of the challenges of growth, including

infl ation, higher public debt, migration to urban areas and the need for

greater social ser vices, and macroeconomic instability. This lack of economic

management hurt the autocrats’ legitimacy, particularly with the middle

class businesspeople.

In addition, these nations’ middle classes seemed to respond to growth

exactly as Huntington and Lipset had predicted. Demanding greater eco-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 41

nomic, social, and po liti cal freedoms, urban middle class men and women

led demonstrations in the Philippines, Argentina, Chile, Taiwan, South

Korea, and many other nations. In countries like Bulgaria or Burma, where

the urban middle class was much smaller, demo cratization during the third

wave faced many more challenges, and had a harder time laying founda-

tions for demo cratic consolidation.

In the Philippines, it was primarily Manila’s middle class, over a mil-

lion men and women, who formed the bulk of the People Power movement

that forced dictator Ferdinand Marcos to step down in 1986 and fl ee into

exile. In South Korea in the late 1980s, middle class urbanites in Seoul, in-

cluding many university students, led angry and sometimes violent protests

against dictator Roh Tae Woo, forcing him to concede to demo cratic re-

forms and, ultimately, paving the way for the presidencies of former dissi-

dents Kim Young Sam and Kim Dae Jung, who’d once been hunted and

nearly killed by the military regime.

Looking to the Philippines example, Thailand, Malaysia, Sri Lanka,

and Bangladesh also built fl awed but increasingly reformist governments,

while demonstrators in Burma in part modeled their massive 1988 prode-

mocracy protests on the People Power movements in Manila.

The middle class did not always act so forcefully, but it invariably

played a major role. In Chile, Turkey, and Brazil, gradual economic develop-

ment and slow pressure for reform from an emerging middle class ulti-

mately forced leaders to negotiate transitions to democracy and to return

the military to the barracks. In apartheid South Africa, middle class white

liberals, tired of their country’s isolation and its negative impact on com-

merce, subtly pressured the ruling National Party to liberalize. Many of

these middle class attempts at po liti cal reform began with mea sures to so-

lidify demo cratic institutions. In South Africa, leaders backed by the urban

middle class passed one of the most progressive constitutions in the world,

recognizing a vast array of human rights including the right to healthcare,

housing, and education. In Thailand, idealistic young Bangkokians, some-

times working with reform- minded foreign NGOs, wrote and passed a

forward- thinking constitution with broad protections for rights and clauses

that created in de pen dent institutions to oversee po liti cal competition and

prevent vote buying.13

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

42 How We Got Here

Later in the third wave, when coups threatened nascent democracies,

middle class men and women stood up for reform. As the Argentine mili-

tary threatened the civilian government in 1985 and 1987, the civilian lead-

ers called hundreds of thousands of people out into the streets of Buenos

Aires to support the government’s legitimacy. In the Philippines, post–

People Power leader Corazon Aquino faced down multiple coup attempts,

including a serious one in late 1989 by Marcos loyalists. Each time, Aquino

called upon her support among middle class Manila residents, using tele-

vised speeches to rally her faithful, and staving off all of the military’s

attempted putsches.

The middle classes’ re sis tance to demo cratic rollback was not the only

sign, during the third wave, of their seemingly deep commitment to de-

mocracy. Numerous polls taken during the third wave across Latin Amer-

ica, Asia, Southern and Eastern Eu rope, and other demo cratizing regions

showed extremely high levels of support for democracy. In one such study

cited by Huntington, around 75 percent of Peruvians in 1988 believed that

democracy was the most desirable po liti cal system. In another series of

polls, taken in a range of former Soviet satellites, overwhelming majorities,

primarily in urban middle class areas, declared that democracy was prefer-

able to all other forms of government.

Broader public demands for democracy also challenged authoritarian lead-

ers across the third wave at a time when many of these authoritarians no

longer could count on the backing of the Soviet Union or the United States

as the Cold War came to a close. The Solidarity protests at Poland’s ship-

yards in the early 1980s did not immediately force an end to Polish com-

munism, but they helped set the stage for the revolutions of 1989, which

quickly spread from the more developed Eastern Eu ro pe an nations to even

the least developed, like Bulgaria and, eventually, Albania, which had been

kept in near isolation during the Cold War by its paranoid, xenophobic

ruler, Enver Hoxha. Facing its own economic challenges, the Soviet Union

had less capacity to repress dissent in its satellites, while, in the United

States, support for democracy and human rights was beginning to build.

The People Power movement in the Philippines indeed not only pushed

Ferdinand Marcos out of power but also helped reshape American thinking

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 43

about the strategic benefi ts of authoritarian regimes, a shift that would

add fuel to global demo cratization in the third wave. As crowds gathered in

Manila to call for Marcos’s ouster, the outpouring prompted some offi cials

within the administration of President Ronald Reagan to begin aggressively

promoting the idea that demo cratic governments in developing nations like

the Philippines ultimately would prove better partners for Washington than

even the friendliest authoritarian regimes— and that the United States thus

should reduce its support for even avowedly anticommunist autocrats. Paul

Wolfowitz, who was assistant secretary of state for East Asian affairs dur-

ing the anti- Marcos protests, wrote in 2009 following the death of People

Power leader Corazon Aquino, “Some U.S. offi cials in the mid- 1980s de-

fended Marcos on the grounds that ‘there’s no real alternative’ . . . but that

ignored the fact that continued U.S. support for Marcos was itself discourag-

ing opposition.” In fact, Wolfowitz wrote, Washington fi nally made a crucial

decision that would help push forward the third wave of democratization—

that demo cratic government, not a conservative autocrat, was the best anti-

dote to communism: “In the end, the conclusion was that it would be more

dangerous if Marcos continued on his current course.”14

Wolfowitz played a central role in pushing the Reagan administration,

still wedded to a policy of backing conservative dictatorships, to abandon its

support for Marcos and embrace the prodemocracy movement in Manila.

Beginning with a Wall Street Journal article he wrote in 1985 calling for

American democracy promotion to counter communism, Wolfowitz advo-

cated, in public and in private administration interagency meetings, for

the White House to embrace demo cratic reforms in the Philippines. Em-

bracing the democracy movement would be a sharp change for the United

States and a risk in the Philippines, which at that time was a critical Amer-

ican ally and home to important naval bases. Though a de cade earlier Wol-

fowitz would have found few allies for his cause, by the mid- 1980s pressure

to make democracy promotion a part of American and Western Eu ro pe an

policy had begun to build among a community of academics, writers, con-

gressional representatives, and a few policy makers, both neoconservatives

like Wolfowitz and, later, liberal internationalists like Samantha Power and

Michael Ignatieff, as well as many West German, British, and Nordic activ-

ists and writers. What’s more, the coming end of the Cold War, a de cade

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

44 How We Got Here

later, would give their arguments greater resonance, because it would be-

come harder for American realists to use the confl ict with the Soviet Union

as a reason to prop up pro- Western dictators like Marcos or Mobutu, or for

Western Eu ro pe an realists to advocate their own détente with the nations

of the Warsaw Pact.

Wolfowitz and his allies had argued during the Manila protests that,

in the long run, the global spread of democracy would be in America’s

interest. Demo cratization, they believed, would minimize the possibility of

global confl icts that might necessitate American intervention, reduce the

corruption and rent- seeking that added burdens to American companies

investing abroad, enlarge the sphere of countries committed to free trade

and free markets, and generally enhance America’s prestige abroad. It was

an idea that already had begun to gain traction in the Carter administration,

which had made human rights a focus. The rhetoric of demo cratization also

appealed to Carter’s successor, who usually sought broad visions rather than

policy details, and it gained traction in Washington and other Western capi-

tals. As Reagan declared in a speech to the American Conservative Union,

“America’s foreign policy supports freedom, democracy, and human dig-

nity for all mankind, and we make no apologies for it. The opportunity so-

ciety that we want for ourselves we also want for others, not because we’re

imposing our system on others but because those opportunities belong to

all people.”15

The democracy advocates had help. In 1983 the National Endowment

for Democracy (NED) was founded in Washington, funded through an

annual congressional grant and given a mission to support demo cratic insti-

tutions around the world, including free media, unions, and po liti cal parties.

Partner democracy- promotion organizations like the National Demo cratic

Institute and the International Republican Institute, also established in the

early 1980s, were designed to augment NED’s overseas work.16 From the

beginning, much of NED’s work was pop u lar with civil society organiza-

tions in developing nations, and extremely unpop u lar with rulers, though

by the 2000s that would change: as American democracy- promotion efforts

during the George W. Bush era became increasingly unpop u lar in regions

like the Middle East and South Asia, NED grantees from civil society

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 45

organizations would hide their affi liation with the group.17 But earlier on,

NED grants helped speed transitions to democracy in countries like Poland,

where the group invested heavily in the Polish trade unions that played a

major role in criticizing the communist regime.18 Private organizations that

performed similar functions, like George Soros’s constellation of Open

Society initiatives, also would add to the investments in demo cratization in

the third wave nations.

With the end of the Cold War, demo cratization moved to the forefront of

American policy making, and the third wave of demo cratization expanded

beyond the post- Soviet states to include parts of Latin America and Asia

and even some African nations. Democracy advocates on both the right

and the left gained infl uence and power. Some, like Madeleine Albright,

took high- profi le positions in the administration of President Bill Clinton.

The United States, now an unrivaled superpower with a soaring economy,

enjoyed the luxury of making democracy promotion a central pillar of for-

eign policy; America could embark on armed foreign interventions to save

nations trying to build new democracies, even when those countries were

tangential to American strategic interests. The American public, riding the

economic boom of the mid- and late 1990s, would tolerate a more interna-

tionalist foreign policy; American liberals, who since the Vietnam War had

linked military intervention to overaggressive, even brutal, American power,

could now support the use of force to prevent crimes against humanity and

to save beleaguered potential democracies like East Timor or Kosovo. And

if the United States wanted to promote democracy and help build a new

class of po liti cal leaders, even close to the traditional spheres of infl uence of

Rus sia or China, who was going to stop it? By the mid- 1990s, Moscow was

on the verge of bankruptcy and Beijing still had not fully recovered from

the stain of the Tiananmen massacre.

As president, Clinton decided to make democracy promotion a core

part of his foreign policy. Searching for a theme that would convey a foreign

policy for the post– Cold War era and would be remembered by history,

Clinton had settled on one phrase: demo cratic enlargement.19 Demo cratic

enlargement, he decided in meetings with his National Security Council,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

46 How We Got Here

would form the center of his foreign policy and would be a successor to

the containment policy of the Cold War. It would capture the optimism

and hope of the post– Cold War era and would wed optimism to strategic

purpose. Enlargement would mean that America’s priority now would be

to help expand the number of free states in the world, because, as National

Security Advisor Anthony Lake told historian Douglas Brinkley, “as free

states grew in number and strength the international order would become

both more prosperous and more secure.”20 The Clinton administration, he

said, would help consolidate young democracies, help counter the aggres-

sion of states hostile to democracy, and support the liberalization of undemo-

cratic nations.21 Of course, there would be exceptions, such as China and the

Middle East, but from early in his fi rst term, and even in his speeches on the

campaign trail, Clinton aggressively highlighted democracy promotion as

vital to American national interests. His fi rst National Security Strategy

stated that “all of America’s strategic interests— from promoting prosperity

at home to checking global threats abroad before they threaten our territory—

are served by enlarging the community of demo cratic and free market

nations.”22 In studying the Clinton administration’s record, Thomas

Carothers, of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, found that

Clinton had for the fi rst time institutionalized democracy promotion in the

U.S. foreign policy bureaucracy— every U.S. embassy now had to submit

an annual report on its democracy promotion efforts— and the White

House, in its bud geting requests, clearly made democracy promotion one of

its strategic priorities.23 Between the early 1990s and 2000, U.S. government

spending on democracy promotion grew from around $100 million annually

to over $700 million annually.24 Clinton attempted to support what he con-

sidered the most important nations on the verge of demo cratization, includ-

ing Rus sia and Mexico; under Clinton, the United States became Rus sia’s

largest investor, American democracy- promotion organizations like NED

expanded their Rus sia programs, and the Clinton administration pushed

the International Monetary Fund, G7, and World Bank to use their re-

sources to foster demo cratization in Rus sia.25 The White House drastically

expanded funding for demo cratic institution building and market reforms

in the newly free nations of Eastern Eu rope, and, on the campaign trail in

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

How We Got Here 47

1996, Clinton boasted, “With our help, the forces of reform in Eu rope’s

newly free nations have laid the foundations of democracy.”26

East Timor, which in 1975 had shown the limits of what Washington

would do to protect a nascent democracy during the Cold War, served as an

example again in 1999. As in 1975, a brutal bloodletting exploded in Timor.

After the majority of Timorese voted to separate from Indonesia, militias

with links to the Indonesian armed forces began a campaign of slaughter

that would not have been out of place in the Rwandan genocide. Gangs of

militiamen wielding machetes and automatic weapons hacked, disembow-

eled, and beheaded known in de pen dence supporters, aid workers, journal-

ists, and anyone else who happened to be in their way. Thousands died, and

70 percent of Timor’s infrastructure was destroyed. But this time the world

responded. Despite having minimal strategic interests in East Timor, major

powers like the United States, the United Kingdom, and Australia backed

an armed humanitarian intervention that, under the auspices of the United

Nations, ultimately stemmed the violence, allowed relief workers to avoid a

total catastrophe in East Timor, and ultimately helped Timor to fi nally

break from Indonesia and build a fragile and in de pen dent democracy.27

The Timor triumph, along with successful Western intervention in

Kosovo, only further emboldened Washington. With the end of the Soviet

Union, Western fears that democracy would not survive and that commu-

nism would last forever suddenly vanished. Few had predicted the Soviet

collapse, but in its wake a Western triumphalism quickly emerged. Francis

Fukuyama later protested that he never intended his “End of History” arti-

cle to express this conviction that liberal democracy had triumphed forever,

but the piece captured the victorious Western mood. Democracy, Clinton

administration offi cials now argued, had a universal appeal, and would

spread, well, universally— a belief, as Robert Kagan noted, rooted in the

Enlightenment concept of the inevitability of progress, of history constantly

moving forward toward human improvement.28 In aid conferences and

missions to developing nations in Africa, Asia, and Latin America, offi cials

from the World Bank, the International Monetary Fund, the United Na-

tions, U.S. government agencies, and other Western organizations preached

the new gospel of economic and po liti cal liberalization.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

48 How We Got Here

Kishore Mahbubani, a former se nior Singaporean foreign ser vice offi -

cial, remembered meeting a top Belgian offi cial in 1991, the year that prob-

ably marked the apex of post– Cold War triumphalism. Before a group of

Asians, the offi cial declared, “The Cold War has ended. There are only two

superpowers left: The United States and Eu rope.”29

Post–Cold War haughtiness even fi ltered into bilateral relations with

powers like Rus sia and China. In the 1990s Western scholars like Gordon

Chang predicted the coming collapse of the Chinese Communist Party and

took bets on when it would fall to a demo cratic uprising. American offi cials,

seeing in Yeltsin’s Rus sia the opposite of the Soviet Union— Russia would

now be a close friend, an American- style democracy— pushed to expand

NATO closer to Rus sia’s borders, ignoring warnings from experts that

Rus sian nationalism had hardly just vanished, and that Russians— and

Chinese— might resent this dramatic American intervention in their

backyard.30

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:44 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: The Fourth Wave

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.6

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

T he outskirts of blantyre, the commercial capital of Malawi,

are some of the most forlorn suburbs on earth. Years of on- and-

off drought and famine in the countryside have gradually de-

stroyed Malawi’s farming families, driving many people to settle in Blantyre,

where the men take odd jobs as guards at stores or as part- time bus drivers.

Rows of shacks made from scraps of metal and scavenged wood cover the

denuded hills outside the city, and, at night, if you are brave enough to walk

in these neighborhoods, you can see young men posted as guards in front of

the families’ tiny dwellings, since Malawi’s urbanization and deep poverty—

GDP per capita is roughly $800— have sparked a rise in violent crime. In

wealthier parts of the city, residents employ private security companies and

equip their houses with “panic rooms,” which don’t always work— home in-

vasions remain common, and the thieves often seem to be in cahoots with

the security guards assigned to watch the properties.

In the early morning, the sides of the rutted roads are so thick with

people walking to their jobs from the shantytowns that cars can fi nd these

routes diffi cult to negotiate. Nearly all the land outside Blantyre has been

ripped up. Wood has been stripped for houses, and edible plants taken for

food on the formerly lush hills above the green valleys of Thyolo, the tradi-

tional tea- growing region north of the city. In se nior housing in Thyolo,

el der ly planters, who settled in Malawi from Britain when it was still a

colony, still take afternoon tea and tiny British- style fi nger cakes. But out-

side of the carefully tended gardens of these residences, and beyond the lush

tea plantations owned by large companies, across Thyolo one can see only

arid scrub, razed buildings, and fruit plants ripped apart in search of food.

The Fourth Wave

3

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

50 The Fourth Wave

Women with babies tied on their backs with brightly colored chitenge cloths

jostle for space on the sides of the road with sickly vendors carry ing bat-

tered trays of avocados and bananas.

Children are everywhere. Malawi has one of the highest birthrates in

the world, and its fi fteen million people are jammed into a country the size

of Pennsylvania, with cities that resemble the packed metropolises of South

Asia more than the archetypical open landscapes of Africa. It also has a

staggeringly high rate of HIV/AIDS infection. The United Nations’ AIDS

program estimates that 14 percent of Malawians are infected, an epidemic

that, even in the era of antiretrovirals, has orphaned many kids, leaving

them to be cared for by grandparents, or by no one.1 At intersections in

Blantyre proper, packs of orphans clad in torn clothes and with matted hair

often waylay stopped or slow- moving cars to beg for food or a few kwacha,

the nearly worthless Malawian currency that piles up in stacks in mer-

chants’ shops.

And yet, for all its destitution Malawi was, until recently, a demo cratic

success story. After the country’s longtime dictator stepped down in the

early 1990s, the country held free, multiparty elections. The fi rst demo-

cratically elected president, Bakili Muluzi, was later accused of massive

corruption— but after Malawi’s top court upheld the constitution and barred

him from seeking a third term in the 2009 presidential election, he complied

with its ruling. His former protégé, Bingu wa Mutharika, now leading an

opposition party, won the presidency.

Beginning in the late 1990s and early 2000s, Malawi also developed a

culture of largely peaceful, vigorous po liti cal campaigning. The presiden-

tial election of 2009 exemplifi ed this trend. At one point during the winter

campaign a large crowd dressed in red, the color of John Tembo, was hol-

lering wildly for their candidate in front of an overgrown soccer fi eld next

to a divided highway. Across the road a smaller group of Mutharika back-

ers, all dressed in his party color, blue, had taken position, screaming into

the sky, clapping and singing, and thrusting massive posters of their candi-

date’s face at passing cars, nearly causing an accident. After a while some

Mutharika supporters crossed the street toward the Tembo group, yet they

didn’t make any effort to stir up violence— a common occurrence during

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 51

election campaigns in neighboring nations like Zimbabwe and Zambia.

Instead, several of the younger men dropped their Mutharika posters, pulled

out a ragged soccer ball, and started an impromptu dribbling exhibition

with two Tembo men. Later that year, Malawi would hold a relatively peace-

ful presidential election, marking another seeming transition to stable

democracy. The campaign was covered extensively in the local newspapers,

which suffered from lack of resources— reporters were paid little, and the

papers themselves often looked like they had been printed on rags— but

which reported on the candidates with boldness and style, chronicling nearly

every po liti cal battle that went on across the country. Despite some threats

from angry politicians, reporters rarely backed down, and each day’s paper

usually contained a scandal sheet rapping all the major politicians’ foibles.

Even as Malawi welcomed democracy, its leaders, and its citizens, also

came to associate po liti cal change with promises of economic prosperity.

Throughout the fourth wave of demo cratization, in the late 1990s and early

2000s, foreign donors and many local leaders who pushed the “Washington

Consensus” prescriptions of open markets and open societies, increasingly

made this association. But it was a dangerous link. No evidence had really

shown that open societies were more likely to create economic growth. In

fact, Kevin Hassett of the American Enterprise Institute has shown that, in

recent years, many authoritarian nations have outperformed freer coun-

tries.2 But in the late 1980s and 1990s, many developing world leaders—

and their advocates in the West— linked the two.

In the late 1980s, Malawi might have seemed a remote prospect for democ-

racy, but it was joined by many other demo cratizing nations from similar

levels of development. The fourth wave of global demo cratization, which

built on the gains of the third wave, began to crest in the late 1990s and con-

tinued into the early 2000s. While the third wave had swept through South-

ern Eu rope and parts of Eastern Eu rope, Latin America, and Asia, the

fourth wave included much of sub- Saharan Africa and many other coun-

tries that were poorer, more prone to confl ict, and, often, more remote, than

those in the third wave: East Timor, Cambodia, Mexico, Mozambique, and

Malawi, among many others.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

52 The Fourth Wave

In many ways, the uprisings in the Middle East in 2011 seemed to fi t in

with that fourth wave. The Middle East revolts took place in countries like

Yemen or Egypt— nations that were often as poor, authoritarian, or confl ict-

ridden—or all three— as those in the fourth wave nations. Before the Arab

Spring, just as in sub- Saharan Africa before the 1990s, many observers, and

indeed many Arabs, had all but written off the prospect of real change in

the Middle East for generations.

Just as in the third wave, a kind of positive diffusion effect took place

in which demo cratic change— sometimes backed by powerful advocacy by

established democracies, as in East Timor— in one fourth wave country

spilled over to neighboring nations. The revolts in Tunisia in December

2010, broadcast on satellite tele vi sion and social media, inspired reformers

fi rst in Egypt, and then in Bahrain, Syria, Libya, and other nations in the

Middle East. The dramatic end of apartheid in South Africa in the early

1990s, as well as liberalization in neighboring nations like Mozambique

and Zambia, helped create currents of change that autocratic leaders like

Malawian dictator Hastings Banda ultimately could not ignore. Throwing

off most of the remaining postcolonial dictators, many other poor African

nations, like Benin, held multiple free and fair elections.

In the former Soviet sphere, the progress toward democracy of former

communist states like Poland and Kyrgyzstan began to spill over into harder

cases, like Ukraine, Central Asian nations, and Georgia. New states carved

from the Soviet Central Asian republics, some of the poorest and most

ethnically heterogeneous parts of the former Soviet Union, held elections.

After the vicious Balkan wars of the 1990s, nearly every part of the former

Yugo slavia held real, competitive elections, with several, like Slovenia, ap-

proaching Western Eu ro pe an standards of stable democracy. Overall, by

the early 2000s, nearly half of the world’s population lived in countries that

were either full or partial democracies, up from less than half in the mid-

1970s.3

Sub- Saharan Africa made perhaps the greatest demo cratic gains in the

1990s and early 2000s, seemingly disproving arguments, sometimes made

by African leaders, that the region was too poor, too ethnically divided, and

too uneducated to make democracy work. From Malawi to postapartheid

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 53

South Africa, the continent disposed of so- called big men, held elections,

and paid lip ser vice to new demo cratic norms. Long- ruling parties in many

countries fi nally lost elections and willingly transferred power. Western

leaders, including President Bill Clinton, touted a “new generation” of Afri-

can leaders, men like Uganda’s Yoweri Museveni and Ethiopia’s Meles

Zenawi, who would commit themselves to reform and to priorities that

the fi rst postcolonial generation had often ignored.4

In Kenya, the era following Daniel arap Moi had begun exuberantly

in 2002 with the frenzied inauguration of former longtime opposition

leader Mwai Kibaki, who vowed to clean up, and open up, Kenyan politics.

At Kibaki’s inauguration, where the new president declared, “The era of

anything goes is now gone forever: Government will no longer be run on

the whims of individuals.” Africa journalist Michela Wrong tried to pay a

small bribe to a local driver, but he refused her money, saying that a new,

cleaner era had come to Kenya.5 Kibaki appointed John Githongo, a prom-

inent, outspoken local journalist who had bitterly criticized Moi’s autocratic

and venal style, as his anticorruption czar.

Like Kibaki, Olusegun Obasanjo, a former general with a relatively

clean reputation who won the Nigerian presidency in 1999 after the dictator

Sani Abacha died, took offi ce amid a wave of optimism. Obasanjo touted

himself as a reformer after the predation and outright thuggery of the

Abacha era; the day of his inauguration was called “Democracy Day,” and

a national holiday was declared.6 In the following months U. S. Secretary of

State Madeleine Albright called for greater American aid to Nigeria, prais-

ing Obasanjo for launching a demo cratic revolution that could rival “the

Czechoslovak ‘Velvet Revolution’ and South Africa’s long walk to freedom”

in its power and infl uence.7

The fourth wave of demo cratization, which had seemed so improbable

just a de cade earlier, cemented in many Western leaders’ minds the idea

that democracy eventually would come to every country. If a place as poor

and as confl ict- ridden as Malawi or Mozambique could build a viable demo-

cratic system, what nation could not? Critical international developments,

including the rapid expansion of communications technology, the end of the

Cold War, and the birth of Western democracy promotion, also seemed to

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

54 The Fourth Wave

foster the global spread of democracy. By the beginning of the 2000s, this

belief in the essential triumph of democracy had become a kind of religion

among Western leaders.

The color revolutions of the early 2000s capped off the fourth wave,

and only added to Western leaders’ demo cratic triumphalism. Beginning

with the Rose Revolution in Georgia in 2003 (some would add the protests

in Serbia in 2000), the term “color revolutions” came to mean peaceful,

pop u lar movements for demo cratic change, initially in the former Soviet

Union and old Eastern bloc.

To be sure, some fourth wave nations seemed, even in their best moments,

to be the “illiberal democracies” that prominent intellectual and writer

Fareed Zakaria has described— places like Cambodia, whose leaders never

really upheld what Zakaria calls “constitutional liberalism,” meaning pro-

tections of individual autonomy and dignity against coercion, including

the potential tyranny of a demo cratic majority.8 As Zakaria outlined in his

book The Future of Freedom: Illiberal Democracy at Home and Abroad,

many young democracies, led by popularly elected leaders who had little

interest in creating demo cratic institutions, trampled on minority rights,

religious freedoms, and economic rights. “In many developing countries,

the experience of democracy over the past few de cades has been one in

which majorities have— often quietly, sometimes noisily— eroded separa-

tions of power, undermined human rights, and corrupted longstanding

traditions of tolerance and fairness. . . . Demo cratization and illiberalism

are directly related,” he wrote.9 In India, where Zakaria was born, the mid-

1990s BJP government, popularly elected and supported by many Hindus,

fostered pogroms against Muslims, a religious minority, in states like Guja-

rat, and apparently set back India’s commitment to liberalism, which had

been enshrined at the time of in de pen dence by unelected Indian elites or by

leaders, like Jawaharlal Nehru, who were far more tolerant than most Indi-

ans. In Indonesia, where for thirty years relative interreligious and intereth-

nic peace had prevailed under Suharto’s iron grip (though, when he came to

power in the mid- 1960s, Suharto unleashed massive bloodshed), demo cratic

change in the late 1990s led to new waves of violence between Muslims and

Christians, Javanese and non- Javanese, and many other groups within In-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 55

donesian society.10 Unlike leaders like Suharto or Singapore’s Lee Kuan

Yew, who could “make shrewd choices for the long term,” demo cratic lead-

ers also would inherently be pulled into populist economic policies focused

on short- term gains at the expense of development.11

Zakaria argued further that the problem with these “illiberal democ-

racies” was not that they were insuffi ciently democratic— that their institu-

tions and po liti cal cultures needed to continue to mature, like those in the

West that had developed for de cades. This was a critique that had been made

by many demo cratization specialists, and even by demo crats in many devel-

oping nations themselves. Instead, he argued that they had too much democ-

racy, and that the only solution was authoritarian rule, or at least a kind of

oligarchic rule by the “best people”— the elites, like Nehru and other Indian

founding fathers, who had attended En glish boarding schools and then

Oxford or Cambridge. He celebrated leaders like Indonesia’s Suharto and

Pervez Musharraf, the military ruler of Pakistan throughout most of the

2000s who, by Zakaria’s reckoning, instilled greater tolerance of religious

and ethnic diversity than any civilian politician in that country could or

would have done.12 He seemed to even suggest that no Muslim- majority

nation was capable of real democracy, since illiberal Islamists would always

dominate an election and crush people’s freedoms— thus, a “liberal” dicta-

tor like Musharraf or Tunisia’s Zine Al- Abidine Ben Ali was the best alter-

native. He longed for earlier periods even in American history, when politics

was essentially decided by a small group of men who came from the “right”

background, attended the “right” universities, and then governed together at

the State Department, CIA, and the White House.

Some of Zakaria’s argument about illiberalism made inherent sense,

such as the critical observation that democracy means more than simply

elections; U.S. policy too often has focused on one relatively free election in

a developing nation while ignoring other signs suggesting that demo cratic

institutions are not being put into place. As we will see later, some “elected

autocrats”— popularly elected leaders in fragile democracies like Rus sia or

Thailand— have shown little commitment to the rule of law or to freedoms

of association, press, or religion, and a democracy promotion policy focused

primarily on elections, or a one- size- fi ts- all type of pro cess, can hardly be suc-

cessful. And in some instances, development- minded dictators like Suharto

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

56 The Fourth Wave

or Augusto Pinochet of Chile were able to pass economic reforms that set

the stage for sustained growth.

Yet a wide range of comprehensive studies has shown that it is impossi-

ble to fi nd a clear link between autocracy and growth. These dictators also

usually did little to set the stage for any demo cratic transition, since the

foundation of their rule was a desire to stay in power for life— when Suharto

was overthrown, he was focused on concentrating more wealth and power

into the hands of his family, not liberalizing the po liti cal environment or

opening up Indonesia’s cartelized markets. More important, these elected

autocrats alone, whom Zakaria despises, did not undermine these democra-

cies; as we will see, when this fourth wave crested these nations were neu-

tered by a combination of poor leadership, weak institutions, a complacent

middle class, slow growth, and corruption. This fourth wave also was not

helped by Western democracy promotion strategies heavy on rhetoric, elec-

tions, and pro cess, and it was light on actual funding on the ground, or an

understanding of how to make democracy more attractive to both middle

classes and working classes in the developing world.

But despite Zakaria’s legitimate concerns about young democracies,

some of which are echoed in this book, and even though many of these

elected autocrats often took their countries’ democracies backward, they

almost never left their nations more repressive than they had been under pre-

vious true dictatorships. In Thailand, for instance, Thaksin Shinawatra did

set the rule of law back during his prime ministership between 2001 and

2006: he intimidated the Thai media, bent the court system to his priorities,

and essentially sacked supposedly in de pen dent bureaucrats who defi ed his

policies. But only someone with no historical memory would argue that

Thaksin’s period as prime minister even began to compare to the bloodiest

days of Thailand’s past dictatorships, such as the late 1940s, when dictator

Phibul Songkram disappeared or simply murdered po liti cal opponents,

or the mid- 1970s, when under a series of right- wing regimes state- backed

vigilantes attacked Thammasat University, the Thai equivalent of Har-

vard, where they raped female students and then doused students with

gasoline and immolated them, leaving their charred bodies swinging

from trees.13

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 57

Indeed, even if they were incomplete democracies, all of the fourth wave

nations that later regressed were freer in every respect during their more

demo cratic periods than they had been earlier, during their truly authoritar-

ian periods. Vladimir Putin, in the 2000s, did indeed set back Rus sian de-

mocracy, often with the consent of many Rus sians; its scores on Freedom

House rankings fell compared to the Yeltsin era during the 1990s. But the

country hardly had reverted to the terrors of the Soviet Union, in which

none of Zakaria’s individual liberal rights received any protections.

Zakaria’s notion of illiberal democracy is inherently fl awed in other

ways. He chooses many examples in his book that do not even fi t the defi ni-

tion of democracy at all, countries like Kazakhstan that, according to the

international monitoring or ga ni za tion Freedom House and other ranking

organizations, are simply autocracies. For every Pinochet or Lee Kuan Yew,

there were tens of Mobutus or Malawi’s Hastings Banda, who used their

cults of personality to signifi cantly restrain personal freedoms and individ-

ual liberties. In nearly every country he surveyed, many of the problems he

outlined were indeed a result of not enough, rather than too much, democ-

racy. As Harvard’s Sabeel Rahman writes in an analysis of Zakaria’s book,

“On closer inspection, one fi nds that the culprits [in illiberal democracies]

are not the public, who are the supposed benefi ciaries of demo cratic em-

powerment, but rather special interest groups”— groups that could be

minimized through greater, not lesser, democracy.14

Meanwhile, as they have become more autocratic, the fourth wave na-

tions have not developed any of the supposed positive attributes of authori-

tarian rule that Zakaria writes about: benign dictators promoting liberal

social and economic freedoms that would have been impossible in a pop u-

lar democracy, or making farsighted economic decisions, since they are not

accountable to the broader public. Instead, after the coup in 2006 Thailand’s

new military leaders badly bungled economic policy, sparking panic among

investors and leading to runs on the Thai currency. In Cambodia, where the

prime minister has suffocated the demo cratic reforms of the 1990s, the

government has done little to promote sustained economic growth, instead

turning into a kind of mafi a state designed to enrich se nior government

offi cials and their allies.15 Overall, a comprehensive study of fourth wave

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

58 The Fourth Wave

nations by Council on Foreign Relations researchers found that economic

growth did not improve as they veered back toward autocracy, and that

protection of these types of liberal freedoms also did not improve, even

under supposedly “enlightened” autocracies like the Thai generals who de-

posed the elected autocrat Thaksin, or Musharraf.

In earlier demo cratic waves, countries had pursued a wide range of develop-

ment strategies. Many third wave nations, especially those in East Asia,

actually pursued highly state- directed strategies of economic growth, which

some economists later would call the East Asian model. Eventually, these

countries, like Taiwan and South Korea, also built vibrant democracies.

While participating in global trading regimes, nations like Taiwan, Thai-

land, Malaysia, South Korea, and, earlier, Japan protected critical industries

until they were more internationally competitive, invested heavily in primary

education, and directed banks and other fi nancial institutions, including citi-

zens’ pension plans, to support certain sectors of the economy. Some of

these high- powered economies, like Malaysia (and later China), used capital

controls to protect themselves from international capital markets. In Thai-

land, a small cadre of government bureaucrats in the Bank of Thailand and

Ministry of Finance oversaw these government economic plans; in Japan,

the powerful bureaucrats of the Ministry of Economy, Trade, and Industry

played this role. In Thailand, import substitution and protections of critical

industries would ultimately be responsible for nearly half the growth in the

export manufacturing sector, while in South Korea such supports and

protections nurtured a generation of companies that would become world-

beaters, including automaker Hyundai and technology giant Samsung.

These state- directed mea sures were actually not so different from those

employed by earlier, fi rst wave democracies in North America and Western

Eu rope when they, too, were developing economies. During the early years

of its existence, the United States, for example, used high tariffs and other

import restrictions to protect many of the young country’s industries from

competition with Eu ro pe an fi rms.

Other second and third wave nations pursued different strategies of

growth, with less success, yet managed at the same time to build solid de-

mocracies. After in de pen dence, India created a highly protected economy,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 59

using a wide range of tariffs and nontariff barriers to keep out foreign

investment in most sectors, and to actually hinder domestic companies

from growing too large. Many other postcolonial states also adhered to a

socialist economic strategy, with highly mixed economic results— India

grew by around 3– 4 percent most years, and many African nations barely

grew at all in the 1970s and early 1980s. Yet some of these nations, such as

Greece and India, still managed to consolidate their democracies. Very few

nations in the second or third waves adopted wholly free market policies—

even countries later championed by free market advocates, like Chile, still

used a sizable degree of state planning and support to buttress certain sec-

tors. The one place often cited by free market advocates as an example of

the power of economic liberalization, Hong Kong— annually ranked as the

“freest” economy in the world in the Heritage Foundation think tank’s In-

dex of Economic Freedom— was neither a country nor a democracy, and its

prosperity actually depended, in no small mea sure, on a massively infl ated

local property market tightly controlled by the government.

But in the fourth wave Western leaders, policy makers, and institutions

like the World Bank were caught up in a kind of post– Cold War hysteria.

The West’s triumph over communism was proof, as Francis Fukuyama fa-

mously argued in The End of History, that liberal democracy, combined with

market economics, represented the direction in which the world would in-

evitably evolve. The hard sell of democracy barely took account of the uncer-

tainty about the actual conditions for growth in developing nations. It did

not seem to matter that earlier wave nations had employed many different

economic models of growth, or that many of the governments that collapsed

in 1989 and in the early 1990s did so not because of economic liberalization

but for a variety of reasons, ranging from international pressure (apartheid

South Africa) to internal leadership dynamics that spiraled out of control

(the Soviet Union under Gorbachev). At the time, this nuance was ignored:

economic change was linked to po liti cal change, and a program of free mar-

kets and free politics was the only item on the menu. As candidate George

W. Bush declared in 2000 on the presidential campaign trail, “Economic

freedom creates habits of liberty. And habits of liberty create expectations of

democracy.”16 The man he was hoping to replace, Bill Clinton, made essen-

tially the same point many times. In one typical phrase from his book- length

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

60 The Fourth Wave

vision for America, Between Hope and History, he wrote, “Just as democracy

helps make the world safe for commerce, commerce helps make the world

safe for democracy.”17

By the 1990s a large cadre of development experts, housed at the World

Bank, the International Monetary Fund, ministries of Western govern-

ments, and universities and think tanks, were ready to dispense advice about

the proper route to po liti cal and economic liberalization. The model advo-

cated by many of these experts became known as the “Washington Con-

sensus.”18 Its author, economist John Williamson, originally intended it to

mean a discrete and limited set of economic initiatives particularly devel-

oped to address many of the economic problems facing Latin American

nations in the late 1980s and in the 1990s, including fi scal discipline, tax

reform, liberalizing exchange rates, privatization, and trade liberalization,

among other changes. But the term soon took on a far broader meaning

among many development experts and world leaders: it came to signify

broad reforms, promoted not only for Latin America but for the entire devel-

oping world, and designed to open markets, increase fi nancial transparency,

and reduce government intervention in the economy, along with po liti cal re-

forms that would also foster freedom by shrinking the role of the state.19

Proponents of the Washington Consensus made swaggering boasts about

the potential results, and brooked little criticism of their proposals. In per-

haps the most famous example, World Bank offi cials throughout the 1990s

promised that these policy reforms, if implemented throughout the devel-

oping world, would slash global poverty in half.20 Later, in an internal as-

sessment of its policies during this de cade, the Bank admitted that it still

didn’t know “how to improve institutional per for mance [i.e., how to pro-

mote economic growth]” and that the Washington Consensus had been “the

dominant view, making it diffi cult for others to be heard,” even though

these proposed reforms actually had had a mixed impact on growth and

po liti cal change.21 Another retrospective comprehensive analysis of the

Washington Consensus, by former World Bank chief economist Joseph Sti-

glitz, found that proponents of its reforms made little effort to tailor its pre-

scriptions to individual countries and, even if it produced growth, actually

paid little attention to whether that growth alleviated poverty or really ad-

dressed in e qual ity at all. Worse, Stiglitz also concluded that the Washington

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 61

Consensus failed to even promote signifi cant growth in most of the nations

where it was applied, even as it ignored the balanced, important role that a

state can play in development.

The lack of another obvious alternative model in the late 1990s and early

2000s only emboldened advocates of free markets linked with free politics.

Compared with the Cold War, no major powers now dissented loudly from

this new orthodoxy. After the 1989 Tiananmen crackdown, China adopted

a more modest public approach to foreign policy and spent most of the 1990s

and early 2000s wooing foreign investment, building its own industries

(using many of the statist models pioneered by other Asian nations), and

refusing to publicly offer any alternative to the Washington Consensus. Rus sia,

decimated eco nom ical ly by the fall of the Soviet Union, and nearly bankrupt

in the mid- 1990s, also was in no position to offer any alternative.

The sheer number and diversity of countries in the fourth wave of

demo cratization, as compared with earlier waves that took place mostly in

the West, also added to pressure among many leaders and donors to de-

velop a single model that could be applied in developing nations. After the

fall of the Berlin Wall, many leaders, both in the former Soviet states and in

the West, feared that if radical mea sures were not taken rapidly in the old

Soviet bloc, these states would be unable to jettison the legacy of communist

economic planning, and might wind up with hyperinfl ation and highly

uncompetitive economies, which could lead to a stalling, or even a reversal,

of po liti cal reforms and potential links to the West. These countries, many

economists and donor agencies believed, needed to embark on quick trans-

formations. Led by economists such as Jeffrey Sachs, many IMF and Bank

offi cials promoted a kind of economic shock therapy, consisting of rapid

freeing of the economies of countries like Poland.

The Bank was hardly alone in its hard sell of free markets and free

politics. Sub- Saharan Africa and much of Latin America had suffered

badly in the 1980s, a period of capital fl ight and economic policies that too

often saddled Latin American and African nations with greater debts. In

the worst years of the 1980s, sub- Saharan Africa’s total GDP actually

shrank, and even in the best years overall growth in Africa barely topped 4

percent; many Latin nations also ended the de cade of the 1980s poorer than

they’d begun.22 By the early 1990s, most African and Latin leaders were

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

62 The Fourth Wave

looking for any solutions that would halt a death spiral of underdevelop-

ment and isolation from the global economy. Many had failed with the social-

ist economic planning and import- substitution strategies of the postcolonial

era, and at the time few understood the potential of the gradualist approach

of the East Asian nations, which slowly weaned themselves off of many of

the state subsidies and protections they had used in the 1960s and 1970s.

(Later, as we will see, as China became a major world power again, and

began highlighting its growth model, many other developing nations would

try to copy the gradualist approach.) Compared with the weak growth and

stasis of the 1960s and 1970s, and facing balance of payments problems,

weak growth, and high unemployment, many developing nations as-

sumed that the Washington Consensus could not help but improve their

economies.

The savviest leaders of developing nations also realized that decent

growth rates could bring stability to a young democracy. Growth, after

all, would mollify members of the old regime— friends of the old dicta-

tor, the military, se nior civil servants used to comfortable lifestyles, local

traditional leaders— by expanding the pool of potential spoils and, possi-

bly, convincing the most recalcitrant former regime insiders to support a

demo cratic transition.

Malawi, like many sub- Saharan African nations, received the full mea sure

of Washington Consensus advocacy. Stephen Carr, an economist, worked

for the World Bank for years, and then retired to Malawi, where he lived

on a small mountain outside of Blantyre. He had worked at the Bank dur-

ing the height of the Washington Consensus era and then watched, even

after he had left, as Bank specialists continued to descend upon the country.

“You’d have economists come in here, never been to Malawi, knew nothing

about how the country worked, and they’d make predictions, projections. . . .

No follow- through, but if anyone disagreed with them, well, you just

couldn’t,” he said. “It would be put that there was no other choice, really.”23

In the 1990s and early 2000s, Malawi was confronted with one crisis

after another: declining world prices for its staple crops of tea, coffee, and to-

bacco, and growing competition from new producers like Vietnam. Between

1980 and 2000, global prices for eigh teen major commodities plunged by

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Fourth Wave 63

nearly one- quarter. Several times in the 1990s, droughts in the maize-

planting regions, possibly caused by shifting global climate patterns, caused

famines. Many Malawian families were left without enough maize even to

feed themselves the staple porridge of nsima, much less enough maize or

any other crop to sell; the ever- present deep- fried potatoes sold by street

vendors throughout the country were luxuries they could not afford.

The World Bank’s specialists proposed that Malawi privatize its agri-

cultural sector, slashing state subsidies for fertilizer and feed. These policy

recommendations came on the heels of Bank- and International Monetary

Fund– led structural adjustment policies for Malawi, begun in the late 1980s,

and they have launched a wave of privatization and macroeconomic liberal-

ization in the country. Some Malawian government offi cials wanted to tell

the Bank, politely, to shove off. They worried that, with even less of a gov-

ernment cushion of maize surplus and seeds, a drought would leave average

Malawians in an even more precarious position. But Malawi relies on donors

for more than half of its annual bud get, and so the Bank, and other Western

donors, wield enormous infl uence over government policy. “There was not

much [of a] way they [the Malawian government] could really stand up to

the donors,” said Carr. In the late 1990s, the government did begin to imple-

ment many of the Bank’s recommendations. As it did so, both Bank offi cials

and many Malawians politicians who realized that strong growth was needed

to maintain social stability aggressively advertised these policies.

Then, in the 2000s, disaster struck. Each season seemed to bring a

drought worse than the previous one. Malawi’s farms withered, and the

country had to start importing food from neighboring nations. Maize pro-

duction dropped by nearly half between 1998 and 2004, and in October

2005 Malawi’s president declared that the famine was a “national disaster.”

Malnutrition soared in a country where many people already could not

obtain enough food, and in the early 2000s hundreds died every year from

starvation. But the government had sold off much of its grain reserves, and

so it could do little to help its suffering farmers; it had to rely even more

heavily on handouts from aid agencies and other African nations. Private

traders who had amassed stocks of grain jacked up prices, and farmers

complained bitterly. Malawi’s economy contracted by nearly 5 percent in

2001, and by another 4.4 percent in 2002.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

64 The Fourth Wave

Eventually, the devastating famine forced the Malawian government to

reassess its strategies. Defying the Bank’s recommendation, the government

instead launched a program in which roughly half of Malawi’s small farm-

ers were given coupons that allowed them to buy fertilizer and seed at a rate

far below the market price. World Bank experts initially disdained the

Malawian government’s strategy, and the Bank may even have threatened

to cut assistance if Malawi went forward with its plan.24 Still, the Malawian

government insisted on its strategy and ultimately was seemingly proven

correct. The subsidized fertilizer and seeds helped Malawian farmers

produce some of their best harvests in the late 2000s. Once the farmers pro-

duced, the Malawian government created funds designed to buy a percent-

age of the maize crop and store it for future emergencies, thereby averting

the threat of empty grain silos in a future famine. Leaders from other Afri-

can nations, and even from some Latin American countries like Costa

Rica, began traveling to Malawi to study its turnaround. At one point, Ma-

lawi’s farmers became so productive that some government offi cials wor-

ried whether they might be producing too much, and thereby driving down

the price of their crops. Eventually, by the late 2000s the World Bank’s own

internal watchdog concluded that the demands by the Bank and other aid

donors to privatize agriculture in countries like Malawi had actually hurt

African nations. The Bank, and other Western donors, decided to cautiously

back the Malawian subsidies.25

But by the time of the Bank’s reevaluation, donors already had pursued

more than a de cade of in effec tive and dangerous policies in Malawi, despite

many warnings by local specialists that the donors were actually making

the situation worse.26 And even with the new subsidy policies, years of

privatization, combined with changing climate patterns and new competi-

tors for coffee, tea, and tobacco, weakened the country’s economy and led

to far greater fl uctuations in unemployment than that in the 1960s, 1970s,

or 1980s. As the economy stalled and hunger grew, further worsening the

HIV/AIDS situation in the country, many Malawians began to wonder

whether democracy, which had been promoted as part of the new economic

model, was not also to blame.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:46:58 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: It’s the Economy, Stupid: The Consensus Fails

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.7

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

B y the early 2000s, outside donors and many fourth wave nations like

Malawi had little to show for the linking of rapid economic and po-

liti cal liberalization. The tough reforms of democracy and the tough

reforms of market capitalism supposedly went hand in hand. Together, they

would bring freedom of speech and free elections but also growth, which

would trickle down to working class men and women. But in reality, the

correlation, or lack thereof, between democracy and economic growth has

been the subject of many studies, which have yielded inconclusive results.

Harvard economist Dani Rodrik has examined a wide range of case studies

and concluded that democracies historically neither outperform nor under-

perform dictatorships in promoting economic growth.1

Rodrik’s fi nding is supported by most other macroscopic literature stud-

ies, though other researchers, like the American Enterprise Institute’s Kevin

Hassett, have found short- term advantages for dictatorships.2 Another re-

cent comprehensive study analyzed countries that shifted from dictator-

ship to democracy, and vice versa. It found that the average rate of GDP

growth for the dictatorships was 4.37 percent a year and the average rate for

the democracies was 4.49 percent— virtually no difference.3

Authoritarian regimes can offer some advantages for growth if the

leadership, such as Lee Kuan Yew in Singapore or Augusto Pinochet in

Chile, pursues consistent and wise economic policies: dictatorships tend to

suffer less po liti cal instability, allowing authoritarian regimes to pursue

more farsighted economic policies without being captured by the po liti cal

pro cess. These policies can also impose more hardship on more people,

since they do not have to survive the test of elections— think of China’s

It’s the Economy, Stupid: The Consensus Fails

4

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

66 It’s the Economy, Stupid

willingness to implement infrastructure projects that force people to move,

a far harder feat in demo cratic India, where every new infrastructure project

requires signifi cant po liti cal negotiation.

Democracies, meanwhile, offer other advantages: They can create more

rule- based economies and can offer investors and local businesspeople more

outlets to pursue grievances, including outlets that are less opaque and easier

for foreign companies to navigate. Of course, some authoritarian states,

such as Pinochet’s Chile, or even today’s China, have welcomed foreign

investment and have created a relatively hospitable environment for it, but

overall democracies tend to provide the rules- based environment that facili-

tates investment. Several studies also have suggested that democracy tends

to reduce population growth, since demo cratic governments invest more in

public education, thereby boosting women’s earning potential by giving

them access to a greater range of jobs, expanding the country’s potential

workforce, and also likely helping bring down high fertility rates since

women’s growing education tends to be linked with declines in population

growth. Still, as Rodrik found, it can be diffi cult to trace economic success

to any clear policies adopted by a government.4

Some states in the third and fourth waves of demo cratization did pros-

per after opening up their po liti cal systems, but many of these countries—

including Taiwan, South Korea, and Chile— already had been succeeding

under authoritarian rule, and so continued economic growth did not help

much in selling the public on the merits of democracy. In other new de-

mocracies, the 1990s did become an era of decent growth— overall, Latin

America grew by just over 3 percent annually during the de cade, and Af-

rica grew by 2.2 percent— but these modest gains were not enough to make

up for the enormous losses suffered in the 1980s, especially with high fertil-

ity rates resulting in more and more young people entering the job market.

And, in Africa and parts of Asia, increased government and private sector

revenues quickly were consumed by the costs of a spiraling HIV/AIDS

crisis, which had not abated well into the 2000s.5

By the end of the 1990s, fi nancial crises in Rus sia, Argentina, and East

Asia reversed many economic gains made earlier in the de cade by young

democracies; overall, the Washington Consensus failed to deliver on many

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

It’s the Economy, Stupid 67

of its promises of higher growth, or it produced growth that still did not

make signifi cant inroads into unemployment in the developing world. In

fact, growth overall was lower in the developing world in the late 1990s and

early 2000s than it had been in the 1950s and 1960s, the postcolonial era of

import substitution and protectionism. Rus sia’s GDP shrank in 1998, as did

that of the Philippines and Malaysia; Argentina’s GDP shrank in 1999 and

2000; Thailand, where the Asian fi nancial crisis began with attacks on the

Thai currency in May 1997, suffered huge economic reversals as well. Latin

America and sub- Saharan Africa began to grow somewhat more strongly

in the late 2000s, but again much of this growth wound up being absorbed

by rising costs for pandemic disease— particularly HIV, which hit working

class men and women hard— spiraling prices for essential items, and declin-

ing terms of trade for many primary commodities produced in the poorer

fourth wave nations, which faced many nontariff barriers from Eu rope, the

United States, and other wealthy nations. Sub- Saharan nations like Zambia,

Mozambique, Malawi, and many others saw the economic gains they had

made further diminished.

When another global economic crisis hit in the late 2000s, many of

these fourth wave nations would be battered again, while the privatizations

of the 1990s and early 2000s had left states with fewer resources to absorb

this latest economic downturn through large- scale social welfare programs

or job creation schemes. In Central and Eastern Eu rope, growth averaged a

solid 4– 5 percent between 2003 and 2007, these nations were then decimated

by the global economic crisis. In the fourth quarter of 2009, the height of the

crisis in Latvia, the country’s economy shrunk by over 10 percent year- on-

year, and unemployment rose to over 20 percent. In neighboring Estonia,

the economy contracted by 9 percent year- on- year in the fourth quarter of

2009 alone. Asia’s developing nations, many of which were highly dependent

on exports to the West, suffered too: Singapore’s economy contracted by

nearly 20 percent in the fi rst quarter of 2009, in the wake of the global

economic crisis, with Malaysia, Thailand, Bangladesh, Cambodia, and the

Philippines hit hard as well.

Meanwhile, in many of these fourth wave countries, radical economic

restructuring in systems that still had not developed strong rules of law often

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

68 It’s the Economy, Stupid

resulted in old regime insiders morphing into fl ashy new oligarchs con-

trolling former state companies. This was particularly true among former

Soviet states, where the rapid economic liberalization frequently led to the

stripping of state assets and other dubious types of privatization. In Rus sia,

polls showed that the public had an intensely negative view of the oligarchs,

the big businessmen who had taken control of state companies in the post-

Soviet period, often gaining the assets at fi re sale prices. In one study, by the

ROMIR polling agency, only 19 percent of Rus sians held positive views of

the oligarchs’ actions in the 1990s, the height of the post- Soviet privatiza-

tion.6 In a more telling, and sad, statement, a Pew Research poll of many of

the former Soviet and Eastern bloc states taken to coincide with the twenti-

eth anniversary of the fall of the Berlin Wall found that, “in many nations,

majorities or pluralities say that most people were better off under commu-

nism.” Other studies by the New Eu rope Barometer survey group found

rising levels of dissatisfaction with government in most former Eastern bloc

states in the two de cades after the fall of the Berlin Wall, often because of

dissatisfaction with their governments’ economic per for mance, a dissatisfac-

tion that would, for many, refl ect poorly on democracy as a po liti cal system.7

Even when the demo cratic era produced decent growth, various factors—

rising in e qual ity in a more globalized world, a decrease in state social welfare

policies in most nations, disease, urbanization, environmental degradation,

migration, and other changes wrought by the pace of modernization— often

made working class men and women’s lives harder, in some ways, than they

had been during earlier years of authoritarian rule. Overall, the United Na-

tions Human Development Program reports, the 2000s witnessed rising

income in e qual ity in nearly every developing nation. As a result, perceptions

that the standard of living was declining— or, at least, that it was not keep-

ing pace in countries that were becoming more unequal— often mattered

more than the actual facts of a par tic u lar nation’s economic growth or

decline. “A crucial paradox— that of growth without prosperity— besets

Africa’s new democracies,” writes Peter Lewis of Johns Hopkins University.

Macroeconomic reforms instituted by governments in Africa, Latin Amer-

ica, and parts of Central Asia, did deliver stronger economic fundamentals

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

It’s the Economy, Stupid 69

and higher growth. Yet except in a few rare exceptions like Brazil, which

combined macroeconomic stabilization with an innovative cash transfer

antipoverty program, in most of these developing nations growth seemed

to mean little to the lives of average citizens, and governments also cut social

welfare programs that, in the 1970s and 1980s, had helped prevent hunger

and homelessness.8 In Ghana, Kenya, Nigeria, South Africa, and Tanzania,

Lewis concluded, indicators of public well- being—such as a rising incomes,

decreasing infant mortality, or home buying— lagged in the 1990s behind

strong overall economic per for mance in all of these new democracies.

And though politicians often expected that citizens would “evaluate po liti cal

and economic ‘goods’ separately,” in Lewis’s words, as we have seen this did

not happen— with such high expectations, many citizens of developing

nations judged the two “goods” together, and increasingly concluded that if

democracy could not deliver economic per for mance and public well- being,

its strengths had been greatly oversold.

Expectations seemed to matter enormously in Central and Eastern

Eu rope as well. The Eu ro pe an Bank for Reconstruction and Development’s

(EBRD) survey of the region in 2011 found that the economic crisis batter-

ing Eu rope in the late 2000s and early 2010s led to a decrease in support for

democracy among much of Central and Eastern Eu rope. Many house holds,

it found, had linked markets and democracy, and blamed the two for the

decrease in their living standards. But the EBRD also found that people

living in countries that had experienced previous serious downturns, and

that seemed to have lowered expectations for the relationship between de-

mocracy and growth, were less dissatisfi ed with the downturn of the late

2000s and early 2010s, and tended to remain stronger supporters of both

democracy and free market systems.9 In other words, if they had not linked

the “goods” of democracy and markets together so explicitly, they were less

likely to condemn democracy when the economy soured.

In Malawi, the 2000s contained several years of solid growth, at least

according to year- end economic fi gures. In 2005, Malawi grew by over 4

percent; two years later, it grew by over 8 percent. These fi gures suggested

that the country actually was becoming one of the stronger economic per-

formers in Africa.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

70 It’s the Economy, Stupid

But few working class Malawians felt they had benefi ted much from

this growth; almost to a person, they complained that their standard of

living had declined, whether or not the national economic growth fi gures

showed such a decline. And few understood that, whether Malawi liked it

or not, its government could not, in a globalizing world, keep the economy

closed and provide the type of social welfare it had delivered in the 1960s or

1970s. Back then, Malawi, willing to defy other black- run newly in de pen-

dent nations, had benefi ted from the largesse of apartheid South Africa, had

a much smaller population, and had enjoyed high world prices for its to-

bacco and coffee. Now, working class men and women saw that economic

liberalization had undercut the prices for their maize, tea, and tobacco, and

po liti cal liberalization had allowed more freedom of movement in the 1990s

and 2000s from farms to urban areas. This movement was resulting in

intensive crowding in Blantyre and other cities, where all land was being torn

up by squatters arriving every day, trucks choked the sky with unfi ltered

diesel gas, and new roads and truck routes linking Malawi to the rest of

Africa contributed to the spread of HIV, which killed brothers, fathers,

mothers— nearly every Malawian personally knew someone who had died

from an AIDS- caused illness. The Malawian government, which had por-

trayed itself as a paternalistic, caring father during Banda’s time, could do

little for most of these suffering people. “The government has no resources

to take care of people, with all the problems that are coming up,” said Peter

Kazembe, a well- known and outspoken Malawian doctor who worked at

times for government agencies. “We are more open [in politics] but that

doesn’t mean we are able to deal with all these new, modern problems. . . .

But people can talk more than in the past [than under the dictatorship] so

maybe it also seems like there are more problems.”

A country with very little economic in e qual ity during the 1960s and

1970s now had become more unequal, and the in e qual ity far more visible

than in the past, when the country had been a primarily rural society, and

foreign consumer goods had been diffi cult to obtain. Imported cars, cell

phones, computers, and other items were coming in from South Africa and

put on display to average Malawians in a way they had not been during the

1960s or 1970s— but few could afford these new luxuries. Outside one com-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

It’s the Economy, Stupid 71

puter and electronics store on a main street in Blantyre, young boys dressed

in rags peered into the windows, where inside a tiny group of wealthy Indi-

ans and Malawians pored over torn- apart keyboards, wireless mice, and

motherboards. Across town, at the upscale Blantyre restaurant Greens, a

favorite watering hole nestled in the hills above the city, obese businessmen

and local offi cials, their bellies hanging over the waists of their too- tight

polyester slacks, ate skewers of lamb and chicken and other grilled meats

dripping with fat, and washed them down with South African wines. Later

in the eve ning, their drivers would shuttle them, in Range Rovers, over to

the South African– owned Protea Ryalls Hotel, where they could sip scotch

at the long bar or lounge on pillows on the terrace outside. Meanwhile, as

birthrates soared and HIV decimated families in the early 2000s, the United

Nations estimated that roughly 65,000 Malawian children were malnour-

ished, more than 10 percent of the country’s children. These hungry chil-

dren gathered outside the Ryalls Hotel or the upscale South African– owned

Shop Rite supermarket on the outskirts of town, where the sons and daugh-

ters of wealthy Malawians stocked up on cell phone cards and low- fat yo-

gurt imported from South Africa, as well as on other items they could now

see advertised on satellite TV stations airing shows from South Africa, fi lms

from Nigeria, and other programming that never would have been available

during the dictatorship. Outside the supermarket, guards wielding trun-

cheons shooed away the children.

Perhaps, Malawians remembered, the era of authoritarian rule had

been po liti cally harsh, but at least they had enjoyed stability and a decent

quality of life— regular meals, land to farm, government handouts for the

very poorest. Of course, part of the past quality of life simply had to do with

a smaller population, and thus more arable land— something that was hardly

related to the type of government running Malawi. Part of this memory was

simply a willful forgetting of the past: as years separated them further

from the era of the dictatorship, many Malawians forgot its most repressive

elements. They remembered instead— somewhat oversympathetically— a

simpler time, in the way that people all over the world often romanticize

the past. “It might have been more repressive, but at least under [former

dictator Hastings] Banda we always had enough to eat, and the country

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

72 It’s the Economy, Stupid

was safe,” one Malawian offi cial said, a sentiment echoed by many of his

peers who actually once fought the dictatorship as opposition activists.

Numbers revealed this shift in attitudes toward Banda’s dictatorship,

especially among the poorest Malawians, who believed they had fared the

worst as the country had become more open, and also more unequal. In-

deed, in the 1980s, when Malawi was still ruled by Banda, more than 80

percent of Malawians rejected the idea of authoritarian rule, though they

were still living under it. By 2005, that number had fallen dramatically:

only about half the population rejected the idea of authoritarian rule as the

best solution for the country.

When asked why they had become willing, again, to consider the

possibility of authoritarian rule, many Malawians said, like the government

offi cial, simply, that under Banda the country had enjoyed more stable and

prosperous growth. This was not necessarily true: During Banda’s time,

GDP growth fl uctuated from over 13 percent in the mid- 1960s, in the early

days of in de pen dence, to as little as roughly 1 percent annually in the early

and mid- 1980s. After in de pen dence Banda, like many other postcolonial

leaders, pursued a policy of import substitution designed to make Malawi

self- suffi cient in many industries. Banda’s policy worked, for a time, but in

the 1970s and early 1980s, as it became clear that Malawi could not indefi -

nitely protect its industries, and as the price of oil and other inputs rose,

Malawi’s economy weakened. Still, the smaller population at that time, and

the lack of environmental degradation, meant that even the poorest Mala-

wians usually had some family land to farm, and could raise a few chickens

for eggs, or some fruit trees. In a less globalized world, without donor agen-

cies pushing for privatization, and with signifi cant aid fl owing in from

South Africa, which built the country an entire new capital in the town of

Lilongwe, Banda could afford to cushion any economic downturns with

job creation programs or price supports for farmers’ crops.

What ever the reality, Banda, like many leaders in the developing world

in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s, also had not tied growth as closely to his po-

liti cal legitimacy as would later occur with the wave of Malawian demo-

cratic politicians who emerged in the late 1990s and early 2000s, or with the

donors who funded the country’s bud gets. Like many other postcolonial

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

It’s the Economy, Stupid 73

leaders, Banda, unlike his successors, also could rely on his credentials as an

in de pen dence leader to build pop u lar support for himself. He created a kind

of new Malawian nationalism, albeit one closely centered around him and

a fabricated new Malawian national culture, one that might tie together

the country’s language groups, tribes, and regional differences. In this way,

Banda’s efforts echoed those of many other postcolonial leaders, from

Ghana’s Kwame Nkrumah to India’s Jawaharlal Nehru, who could use

their history as in de pen dence campaigners, as well as their po liti cal ideolo-

gies, to shore up their government’s legitimacy. Some postin de pen dence

leaders, such as Zimbabwe’s Robert Mugabe, were able to utilize the legiti-

macy they obtained from fi ghting the colonists to remain in power even as

they ran their nations’ economies into the ground.

In the 1990s and 2000s, Banda’s demo cratic successors could not call

upon their credentials as in de pen dence heroes, and in a far less ideological

era than the 1960s, they could hardly fashion grand po liti cal ideologies de-

signed to remake the country. So, they did make the explicit link between

growth and their po liti cal system, over and over again, and thus rested

much of their legitimacy on the ability to deliver that growth. “Malawians

thought that these types of changes would raise their standard of living, so

it was these higher expectations that couldn’t be lived up to,” said Stephen

Carr, the longtime World Bank economist who lives in Malawi. Even if, in

reality, the demo cratic era had produced decent growth, high expectations

had gone unmet. And so, many working class Malawians wondered whether

po liti cal openness really was best for their country, a question that would

be repeated increasingly among people in other fourth wave nations.

In the early 2010s, Malawi’s leaders seemed to draw on this authoritar-

ian nostalgia. President Mutharika, who had been elected as a reformer,

turned increasingly authoritarian, sometimes justifying his more autocratic

rule by claiming he needed more power to right the economy. When demon-

strators gathered in July 2011 to protest in the streets of the capital, Lilongwe,

and in other cities about the rising cost of staple foods and fuel, Mutharika

had hundreds of them arrested, with many badly beaten and reportedly

shot by security forces. At least eigh teen people were killed in the crack-

down. The government banned broadcasters from showing the protests,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

74 It’s the Economy, Stupid

and after the crackdown Mutharika toured the affected cities and vowed

that any future opponents would feel the “wrath of government.” Although

many Malawians protested this crackdown, particularly in urban areas,

Mutharika seemed to believe— with some reason— that if he could get the

country’s economy under control, while amassing more power for himself,

many people would forgive his abuses. Though ultimately Mutharika died

in the spring of 2012, the autocratic culture he had instilled survived, as his

supporters at fi rst refused to acknowledge his death publicly, apparently

hoping to launch a coup or some other intervention that would prevent the

vice president, not known as a Mutharika loyalist, from succeeding him in

offi ce as president.

Across the developing world, when economies did not take off, the sales

pitch of the Washington Consensus worked in reverse, actually subverting

demo cratic progress. The failure of growth fell hardest on working class

men and women, who often were barely getting by under the old authoritar-

ian regime, and who did not have the skills, education, and capital to take

advantage of international trade and economic liberalization. Often, as in

Malawi, the working classes were employed almost solely in agriculture, and

so were also hurt badly by declining terms of global trade for developing

nations’ textiles, commodities, and other products, as Western nations used

tariffs and subsidies to support their own farmers, and to keep out cheaper

agricultural goods from places like Africa, Vietnam, or Thailand.

These working class men and women began associating economic fail-

ures with democracy, even though economic globalization, changing terms

of international trade, or many other factors also could explain weak growth

in the developing world. To be sure, middle classes and elites also were

unhappy with weak growth, but they could more easily take advantage of

economic liberalization and freer trade, and they tended to reap what ever

economic gains were made in developing nations. Over the past de cade

they would turn against democracy for other reasons.

For working classes, though, the failure of growth, or at least the fail-

ure to live up to the kind of expectations created in Malawi, was critical. In

Latin America, for example, the Latin Barometer surveys showed that, in

the early 2000s, support for democracy across the region closely tracked per

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

It’s the Economy, Stupid 75

capita growth; when regionwide growth went up, support for democracy

rose, and when it declined, support for democracy did as well, particularly

among lower- income men and women.10 In Ukraine, one of the most

notable examples of this working class alienation, the country’s economy

shrank by a staggering 15 percent in 2009, the victim of the global eco-

nomic crisis as well as the poor national leadership by Viktor Yushchenko,

the hero of the country’s 2004 and 2005 Orange Revolution. By the end of

his term, in 2010, Yushchenko was, according to polls, the most unpop u lar

leader in the world, in large part because Ukrainians were im mensely dis-

satisfi ed with how poorly he— and Ukraine’s democracy— had done in fos-

tering growth.11 The urban middle classes of Kiev still generally supported

Yushchenko and other Orange Revolution leaders, despite the tepid growth;

they were still faring relatively well eco nom ical ly. But among lower- income

Ukrainians Yushchenko had essentially become a pariah. In 2010, Ukraine

would elect a new president, Viktor Yanukovych, who would roll back many

of the nation’s freedoms. But he seemed, to many Ukrainians, a better bet for

promoting lasting growth, a fi gure modeled on Vladimir Putin, who had

slowly whittled away Rus sians’ po liti cal and social freedoms in the 2000s

while presiding over a period of strong growth. On the campaign trail, Yanu-

kovych promised that he would bring Ukraine stability and sustained growth,

the kind of growth that the previous, more demo cratic government had

failed to provide. He did not exactly hide his po liti cal intentions. Kremlin

aides advised Yanukovych’s campaign. Many Ukrainians understood that,

if Yanukovych were elected, their country would both move closer to Rus-

sia and also probably see its po liti cal freedoms curtailed— a tradeoff that,

by voting Yanukovych into offi ce, many accepted in exchange for what they

believed would be stronger economic growth. Indeed, after Yanukovych

won he was able to negotiate more favorable terms on energy imports from

Rus sia.

In fact, by analyzing a range of surveys from the Barometer series, results

of local polling organizations in developing nations, and the Pew Research

or ga ni za tion’s regular results, Council on Foreign Relations researchers, in-

cluding myself, found that nearly every study of developing nations reported

that, by the end of the 2000s, satisfaction with democracy had dropped, even

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

76 It’s the Economy, Stupid

in countries where citizens still preferred democracy to other alternatives;

they also found that in most of these countries the majority of survey re-

spondents, and particularly those from lower- income house holds, thought

that transitions to democracy had brought no improvement to their lives.

In Africa, where foreign donors probably exert the most infl uence, and

the link of growth and po liti cal liberalization was pushed the hardest, sat-

isfaction with democracy also dropped in large part because of perceptions

that democracy had not brought promised material gains. In a broad study

of African nations taken between 2000 and 2006, satisfaction with democ-

racy fell from 58 percent of the population to 45 percent; over roughly the

same period, the percentage of Africans saying the economy in their nation

was fairly good or very good fell to only 28 percent.12 Overall, my analysis of

the 2009 data from the Afrobarometer surveys, the most recent data, re-

veals that satisfaction with democracy is negatively correlated with “present

living conditions.” In these surveys, people who thought their living condi-

tions had become “very bad” were most likely to say that their nation was

not becoming a democracy and that they were unsatisfi ed, while those

people who said that their living conditions had become “very good” were

much more likely than anyone else to say that they were “very satisfi ed” with

democracy.13 As we will see, just as in Ukraine, this dissatisfaction would

provide an opportunity, in many of these developing nations, for a more

authoritarian leader who could promise better, more equal growth, to make

inroads.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:08 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: The Middle Class Revolts

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.8

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

I n the late 1990s and early 2000s, the lack of economic growth began

to sour working class men and women on demo cratization. But in

many developing nations the middle classes turned against democracy

too. The Washington Consensus prescriptions had been, in many ways,

predicated on the modernization theory of experts like Huntington and

Lipset; for economic liberalization to be linked with po liti cal liberalization,

an economic opening had to produce a middle class that then would help

push for po liti cal change. Yet over the past de cade, the middle class has, in

many developing nations, subverted those predictions, just as the growth–

political change linkage has, more broadly, subverted demo cratic progress.

Perhaps nowhere has the middle class turned so clearly, and disas-

trously, against the modernization theory’s predictions as in the Philip-

pines. To a traveler arriving from more orderly cities in East Asia, dropping

into Manila feels like descending into some combination of Blade Runner

and a Broadway musical. Rutted roads lead into the city, many lined with

twisted pieces of discarded metal that could be confused with modernist

sculptures. “Jeepneys”— converted jeeps overstuffed with paying passen-

gers and decorated with garish murals of Christ— crowd each other in the

traffi c, which stretches for miles in the polluted and soupy air. The jeepneys

meander past mountainous garbage dumps and hastily erected slums of tin

shacks and tiny wood homes that look like they were made from packing

crates. Occasionally, amid the slums sits a heavily guarded gated commu-

nity where Manila’s elites can live as if they were in suburban Los Angeles

or Houston, ignoring the squalor as they head off to shop at nearby air-

conditioned malls.

The Middle Class Revolts

5

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

78 The Middle Class Revolts

With turbocharged economies surrounding it, the Philippines has in

recent years grown at only 3 or 4 percent per year, a rate not high enough to

provide jobs for all the new workers in a country with one of the highest

birthrates in Asia.1 In a country naturally blessed with abundant fi sh and

produce, nearly 15 percent of Filipinos do not have enough to eat. Virtually

every other nation in the region has made strides in eradicating poverty and

hunger, but the Philippines has made none.2

Most Filipinos would not have anticipated this failure back in 1986,

when they thronged the streets of Manila not only to force out the dicta-

tor Ferdinand Marcos but to demand a better life for themselves and their

countrymen— a protest led, as we have seen, by the city’s urban middle

classes. Benigno Aquino, the opposition leader whose assassination by Mar-

cos security forces set off the People Power movement that carried Aquino’s

wife to power, had made “The Filipino is worth dying for” his motto.3 Amid

the jubilation of that era, many Filipinos, and particularly the urban middle

classes who possessed skills and college educations, thought that with Marcos

gone, all aspects of their lives would improve. “The optimism of that time, it’s

hard to imagine now,” remembered Roel Landingin, a Filipino journalist

who has worked for years in Manila. “It wasn’t just getting rid of Marcos, we

really thought those things that seemed unchangeable in the country would

change now.” 4

After Marcos fl ed, and after his successor, Corazon Aquino, survived

numerous coups as president, the country did enjoy solid growth and rela-

tively stable government under her successor, President Fidel Ramos—

growth that generally boosted the incomes of middle class professionals and

small businesspeople. But in the de cade and a half since Ramos left offi ce,

the economy has stagnated badly. Though the Philippines always had been

a stratifi ed society— a legacy of Latin America– Spanish colonialism— in the

post- Ramos era the in e qual ity has become far worse, with a tiny elite gar-

nering an ever- larger share of the wealth, and both the poor and the middle

class falling further and further behind. Homelessness and violent crime

have skyrocketed, turning Manila into one of the most dangerous cities in

Asia— a condition made worse by a corrupt and incompetent police force.5

This crime falls harder on middle class businesspeople, who cannot afford to

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 79

live in the gated communities of the rich, with their armed guards and high

walls topped with barbed wire. One politician after another has succumbed

to corruption scandals, and an annual study conducted by the Asia Founda-

tion found that fewer than 20 percent of businesses in the country reported

paying their taxes honestly.6 The speaker of the Philippine House of Repre-

sentatives undertook a charity drive for the national trea sury, asking people

to donate to the state bud get like it was a Salvation Army fund drive. The

Philippine ombudsman’s offi ce reports that the country lost $48 billion in

revenue in graft over the past twenty years, and companies needing contracts

roam the halls of Congress there with envelopes full of cash to stuff into con-

gresspeople’s desks. In such a climate, vote rigging becomes the norm: a sur-

vey before the 2007 Philippines elections found that nearly 70 percent of

voters expected vote buying in the election, and more than half anticipated

that the vote counting would involve cheating.7

Though Aquino’s son, Benigno, was elected in 2010 partly on a mandate

to clean up corruption, in offi ce he could do little to halt such entrenched

practices. His government fi led several high- profi le corruption cases, and

he made numerous speeches about addressing graft, but payoffs and hand-

outs remained the norm throughout the po liti cal system. After only one year

in offi ce, Aquino’s popularity ratings had fallen, partly because of his failure

to fi ght corruption. The head of one of the country’s biggest business groups

dedicated to good governance admitted, “[The Aquino] administration has

failed in its fi ght against corruption.”8

For years, leaders of the Philippines’ neighbor Singapore, essentially a

one- party state, have publicly contrasted Manila’s chaos and stagnant growth

with their gleaming, high- tech city, where every roadside shrub seems to have

been manicured by a gardening master, and you can whiz from the airport to

the central business district in minutes. The difference is more than superfi -

cial. Though the two countries had relatively equal standards of living in

1965, today Singapore boasts a GDP per capita more than ten times that of

the Philippines.9 In a speech in the Philippines in 1992, Lee Kuan Yew, mod-

ern Singapore’s founding father, delivered a direct insult to the host country.

“I do not believe that democracy necessarily leads to development. . . . The

exuberance of democracy leads to undisciplined and disorderly conditions.”

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

80 The Middle Class Revolts

Lee did offer a backhanded compliment: “The Philippines is im mensely bet-

ter off compared to Af ghan i stan or Lebanon or Sri Lanka”— three states

decimated by bloody civil wars.10

For years, many middle class Filipinos, proud of their hard- won de-

mocracy and their free— if wild— media, shrugged off Lee Kuan Yew’s

barbs. But as the divide between the two states has turned into a chasm,

and as more and more Filipinos head overseas just to fi nd jobs— more than

10 percent of the population lived abroad in 2009, and their remittances

keep the country’s economy afl oat— they can’t ignore the criticism so eas-

ily.11 In surveys taken by the Asia Barometer project, which primarily inter-

views urban middle class men and women, nearly half of the respondents

in the Philippines now agree with the statement “The nation is run by a

powerful few and ordinary citizens cannot do much about it.” Most Filipi-

nos, the survey showed, distrust virtually every institution of the state and

have little hope that it will improve.12 “Middle- class Filipinos who’ve been

outside the country, who see what’s happening in other nations in Asia,

they come back here, and it’s just disappointment, hopelessness,” says Land-

ingin. “We have too much democracy here,” agreed Jose Romero Jr., a for-

mer Philippine diplomat who, along with other educated Filipinos, had led

the revolt against Marcos.

Some middle class Filipinos even yearn for the return of the dictator,

seemingly having forgotten the thuggery and personality cult of the dicta-

tor’s later years and instead remembering the order and growth of his early

period in offi ce. According to the Asia Barometer study, the Filipino public

had a high degree of “authoritarian nostalgia” for the Marcos era.13 The old

dictator is still around, but he doesn’t get out much: His waxy body is dis-

played in a refrigerated mausoleum, like a Southeast Asian Lenin, in the

family compound in Ilocos Norte, the Marcos’s home province. Still, even

though Ferdinand cannot serve anymore, in 2010 Filipinos elected his son,

Ferdinand Jr., to the Philippines Senate, and his daughter, Imee, as gover-

nor of Ilocos Norte.14 Ferdinand Jr. might well seek a higher offi ce in the

next election, completing the Marcos restoration.15

The Philippines middle class has, in another important way, demon-

strated its growing disillusionment with the lack of growth and the in e qual-

ity, graft, and poor governance of the country’s young democracy. In 1998,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 81

after the end of Fidel Ramos’s presidency (Philippine presidents are allowed

only one six- year term), the presidential election was won by Joseph Estrada,

an actor- turned- politician famous for his many roles playing action heroes.

Estrada was beloved by the poor in the Philippines for his rugged charm,

his easy, down- to- earth manner, and his promises of populist policies, but he

was hardly a deep thinker, and in offi ce he soon proved both incompetent

and corrupt. His administration squandered many of the economic and

management reforms made under Ramos, foreign investors fl ed to other

countries, and graft allegations soon swirled around his administration and

around Estrada himself, who was known to be personally friendly with sev-

eral or ga nized crime leaders. By 2001, three years into his presidency, the

Philippine defi cit had nearly doubled since 1998, and Estrada stood accused

of taking payoffs from illegal gambling syndicates while serving as president.

(After leaving offi ce, he would later be convicted of plunder and sentenced

to a maximum of forty years in jail, though he was ultimately pardoned after

serving six years in detention because of his age and infi rmities.)

Urban middle class Filipinos, many of whom had not voted for Estrada,

instead supporting other candidates, could have stuck to demo cratic means

to try to remove the president for his many alleged crimes. Indeed, the Phil-

ippines legislature did begin impeachment proceedings against Estrada.

But middle class Filipinos had little patience for them. They had watched,

during Estrada’s term, as the country’s democracy produced an incompetent

and corrupt president. They had seen how Estrada could maintain support

from the poor masses who constitute the majority of voters, and they wor-

ried he might whittle away both the rule of law and the economic, social,

and po liti cal privileges long enjoyed by the middle class. True to his macho

fi lm image, Estrada had pursued increasingly tough policies, toward both

dissent in urban areas and separatist movements in the country’s Muslim

southern provinces, launching a massive offensive against one of the Muslim

rebel groups, the Moro Islamic Liberation Front, that ultimately resulted in

a bloody stalemate.

So, in late 2000 and early 2001, middle class Filipinos took to the streets

of Manila, launching large scale street protests designed to push Estrada

out. In some ways, these protests mimicked the 1986 People Power move-

ment that ultimately overthrew the Marcos regime. Many Filipinos took to

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

82 The Middle Class Revolts

calling the 2001 protests “People Power Two,” except that now the demon-

strators were trying to remove an elected president, by resorting to the

street, a practice that ultimately would only weaken the country’s demo-

cratic institutions like the legislature and the judiciary, which had been

designed to address just such serious breaches by the president.

As protests swelled in the streets of Manila, hundreds of thousands of

people, mainly middle class, university- educated Filipinos, joined in. Many

demonstrators, who once had battled Marcos’s armed forces for years, and

who had stood up for Corazon Aquino in the face of coups, now called for

the military to resolve the situation. And indeed, behind the scenes the

armed forces made clear to Estrada that they were withdrawing their sup-

port for him, implicitly threatening that, if he did not leave, the army

would make a move. Estrada’s supporters, later learning of the army’s deci-

sion, called it a kind of silent coup, but at the time the president realized

that he could not hang on to power. He agreed to vacate the presidency. His

vice president, Gloria Macapagal- Arroyo, a U.S.- trained economist and tech-

nocrat preferred (at the time) by the middle classes, quickly was sworn into

offi ce, before Estrada’s large base of poor supporters around the country

could mobilize in response.

Though the anti- Estrada protests did force the president to fl ee, spark-

ing a short period of jubilation in Manila, they hardly quieted the Filipino

middle class’s anger over incompetent and corrupt government, or its fear

of losing its rights and privileges to a populist president. Three years later,

middle class men and women camped in the streets of Manila once more,

trying again to use protests— rather than demo cratic institutions like the

ballot box or legislative maneuvering or impeachment— to force the presi-

dent to leave offi ce. Though Macapagal- Arroyo once had seemed a compe-

tent technocrat, she too had earned the ire of the urban middle class after

she allegedly had overseen highly corrupt national elections and increas-

ingly had cracked down on any opposition, proposing tougher legislation

akin to martial law and arresting many civil society activists. After Iraq the

Philippines became, under Arroyo, the second most dangerous place in the

world for journalists; in some years more than thirty were killed, in murky

circumstances in which the murders seemed to be linked to the journalists’

critical reporting.16

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 83

Unlike Estrada, the savvier and smarter Macapagal- Arroyo survived,

partly through maintaining the support of the army, but she was not yet safe.

Filipino middle classes returned to the streets again and again in the follow-

ing years in attempts to make her resign or even possibly provoke a coup.

Even Corazon Aquino herself, the old symbol of Filipino democracy, joined

the protesters trying to oust Macapagal- Arroyo, marching in the streets to

push out the president.

In some areas of the city these protesters became a kind of permanent

encampment, though the president would manage to serve out her term.

“The people in Manila are just giving up on democracy, that’s why they

take to the streets to try to force out an elected leader,” said Landingin, the

longtime Filipino journalist who had covered People Power One as well. “It

seems like a demo cratic protest, but it’s actually hurting.”17 And as we will

see, in many other developing nations, middle class men and women are

turning against democracy in similar ways, striking perhaps the biggest

blow to democracy’s survival.

In the Philippines, it took fi fteen years for the urban middle class to move

from leading the country’s battle for democracy to leading the battle against

democracy. In other developing nations, across Asia, Latin America, and

Africa, the shift has taken place even faster, as Huntington’s theory has

been turned on its head. Now it appears that once that po liti cal transition

began, a sizable middle class actually became a primary impediment to

demo cratic consolidation.18

If the middle class can no longer be taken for granted as a force for

demo cratic change, it will mark an enormous shift that will challenge the

accepted wisdom about demo cratization. This new understanding of the

middle class calls into question predictions that powerful authoritarian states

like China will eventually demo cratize, and forces policy makers and democ-

racy activists to question who their real allies are.

The middle class in emerging markets is still growing rapidly. The

World Bank estimates that, between 1990 and 2005, the middle class tripled

in size in developing countries in Asia, and nearly doubled in Africa. Today,

according to an estimate by Goldman Sachs, roughly seventy million people

worldwide begin to earn enough to join the middle class (defi ned as making

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

84 The Middle Class Revolts

between $6,000 and $30,000 annually) in emerging markets each year. By

2030, Goldman estimates, the global middle class will have added another

two billion people, with particularly strong growth in Brazil and other large

emerging democracies. While $6,000 a year may be a poverty- level income

in a wealthy democracy like the United States or Japan, in developing

nations like Thailand it puts a family in the middle class. And unlike, say,

the United States, where more than 50 percent of adults classify themselves

as middle class, the middle class in most developing nations remains a

minority— usually no more than 30 percent of the population.19 Yet in these

nations the middle class does not mean the wealthiest elites, either— the top

1 or 2 percent of the population that actually controls the largest companies

and enjoys lifestyles that would be considered rich by any standard. Instead,

these middle classes normally comprise professionals, small businesspeople,

and other educated men and women.

The fact that the middle class does not actually constitute a majority

of the population in these nations matters greatly, since it means demo-

cratization often empowers the poor more than it empowers the middle

class. At the same time, though, the middle class is not so small that demo-

cratization threatens to foster intense hatred against it, in the way that ana-

lysts like Yale’s Amy Chua believe po liti cal change can boomerang against

wealthy ethnic minorities.20 Chua argues that entrepreneurial but demo-

graphically tiny minorities— the ethnic Chinese in Southeast Asia, or the

Lebanese in West Africa— face physical danger, and even massacres, in

countries that demo cratize rapidly. There are examples of this trend, such

as the killings of Lebanese in West Africa or of Chinese in Indonesia after

the fall of longtime dictator Suharto— but these mass killings have tar-

geted small groups of elite minorities, and not the broader middle classes.

Still, in many emerging democracies, the middle classes have valued growth

over freedom and stability over change, giving little reason to believe these

middle class men and women have any real commitment to democracy.21

In theory, educated middle class people in most developing nations possess

strong commitments to democracy: recent polling by the Pew Research

Center found theoretical support for democracy especially strong among

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 85

the global middle class.22 But that theoretical commitment to democracy has

meant little in practice.23 In many developing nations, middle class reform-

ers have been badly let down by the fi rst generations of demo cratic leaders.

Some, like Viktor Yushchenko of Ukraine, have demonstrated woefully

poor economic management, alienating not only working classes but also

middle class businesspeople who need economic stability to thrive. But be-

sides managing the economy poorly, the fi rst generation of elected leaders

has not demonstrated much real commitment to democracy— a lack of

commitment that has resonated among urban middle classes. Urban mid-

dle class men and women who had spent years fi ghting an authoritarian

regime simply assumed, perhaps naively, that when opposition leaders fi -

nally gained power, they would govern more inclusively than the deposed

autocrats. The Demo cratic Progressive Party (DPP) in Taiwan, made up of

many former po liti cal prisoners from during the Nationalist dictatorship of

Chiang Kai- shek and his son Chiang Ching- kuo, had fought for two de-

cades to challenge the power of the ruling Kuomintang. The party also had

stood up for Taiwan’s separation from, and even formal in de pen dence from,

the People’s Republic of China, in part because it believed that only real

separation could guarantee Taiwan’s demo cratic freedoms. Many DPP poli-

ticians had deep ties to labor unions, environmental groups, and other pro-

gressive causes, and in opposition had suffered badly for their beliefs. DPP

leader Chen Shui- bian himself had served time in prison for his beliefs, and

in 1985 his wife became paralyzed after being hit by a truck in what Chen

and his supporters believed was an attack by progovernment forces.

As Chen rose up the po liti cal ladder in an increasingly open and demo-

cratic Taiwan, from local councillor to mayor of Taipei to, eventually, presi-

dent, he brought with him a bright young circle of advisers who had also

suffered as opposition activists. These DPP politicians, many educated in

America’s Ivy League schools, promised, if they were elected, to usher in

Taiwan’s most open era. They vowed to work for equal rights in a country

with a highly patriarchal traditional culture, to reduce in e qual ity after Tai-

wan’s long economic boom, and to guarantee women a certain number of

cabinet seats, putting them at the policy- making table in Taiwan for the

fi rst time. “The DPP is for progress— on women’s issues, on labor rights— it

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

86 The Middle Class Revolts

can be slow, but it’s far better than it was a de cade ago,” said Hsiao Bi- khim,

one of the DPP’s leading minds and, in the early 2000s, one of the youn gest

members of Taiwan’s legislature.

When the DPP fi nally won the 2000 election, opposition politicians,

activists, labor union leaders, and journalists rejoiced. Taiwan’s po liti cal

system seemed to have morphed into a stable two- party democracy, con-

tested between the Kuomintang, no longer a dictatorial regime but a nor-

mal po liti cal party, and the DPP, which now held the presidency for the

fi rst time. Many also believed that having come from po liti cal exile, and

suffering themselves at the hands of an oppressive government, the DPP

would strengthen Taiwan’s young democracy. Thousands gathered after

the election results were in to hear Chen speak. In the country’s fi rst legisla-

tive elections after Chen was elected president, a record number of women

won seats. The party quickly passed a series of progressive environmental

and labor laws.

Several weeks after Chen’s victory he was sworn in as president on May

20, 2000. During his inaugural speech he shouted “Long live freedom and

democracy!” as if he were still leading a street rally rather than giving a

formal address. During the inauguration, DPP activists danced at parties

in strongholds in Taipei and the south, its base in the country, while foreign

observers, from the New York Times editorial board to American diplomats

stationed in the country, praised Taiwan’s transition as a model of democ-

racy. When Chen traveled to America in spring 2001, he was greeted in

New York City and Houston by an outpouring of support from Bush

administration offi cials, and he held meetings with se nior American

congressmen— even though nearly every previous Taiwanese leader since

the U.S. had cut diplomatic ties with the island in 1979 had been treated like

pariahs even if they stopped in the United States only to refuel their plane.

In some cases— though not, unfortunately, in Taiwan— longtime opposi-

tion leaders who fi nally gained the presidency or the prime ministership

did remember past struggles and made real attempts to foster compromise

and tolerance, even toward their old enemies. Nelson Mandela famously

reached out to South Africa’s white minority as president, not only publicly

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 87

supporting their beloved rugby team but also retaining se nior offi cials who

could reassure white businesspeople and investors. More often, however, the

fi rst generation of elected leaders only fueled middle class rage. From Ven-

ezuela to Bolivia to Kenya to Thailand to Taiwan, these leaders too often

have turned into elected autocrats, dominating young democracies whose

institutions are not strong enough to restrain a powerful leader uninter-

ested in compromise, negotiation, and tolerance of opposition. To this fi rst

generation, many of whom came of age po liti cally under authoritarian re-

gimes, votes are referendums on their rule; having triumphed, they can

then use all the powers of the state to crush opposition and favor their per-

sonal, po liti cal, and ethnic allies.

In other words, these elected autocrats, though fulfi lling one function

of democracy— winning the most votes— do not uphold constitutional

liberalism, or ensure that the rule of law is maintained and that individual

liberties and minority rights are protected. They follow the form of democ-

racy but are weakening its practice.

It is not hard to see why this fi rst generation of elected leaders so often

regressed in this way. Holding an opposition movement together in the face

of a repressive regime requires a high degree of cohesion, even autocracy,

within that movement; serving in opposition for so long also can make a

leader intensely fearful. In South Africa during apartheid rule, the African

National Congress viciously attacked, and sometimes even killed, members

of its own movement whom it perceived as too conciliatory toward the gov-

ernment, or as simply working against the ANC’s aims. (Nelson Mandela

was in jail on Robben Island during much of this internal bloodletting,

but his wife, Winnie, was accused of promoting the beating and murder of

ANC members accused of being government informers.)24 Chen Shui- bian,

the Taiwanese DPP leader, exhibited many of the same traits while the

DPP was in opposition— tight control of his party and paranoia regarding

outsiders. These were survival skills in opposition during the Kuomintang

dictatorship, when Chen could never trust whether anyone beyond his inti-

mate circle had been coopted by government agents, but later this course

would doom his administration once he gained the presidency and the

country had transitioned to democracy.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

88 The Middle Class Revolts

Like Chen, many former opposition leaders can fi nd it especially diffi -

cult to jettison these survival traits when the transition to democracy is ex-

tremely rapid, as happened in many African nations in the 1990s. These

circumstances leave little opportunity for former opponents to forgive the

crimes and mistakes of the past. Instead, having fi nally attained power, lead-

ers who’d seen authoritarian rulers enrich their own tribes, ethnic groups,

families, and supporters would then often use their new power simply to

reward their own— who can justly claim that they were shortchanged under

the previous regime. By comparison, in a more gradual transition, such as in

Spain after the death of Francisco Franco in 1975, conservative and liberal

po liti cal opponents had more time to build trust and jointly agree on the

norms and rules that would govern Spanish democracy.

Taking offi ce in 2000, Taiwan’s DPP movement soon dashed hopes

that it would usher in an era of greater democracy and freedom on the

island. True to its election promises, the DPP did take a harder line against

China, defending Taiwan’s right to govern itself, and to protect its free-

doms. (China initially responded harshly but eventually came to a kind of

frosty détente with the DPP leaders.) But on the island itself, Chen Shui-

bian, and a circle of party leaders around him who had developed a siege

mentality in exile, brought their almost authoritarian style to governing in

Taipei. Two years into Chen’s term as president, party activists who op-

posed anything Chen did soon found themselves ostracized, cut off from

circles of power. Some DPP insiders began to murmur that Chen and his

wife were increasingly using the power of his offi ce, which is one of the

strongest presidencies in the world, to direct favors, jobs, and cash to family

members and friends.25

Later, Chen’s wife would admit to laundering over $2 million from a

government contractor. Chen himself would go to jail on corruption charges,

after allegations that he had personally stolen millions in campaign money

and other government funds. And as we will see later on, Chen and his

wife’s corruption were hardly unusual— in Taiwan and in new democra-

cies, graft seems actually to worsen as the po liti cal system opens up, at least

at fi rst, further alienating average men and women, and besmirching the

concept of demo cratic reform.26

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 89

In the early 2000s, stories of Chen’s corruption were only whispers;

DPP supporters were far more shocked to witness his insular, domineering

style. Many believed that, once in offi ce, Chen would naturally give up some

of the secrecy and paranoia that had served him during his time in opposi-

tion, but they were wrong. Chen angrily fi red aides who refused to carry out

his wishes, and he brought family members into his inner po liti cal circle—

at least eleven family members would face corruption charges similar to

those made against the president, and his son would face charges of insider

trading. Several se nior ministers, including the foreign minister, would

resign after charging that Chen’s high- handed, self- dealing style had seri-

ously impaired Taiwan’s ability to hold on to its few remaining formal

allies, and had allowed Taiwan’s government to be taken advantage of by

unscrupulous middlemen with ties to Chen. “People feel humiliated by the

government’s incompetence,” George Tsai, a po liti cal analyst at Chinese

Culture University in Taipei, told the New York Times, referring to a scandal

in which one of the middlemen apparently had taken $30 million in gov-

ernment money. “It’s a joke to the outside world— how could the govern-

ment be cheated like this?”27 By the mid- 2000s, the once- supportive Bush

administration, furious with Chen’s incompetence and arrogance, simply

refused to let him stay overnight in the United States.28

In other cases, the fi rst leaders of young democracies come not from long-

time opposition movements but from within the former regime, where they

also received little education in demo cratic norms. Nearly every former So-

viet republic, for example, transitioned to a government run by former

Soviet bureaucrats; few of these leaders, save for a handful from the Baltics

and Georgia who’d lived for years in the West, had experience with democ-

racy. For them, politics had always been a zero- sum endeavor. Losers within

the Soviet hierarchy lost everything— their power, their prestige, sometimes

their lives. Had the transitions been more gradual, this lack of demo cratic

experience might have mattered less; newer, younger leaders with fewer ties

to the Soviet era might have emerged, and even old Soviet bureaucrats might

have learned that a defeat in the new po liti cal system did not send one to the

gulags. But in such a rapid transition, the former Soviet bureaucrats simply

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

90 The Middle Class Revolts

brought with them the po liti cal mindsets and strategies that had served

them well in the Soviet Union.

Throughout the former Soviet Union, nearly everywhere except the

Baltics, the fi rst generation of elected leaders has revealed itself to be auto-

crats at heart. Kurmanbek Bakiyev, who was one of the leaders of Kyrgyz-

stan’s 2005 Tulip Revolution against the autocratic regime of President

Askar Akayev, proved himself in offi ce to be nearly as authoritarian as his

pre de ces sor, and his tough policies ultimately sparked another bloody revo-

lution in 2010. In Georgia, Mikheil Saakashvili was also a leader of a color

revolution. But as president in 2007, faced with demonstrations against him,

Saakashvili unleashed overwhelming force against the protesters and later

declared a state of emergency, allowing him to close down media outlets,

detain opposition journalists, and silence much of the protest.29 Today he ap-

pears likely, after ending his term- limited presidency in 2012, to try to run

for the prime ministership, and make parliament the center of his power,

much as Vladimir Putin shifted from president to prime minister but re-

mained the most important actor in Rus sian politics. And now, in the Middle

East, a similar pattern is emerging, with many leaders of transitional gov-

ernments and, possibly, future parliaments, coming from within systems

that for de cades allowed no dissent, and where winner- take- all internal poli-

tics were the norm.

Beyond the shock and anger that elected politicians are undermining

reforms and ignoring the rule of law, many members of the middle class

have begun to grasp democracy’s downside: If the franchise is extended to

everyone, and if the poor, who make up the majority of the population in

most developing nations, band together behind one candidate, they could

elect someone determined to reduce the economic, po liti cal, and social privi-

leges enjoyed by the middle class.

Hugo Chavez, the charismatic Venezuelan military offi cer, certainly

grasped the notion that, with the support of the poor, a politician could gain

im mense power in a developing nation. Born to a working class family him-

self, Chavez seems from an early age to have developed a deep distaste for

Venezuela’s traditional capitalists, the large landowning families and busi-

nessmen of Caracas. Chavez went into the army partly, it seems, as a means

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 91

of rising up into politics. As a young soldier, he traveled through Caracas

and witnessed the severe poverty of the city’s slums— the country was, at

that time, one of the most unequal in the world. It made a profound impact

on Chavez. Early in his career, he founded a group called the Revolutionary

Bolivarian Movement- 200, which aimed to topple the country’s traditional

politics, which were nominally demo cratic but also dominated by powerful

business interests and traditionally rich families.

In 1992, as Venezuela’s ruling party implemented painful neoliberal

reforms pushed by donors, including cuts in social welfare spending, Chavez

tried to seize power in a coup. His putsch failed and he was sentenced to jail,

but he had gained nationwide fame as a man willing to stand up to neoliberal

reforms. Following his jail term, Chavez launched his own po liti cal party,

and in 1998, riding massive support from the poor, who had fared poorly as

Venezuela had pursued the Washington Consensus reforms, he was elected

president.

Though Venezuela, like many Latin countries, had long been domi-

nated by politicians from a few powerful families, in 1998 the country did

boast strong demo cratic institutions and culture, including an in de pen dent

judiciary, a vibrant print and broadcast media, and a healthy tradition of

po liti cal debate.30

Chavez would change that. He soon set about advocating for the inter-

ests of the poor and the lower middle classes against the interests of the ur-

ban middle classes and the elite, while also amassing more and more power

to himself and a close circle of allies. Chavez nationalized many key indus-

tries, with private businesspeople often getting what they perceived as unfair

compensation for their assets. He launched a program called “Plan Bolivar,”

in which the state would help upgrade the physical infrastructure of poor

areas, while also providing highly subsidized health care and food, and

cheap credit to the poor to start up community projects around the country.

He launched communal councils, an experiment in direct democracy that,

in many poor neighborhoods of the country, gave the poor a greater voice

in policy making, though these council also undermined legislators in

parliament.31 While announcing these policies, he clearly positioned them

as tools for the poor and as attacks on the middle and upper classes, often

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

92 The Middle Class Revolts

during rambling addresses on his pop u lar weekly radio show, Alo Presidente

(Hello, President). Using his powerful, mercurial speaking style to its fullest

extent, on his show Chavez repeatedly fulminated against his favorite

targets— local businesspeople, whom he claimed were trying to take over

the country, as well as the United States and other Western powers.

The longer Chavez remained in offi ce, the more populist his economic

policies became. In 1998 he still retained some more moderate economic

advisers, and he traveled to the United States and other countries to adver-

tise that Venezuela was still open for investment, particularly in the oil and

gas sector. But by the mid- 2000s Chavez had jettisoned most of the advisers

who had links to middle class urban businesspeople, and he had thrown out

many foreign investors, particularly in the oil sector. Government spending

continued to increase, boosting Venezuela’s debt, and Chavez handed con-

trol of many important companies to a small circle of close friends, making

them rich, even as his government’s laws, price controls, and economic mis-

management made it tougher and tougher for average small businesspeople

to earn a living.

Chavez’s policies had a mixed effect. At fi rst, they did help slash pov-

erty signifi cantly, which only further bonded the poor to him, and they also

did initially bring more of the poor into the po liti cal pro cess, clearly reduc-

ing the po liti cal power of the middle and upper classes. But they also hurt

the overall macroeconomic environment. Foreign investors bailed out of the

country, and the national oil company could not meet its production quotas

and saw its aging infrastructure deteriorate. Whenever the price of oil, the

major export, dropped, Venezuela had trouble providing even basic ser vices

to its people. By 2011, even as the price of oil had recovered and its Latin

neighbors, including Brazil and Colombia, were growing strongly, Venezu-

ela was limping, posting some of the worst growth rates in South America

and relying on loans from China to survive. Electricity blackouts hindered

business in the cities, infl ation soared, and in many parts of the country

staple goods became harder and harder to fi nd. As the economy worsened,

violent crime rose, and by 2011 Caracas had the highest murder rate per

capita of any city in the world— a staggering 233 per 100,000 inhabitants—

higher than the killings per capita in war zones like Kabul and Baghdad.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 93

Many human rights organizations believed that the offi cial fi gures actually

were understated.32

Still, Venezuela’s poor repaid Chavez with their loyalty, even as he

slowly strangled the country’s relatively strong demo cratic institutions. When

Chavez toured slums in Caracas and other cities, tens of thousands turned

out to greet him like he was a god. He won election after election— united

and engaged in politics, the poor by far constitute the majority of Venezuelan

voters. Chavez kept offering job creation programs and other populist mea-

sures to keep them happy, along with new nationalizations, price controls,

and other mea sures hated by many businesspeople and other professionals.

Toward the middle classes and upper classes, Chavez practiced a harsher

style of politics. He used his domination of broadcasting licenses to replace

private tele vi sion stations, which tended to favor the urban middle class

opposition candidates, with state TV. Eventually he forced the most critical

private channel off the air.33 He introduced legislation making it a crime

for critics to offer “false” information that “harms the interests of the state”;

he locked up judges who issued rulings he did not like and packed the

courts with his supporters. Chavez and his backers in the National Assem-

bly passed laws that essentially allow Chavez to rule the country by decree,

making the Assembly meaningless.34 By the end of the 2000s, the inter-

national monitoring or ga ni za tion Freedom House ranked Venezuela, one of

the oldest democracies in Latin America, as only “partly free.” In 2010, the

Or ga ni za tion of American States (OAS), a regional grouping that included

several Latin states with left- leaning governments favorably inclined to-

ward Chavez, issued a report condemning Venezuela for widespread abuses

of media freedom, human rights, freedom of association, and other free-

doms. “The state’s punitive power is being used to intimidate or punish

people on account of their po liti cal opinions,” declared the OAS’s human

rights watchdog.35

Chavez had not totally destroyed the country’s freedoms. In the early

2000s, some newspapers and tele vi sion stations remained in private hands,

critical of the president’s policies, and if opposition politicians had been able to

unite around one platform and one anti- Chavez fi gure, they might have been

able to dislodge Chavez. But instead, many middle class Caracas residents,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

94 The Middle Class Revolts

and middle class politicians, took the easy way out. They launched street

demonstrations, general strikes, and marches on the presidential palace

starting in 2001 and 2002. Many protesters openly called for the military

to intervene and push Chavez, authoritarian but also elected, out of offi ce.

During the protests, and the run- up to the military intervention, at least

eigh teen people were killed.

In April 2002, the armed forces responded, launching a coup and threat-

ening to bomb the presidential palace if Chavez did not step down. When

he did, they took Chavez hostage on a Ca rib be an island. While Chavez was

jailed, the coup makers installed a prominent businessman as interim pres-

ident. The George W. Bush administration seemed to tacitly condone the

coup, with press spokesperson Ari Fleischer essentially blaming Chavez for

the situation; later the Central Intelligence Agency was discovered to have

known that the military was planning a coup against Chavez but did not

provide a serious warning about the plot.36

Rallying his support among the poor, who massed in the streets of the

capital, and within lower ranks of the armed forces, Chavez would prevail.

Unable to win much support outside the capital, the coup government col-

lapsed. With the president’s backers thronging the streets, he emerged from

incarceration some forty- eight hours later at the presidential palace.

From that point on, the Venezuelan leader would only sharpen his

attacks on the middle class and elites, further dragging down the country’s

democracy. But by backing the coup— and then stepping up the number of

street protests designed to force Chavez out— his middle class opponents

had showed that they cared little for the institutions of democracy, either.

Despite the early euphoria of the Arab uprisings, middle classes in the

Middle East appeared to be just as conservative as their peers in East Asia

and Latin America. Though many of the groups that helped overthrow

Hosni Mubarak’s government fear the continuing power of the military,

some Egyptian middle class men and women actually have welcomed the

army’s continued po liti cal power. Increasingly they view the armed forces as

a check against Islamists and against growing instability, crime, and urban

violence, and wonder whether the country might not be better off under

another authoritarian regime, at least one less corrupt than the Mubarak

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 95

regime. Though Cairo historically had been a relatively safe city, after the

downfall of Mubarak, and with much of the Egyptian police on strike or

simply at home because they are not getting paid, armed robbery, gang war-

fare, and more petty crime has become common in the city, deterring in-

vestment and scaring many businesspeople.37 Consequently, some liberals

have come to support continued military rule even after security forces killed

Coptic Christians during the October protests, provoking a wave of anger

among Egypt’s Christians. Other liberals and some minorities simply have

fl ed the country during the Arab Spring: the New York Times reported that

the number of Egyptians who successfully obtained passports doubled in

the fi rst fi ve months of 2011, compared to the previous year.38

Indeed, by the autumn of 2011 many in the Egyptian middle classes

seemed to be scared of the prospect of free elections, which, they were

convinced, would make the chaos worse, or lead to a victory by the Muslim

Brotherhood, as Islamists had triumphed in the fi rst postuprising election

in neighboring Tunisia. Some Egyptian middle class men and women even

expressed concern that the country’s military actually was moving too quickly

in turning over power and or ga niz ing elections before secular, liberal parties

could build their strength and seriously compete with the Muslim Brother-

hood and other Islamist parties that had built strong organizations under-

ground during the Mubarak era.39

Given the wariness of the middle class in Egypt and in other Middle

Eastern nations, the Arab uprisings easily could stall before countries even

or ga nize regular elections. “There seems little doubt— as protesters tire and

as the general public tires of them— in what direction the balance will tilt” in

the Arab world, write analysts Robert Malley and Hussein Agha in the New

York Review of Books.40 The militaries in these nations have the or ga ni za-

tion, po liti cal experience, and power to dominate any postdictator era, and

they will be at the forefront of the Arab experiment, they write. Meanwhile,

they note, crowds that once fervently backed the anti- Mubarak, anti- Qadaffi ,

and anti– Ben Ali protesters have become more equivocal, as Islamists, who

have built their parties for de cades, have shown themselves to be the most

capable organizations in the new po liti cal climate as law and order has bro-

ken down in places, and as ethnic and tribal divisions fl ourish. So, to many

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

96 The Middle Class Revolts

Arab middle classes, a military- backed counterrevolution, an antidote to the

revolutions of the Arab Spring, does not look like such a bad idea.41

As they did in Venezuela, once the middle classes turn against elected leaders,

convinced they are actually protecting democracy, they seem willing to use

virtually any means to topple presidents and prime ministers. As we saw in

the fi rst chapter, nearly half of the military coups launched in the past twenty

years either enjoyed middle class support or were openly called for by middle

class protesters. This trend shows no sign of waning: as recently as the middle

of 2011, Thai urbanites, furious that Thaksin’s party had won yet another

national election, again were calling on the military to step in and annul the

poll. When this did not happen, the middle class anti- Thaksin groups in

Thai society relentlessly attacked Thaksin’s sister, the prime minister. Even

when massive fl ooding swamped the country in the fall of 2011, submerging

many parts of Bangkok and killing hundreds, the Thai military seemed

unwilling to cooperate with Thaksin’s sister, the new prime minister.42

This promilitary sentiment was repeated in 2011 in places as diverse as

Mexico, Pakistan, and Syria. In the case of Syria, urban middle classes and

religious minorities, like Christians, have continued to back the armed forces

and Bashar al- Assad even as the security forces have unleashed a brutal cam-

paign of violence against peaceful protesters in many parts of the country.

As we have seen, middle classes and elites in many other Middle Eastern

nations also have become more confl icted about whether to continue sup-

porting demo cratic reform, with many putting their trust once again in the

armed forces.43

Many of these elected autocrats, from Putin to Chavez to Thaksin, also

tend to be savvy politicians, retaining sizable popularity with the majority

of their country even as they undermine the rule of law, usually by embark-

ing upon populist policies that help reduce poverty, stirring up nationalism,

or some combination of the two. The endurance and survival of these lead-

ers have made urban middle class men and women only angrier, more des-

perate, and more willing to use extreme tactics, from violent protests to coups,

to remove an elected autocrat.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 97

To take one example, in late 2006 and early 2007 Bangladesh’s military

essentially staged a coup, maneuvering into power an unelected “caretaker”

government that then declared a state of emergency and assumed signifi -

cant powers. During the state of emergency, the government arrested Sheikh

Hasina, one of the two powerful women who for years had dominated Ban-

gladeshi electoral politics but who allegedly had been implicated in massive

graft and extortion. But eventually the government just dropped its charges

against the po liti cal leader, who clearly retained enormous popularity among

poor Bangladeshis. In the next free election, following the demise of the

caretaker government, Sheikh Hasina’s party dominated the poll, delight-

ing Bangladesh’s poor but infuriating Dhaka’s urbanites, many of whom

had supported the military intervention.

Even in Taiwan, which, during Chen’s rule, was still considered one of

the strongest democracies in Asia, middle class activists, many of them vet-

erans of the long struggle against the authoritarian Nationalist regime, be-

gan to turn. Increasingly furious at Chen’s incompetence, alleged corruption,

and crushing of protest, thousands of demonstrators, and then hundreds

of thousands, gathered in front of the presidential palace in Taipei in Sep-

tember 2006. They were led by a man named Shih Ming- teh, himself a

longtime democracy activist who once had greatly admired Chen, and

who had been beaten badly in jail during prison stints under Taiwan’s

authoritarian rulers. In the mid- 1990s, Shih actually had served as chair-

man of the DPP, Chen’s po liti cal party. Shih had fought so long against

the dictatorship that ruled Taiwan until the 1990s that he enjoyed enor-

mous moral authority among average Taiwanese. As many reporters noted,

Shih often was locally referred to as the “Nelson Mandela of Taiwan.” 44

Still, there Shih was, in September 2006, at the front of the crowd,

made up primarily of middle class and upper middle class Taipei men and

women. Shih led the crowd in chants and catcalls at the mention of the

president’s name, and in choruses of “Chen Step Down!” before they

marched from the palace through the business district. Later, the protest-

ers fanned out into other parts of the city, holding red sparklers— red be-

ing their color of anger. In Chen strongholds, they started fi ghting with

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

98 The Middle Class Revolts

his supporters, and eventually crashed several meetings Chen held with

foreign offi cials.

Although Chen had twice won elections, the demonstrators hoped to

recall him from his post, a strategy of dubious legality— but one that

some protesters had tried earlier, in 2004, holding violent demonstrations in

the capital in a previous effort to get Chen to leave. At that time they had

faced off against armored troop carriers in front of the palace and taunted

the police, daring the offi cers to attack them. The president was not in

residence— he had traveled to his heartland in southern Taiwan to ask his

supporters to pray for him and to vow never to step down— but the demon-

strators did not relent. Some openly hoped for a repeat of the silent coup that

had, in the Philippines, removed Joseph Estrada, though Shih later insisted

that he had no desire to provoke a military intervention. Still, during the

demonstrations in 2004, and ones held earlier, some 300,000 people calling

for Chen’s ouster had skirmished with police, leading to battles in front of the

presidential palace. Some of those demonstrators carried clubs, steel pipes,

bats, and other weapons to the protest, clearly looking to start violence.45

This time, in 2006, the protesters promised to turn out a million people

in front of the palace, in a rally called “Million People Depose A-Bian”

(A-Bian was Chen’s nickname). Ultimately, for all their rallies and attacks

the demonstrators did not force Chen out despite his popularity ratings,

which had fallen below 20 percent. Chen could still call on his support in

working class southern Taiwan, and he was savvy enough to evade, prevent,

or stop any larger demonstrations. He eventually was indicted and convicted

of corruption, in a decision his supporters saw as po liti cally motivated— but

the protests only added to the vitriol and distrust in Taiwanese democracy.46

To be sure, middle classes have not uniformly turned against democracy.

Within many countries still struggling for democracy, middle classes remain

the locus of reform movements. To take just two examples among many, in

Iran, middle class urbanites form the core of the opposition Green protest

against President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and the authoritarian/clerical

regime, while in Burma middle class men and women, including students

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Middle Class Revolts 99

from Rangoon and Mandalay, have continued to push for democracy as the

country begins to change.

But when they do turn against democracy, the middle classes’ interven-

tion can prove utterly destructive. By inviting the military back into politics,

the middle class potentially undermines civil/military relations for generations

and sets the stage for the army to undermine civilian leaders repeatedly, a

recurring cycle from Pakistan to Thailand to Venezuela. By legitimizing the

use of street demonstrations to oust elected leaders, the middle class delegiti-

mizes elections and other legitimate demo cratic institutions. This is partic-

ularly dangerous when the middle class uses protest to oust an elected leader

pop u lar with the majority poor of a country, who themselves now have be-

come more po liti cally engaged and convinced that only street demonstra-

tions, rather than demo cratic institutions, can work to fi ght back against the

middle classes. In Thailand or Taiwan, Venezuela or Bolivia, the revolt of

the middle class has left a bitter divide that is unlikely to be healed any-

time soon— the poor, feeling disenfranchised, store up their rage for a

future showdown.

Indeed, while working class men and women in many developing na-

tions already have grown disillusioned with democracy because of the lack

of growth, the middle classes’ willingness to abrogate democracy in order to

protect their privileges only further alienates working classes. “Why do they

have the right to just outlaw our party whenever they want?” said Noppa-

don Pattama, a minister in the populist Thai governments run by Thaksin

Shinawatra, who was forced to fl ee into exile after his party was banned.47

Empowered by populists like Thaksin, Joseph Estrada, or Hugo Chavez,

and no longer willing to simply hand over po liti cal power to middle classes

and elites, as they might have done ten or twenty years ago, the voting poor

in country after country have fought back after their mandates have been

overruled. In Thailand, for example, poor supporters of Thaksin formed

the United Front for Democracy Against Dictatorship, a mass or ga ni za tion

whose members, wearing their trademark red shirts, targeted middle class

and elite institutions with demonstrations and violent protests in 2009 and

2010. They held massive rallies drawing tens of thousands of people, but

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

100 The Middle Class Revolts

they also attacked government meetings, pelted the motorcade of then prime

minister Abhisit Vejjajiva, and launched rallies in the center of Bangkok

that deteriorated into brawls with middle class shop keep ers in certain neigh-

borhoods. Ultimately, it seemed, the red shirts had decided that, if Thai-

land’s middle classes could ruin the country’s democracy, so could they.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:18 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: Graft, Graft, and More Graft

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.9

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

F or many first- time visitors to Jakarta, capital of Indonesia and

the largest city on the intensely crowded island of Java, the metropo-

lis seems to be in constant motion, its incessant activity and brutal

equatorial heat wearing down travelers. Alongside the wide boulevards of

the central fi nancial district, where glass- and- steel skyscrapers jostle for space

with fi ve- star hotels, vendors peddling sticks of satay and clove cigarettes

and copies of the Indonesian tabloids push their carts past mobs of local

offi ce workers dressed in Western suits. Away from the grandiose fi nancial

areas, in the cramped side streets of newer districts that have sprung up to

accommodate migrants from other parts of the sprawling archipelago of

17,000 islands, motorcyclists weave through gridlocked traffi c, their exhaust

stinging the throat and mixing with soupy air already polluted by cars,

buses, and haze from forest fi res burning out of control across other parts of

Indonesia.

Yet compared with the late 1990s, Jakarta today has become so placid it

could resemble Oslo. At that time, the collapse of longtime dictator Suharto

and the Asian fi nancial crisis had battered Indonesia’s economy and simul-

taneously released the cork that had repressed religious, ethnic, class, and

other divides in the staggeringly diverse archipelago. The result was a po-

liti cal and social meltdown. At the time, many frequent visitors to Indone-

sia wondered whether the country was going to disintegrate into a Southeast

Asian version of Pakistan or Nigeria, a giant failing state poisoning its neigh-

bors and, potentially, the international community. The Indonesian econ-

omy shrank by 13 percent in 1998, tens of millions of Indonesians fell below

the poverty line, and rioters ransacked and burned large areas of the capital.

Graft, Graft, and More Graft

6

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

102 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

Long lines formed for handouts of staple goods like rice and cooking oil,

and the value of the rupiah, Indonesia’s currency, plummeted by about 75

percent in the end of 1997 and the beginning of 1998.1

Outside Jakarta, the violence could actually be worse. Besides violent

anti- Chinese sentiment, other ethnic and religious fault lines exploded in

the late 1990s and early 2000s. In the Malukus, the famous “Spice Islands”

where Western colonists once had competed for access to valuable nutmeg

and cloves, Christians and Muslims attacked each others’ villages, burning

them to the ground and beheading survivors, whose heads were left on

skewers like a tropical Vlad the Impaler. Outlying regions like Aceh, East

Timor, and West Papua threatened to secede, potentially breaking up the

country.

To people who lived through the late 1990s and early 2000s in Indone-

sia, the turnaround to the situation today seems, on the surface, to be re-

markable. The sprawling country, with the fourth- largest population in the

world, appears to have achieved stability and defused the violence that had

threatened to tear the archipelago asunder. Rather than disintegrating into

Nigeria or Pakistan, Indonesia, to some observers, has become the demo-

cratic success story of the de cade. Indonesia has devolved much of the central

bud get and empowered local offi cials, increasing nationwide participation

in politics. It has fostered a broader and more inclusive civil society, and

has increasingly tolerated public protest, po liti cal opposition, and legisla-

tive horse- trading. Local areas have gained greater control over their natu-

ral resources and their social welfare systems, and have introduced new

forms of local- level elections and other types of voter feedback. Jakarta’s

Indonesian and English- language newspapers now give a daily roundup—

right next to the weather pages— of planned (peaceful) protests that will be

held on the capital’s streets, a sign of how normal and routine such public

participation has become.

Unlike po liti cal leaders in other countries such as Pakistan, who are

reticent to confront militancy for fear of seeming like tools of the United

States, Indonesia’s recent leaders have utilized the bully pulpit to condemn

militants, while also integrating Muslim parties into the mainstream po liti-

cal sphere. “I would like to emphasize that the country must not, and will

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 103

not, be defeated by terrorism. . . . To the whole of the Indonesian people, let

us collectively unite in the fi ght against the acts of terrorism,” Indonesian

President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono declared in one speech.2 Indeed, by

combining this public outreach with effective police work, Indonesia has

shattered Jemaah Islamiah, once the most powerful terror network in South-

east Asia, responsible for the bloody 2002 Bali bombings, which killed over

200 people, as well as for numerous attacks on Western hotels and embassies

in Jakarta. According to the International Crisis Group, the most authorita-

tive analyst of Jemaah Islamiah, the group is now splintered, weakened,

and largely in effec tive.3

Stability, engendered by public participation and devolution, has al-

lowed for investment and stronger growth; except for India and China, In-

donesia has posted some of the highest growth rates in the world in recent

years. Yudhoyono also has presided over truly free and contested elections.

After its violent birth, the in de pen dent country of East Timor did emerge.

Another secessionist confl ict, in Aceh, was resolved following the devastat-

ing tsunami in December 2004; Yudhoyono had the wisdom to try to help

negotiate an end to the decades- long confl ict in Aceh, rather than attempt

to overwhelm insurgents by force. Attacks against Indonesian Chinese have

decreased sharply as calm has been restored. Today, far from sheltering

themselves in heavily guarded enclaves across Jakarta, behind razor wire

and security checks, many ethnic Chinese businesspeople are beginning to

participate openly in politics.

In recognition of Indonesia’s supposed turnaround, the United States,

which all but ignored the country for a de cade after Suharto’s fall in 1998,

is once again courting it. The Obama administration has launched what it

calls “comprehensive partnership” with Indonesia.4 As countries in the Mid-

dle East throw off their own dictators, the White House commissioned an

internal study to examine Indonesia’s transition, and to see whether the

archipelago now could be an example to the Arab world.5 Returning in

November 2010 to the country where he spent four years of his childhood,

President Barack Obama heaped praise on Indonesia, declaring, “Indonesia

has charted its own course through an extraordinary demo cratic transforma-

tion.”6 Secretary of State Hillary Clinton, meeting with Indonesian offi cials

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

104 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

the following year, urged them to promote democracy in the Middle East

and in Burma, saying that Indonesia “provides an example for a transition

to civilian rule and building strong demo cratic institutions.”7

And yet, even as it supposedly goes from success to success, Indonesia

has developed what could be a fatal fl aw. As in many other young democra-

cies, the opening of politics also has opened the tap for corruption. In this

liberalization of corruption, the breakdown of a centralized system of graft,

common under authoritarian rule, leads to more bureaucrats, offi cials, and

average policemen with their hands out— so many more people for citizens

to pay in order to start a business, get their kids into school, drive on the

highway, mail a letter, or fulfi ll any number of other tasks taken for granted

by citizens of wealthy democracies. Corruption has become so common-

place that, when politicians accused the national anticorruption commission

of being penetrated by corruption and other crimes itself, few Indonesians

were surprised— though it turned out that the accusations were mostly an

attempt to undermine the commission.8 Still, in 2010 one former head of

the anticorruption commission was found guilty of masterminding the mur-

der of a rival.9

In theory, more open politics should reduce corruption, by throwing sun-

light onto the actions of politicians. This may be true in the long run, but

in the short run the opposite often seems to happen. During an era of tight

authoritarian rule, graft often remains relatively centralized and predict-

able, allowing citizens to understand and manage established networks of

corruption. The regime siphons off a certain percentage of money from lo-

cal businesses, but the number of actors involved in the corruption remains

relatively small. (To be sure, there are exceptions, like Mobutu Sese Seko’s

Zaire, in which the venality of this small number of actors was so great that

it became utterly unmanageable.) Yet as countries demo cratize, the old

channels of graft and monopolies over important information tend to van-

ish, and more actors have access to important government information that

could be sold, and so these new and different actors— local po liti cal bosses,

broader segments of the bureaucracy, staff of members of parliament— put

out their hands. This liberalization of corruption can add to business costs

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 105

for everyone, from the largest local corporations to the smallest street ven-

dors, who now, in cities like Jakarta, have to pay a litany of small “fi nes” to

everyone from beat cops to traffi c police to small- time local offi cials.

Indeed, Indonesia provides a clear illustration of how po liti cal opening

leads to the liberalization of corruption. At the beginning of the transition

from longtime dictator Suharto, whose regime collapsed in 1998, graft be-

came decentralized, following de cades of tightly controlled networks of cor-

ruption run by the military and Suharto’s extended family.10 The central

government handed over more power to local leaders, and, in addition to

empowering local politicians, the new situation also provided many more

opportunities for corruption. “Actors in the bureaucracy, judiciary, po liti cal

parties, and in the army have reemerged as central players in a corruption

free for all in demo cratic Indonesia,” wrote economist Michael Rock in a

comprehensive study of corruption in Indonesia and several other develop-

ing countries.11

A truly competitive legislature, a sharp change from Suharto’s compli-

ant parliament, also has added to an increase in corruption. Again, in the

long run a competitive legislature could bring transparency to politics, and

studies by multiple economists have found that corruption eventually de-

creases as a democracy ages. But for now, it signifi cantly increases the amount

of money in the po liti cal system. Although Indonesian legislators no longer

can count on winning offi ce just by joining Suharto’s party, Golkar, the

young democracy has developed few rules governing how politicians should

raise money to campaign. “With the emergence of a confrontational rela-

tionship between newly empowered legislatures and embattled presidents,

members of parliament, who needed ample war chests to win re- election,

used their new po liti cal powers to extort funds. . . . Local offi cials also par-

ticipated in extorting and taxing private fi rms,” Rock wrote.12 Democracy

has provided rent seekers with many more opportunities to make money

off the state, or from elections, but Indonesia has not yet developed the

checks and balances to restrain them, he concluded.

Simply the fact that Indonesia now has more elections— for local po liti-

cal positions, for party leadership, for legislative seats— provides more op-

portunity for graft in the absence of strong traditions of clean elections or

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

106 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

effective monitoring. During the 2006– 7 race for the governor of Jakarta, a

position similar to that of an American mayor, the U.S. embassy reported

that some parties were trying to sell their nominations for the post to the

highest bidder.13 Two years earlier, in the run- up to the national presiden-

tial election ultimately won by Yudhoyono, a similar problem had emerged:

powerful politician Jusuf Kalla, who would serve as Yudhoyono’s fi rst vice

president, allegedly won the chairmanship of the Golkar party by “[paying]

enormous bribes to secure votes from party branches,” according to another

U.S. embassy analysis. Since there were now so many more party branches

than during the dictatorship, and each one could exercise the kind of infl u-

ence that local party offi ces never had during Suharto’s time, the amount of

money needed to pay them off was far higher than in the past.14

Even Yudhoyono, who tried to build a reputation as a clean politician,

rhetorically supporting the nation’s anticorruption watchdog even as it

went after some of his closest associates, could not escape the country’s

growing graft problem. The trea sur er of Yudhoyono’s Demo cratic Party, a

man named Muhammad Nazaruddin, fl ed the country in May 2011 after

being accused of massive corruption in the tender of buildings in Jakarta.

Once abroad, Nazaruddin claimed that many members of Yudhoyono’s

party had been involved in his state contracts scheme, an allegation widely

believed among Indonesian po liti cal, media, and business leaders.15

Not surprisingly, despite its increasingly open politics, Indonesia has

made little headway in recent years in Transparency International’s annual

rankings of perceptions of corruption. The Po liti cal Economy and Risk

Consulting, a leading Asian survey, ranked Indonesia as the most corrupt

country in Asia, behind such paragons of clean politics as Cambodia and

the Philippines.16

This decline in Transparency International rankings is echoed in other

emerging democracies, where the enlargement of the franchise and the

decentralization of po liti cal power, at least at fi rst, seems to make graft

easier. As Thailand became more demo cratic in the 2000s, in terms of a

broader franchise, freer voting, and a decentralization of power to prov-

inces from Bangkok, its Transparency International ranking fell from sixty-

fi rst in the world in 2001 to seventy- eighth in 2010. The Philippines’s ranking

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 107

in Transparency International’s survey of corruption perceptions declined

from fi fty- fi fth in the world in 1998 to one hundred thirty- fourth in 2010.

In fact, in analyzing over thirty developing countries that emerged from

authoritarian rule and shifted to democracy in the late 1990s and early 2000s,

Council on Foreign Relations researchers have found that the Transparency

International score for corruption perceptions actually declined in most of

the countries in the fi rst fi ve years of demo cratic rule.

In a number of cities and provinces across Indonesia, newly empowered

local offi cials— or party leaders like Nazaruddin— have built megaprojects,

like a $600- million, 50,000- seat outdoor stadium in East Kalimintan on the

island of Borneo, that allegedly have provided innumerable opportunities

for contractors, in collusion with local offi cials, to skim money from proj-

ects. Today nearly a quarter of the Indonesian leaders charged with cor-

ruption come from district and provincial- level jobs, compared with almost

none a de cade ago, when graft was controlled by Jakarta.17

This corruption is hard to miss, even for outsiders. Even as Obama

pushes for the “comprehensive partnership” with Indonesia, American in-

vestors, who have looked closely at the country, understand how graft is

spiraling out of control. Despite Indonesia’s size, it remains only the twenty-

eighth- largest trading partner of America, behind such global minnows as

Belgium. When quizzed about their interest in investing in Indonesia, most

American companies— other than large natural resources fi rms that already

have huge investments in the country— reply that they are still deferring

any investments, largely because of the country’s problem with graft.18 When,

in 2011, Google decided to launch new investments in Southeast Asia, it

initially passed over Indonesia, by far the largest country in the region, and

then essentially asked the Indonesian government for waivers that would

allow it to avoid all the red tape (and potential graft) clogging Indonesian

business today.19

Indonesia’s story is repeated in many young democracies. In Rus sia and

other post- Soviet states, people watched, after 1989, as the old nomenkla-

tura, the former communist offi cials, benefi ted from an orgy of self- dealing

of state assets. Yet, at the same time, the chaotic freeing of the economy of-

ten allowed these former bureaucrats, who now “owned” many former state

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

108 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

assets, to extort bribes from the general public to get access to certain for-

eign goods, licenses to launch a business, or entrée into companies created

from old state fi rms. In a study of several post- Communist states by the New

Democracies Barometer at the University of Strathclyde in Scotland, over 70

percent of respondents said that corruption had increased in comparison

with that under their former communist regimes, and that this had signifi -

cantly impacted their views of the quality of democracy.20

Indeed, several multicountry studies of corruption suggest that graft

increases in the early years of demo cratization. In one analysis of democ-

racy and rent seeking, economists Hamid Mohtadi and Terry Roe of the

University of Minnesota found that in nearly every one of the sixty- one

countries they studied, rent seeking and corruption rose in the early stages

of demo cratization.21 Other studies, focusing on specifi c regions or coun-

tries, have found similar results. Po liti cal scientists Chris Baker and Pasuk

Phonpaichit concluded that corruption rose as Thailand demo cratized; other

economists discovered that corruption has increased in most demo cratizing

Latin American nations as centralized networks give way to more decen-

tralized politics.22

Even when graft might not actually be getting worse, the openness of new

democracies often leads to the perception among the general public that it is.

In large part, this is simply because a freer media, and more in de pen dent

anticorruption agencies, investigate the government and publish reports on

graft. In the long run, again, this is a positive development: Exposés of graft

eventually could encourage politicians and civil servants to think twice about

their actions. But in the short run, the freer media and anticorruption agen-

cies’ reports tend to increase public perceptions of government corruption.

Under authoritarian governments, rumors of graft within po liti cal circles

may spread, but they are easier to keep out of the local press. In China, for

example, Prime Minster Wen Jiabao has successfully maintained an image

of a caring, earthy, and incorruptible grandfather type. Because of this im-

age, Wen is always the fi rst top Chinese offi cial on the scene at any major

tragedy, like the deadly 2008 earthquake in Sichuan province, where he

comforted the grieving and vowed an honest government investigation of

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 109

any malfeasance that might have made the disaster worse. Wen has main-

tained this image despite the fact that po liti cal insiders— and foreign

journalists— know that his wife, Zhang Peili, wears staggeringly expensive

jewelry, which makes one wonder how she can afford such items given his

modest offi cial salary.23 But because the tightly controlled Chinese press

never reports on the business interests of Wen’s wife, and China’s state an-

ticorruption agencies do not touch such se nior offi cials, most average Chi-

nese have no idea about her wealth. When, in 2007, the Taiwanese media

reported that Zhang owned jade jewelry worth hundreds of thousands

of dollars, Chinese censors quickly blocked the stories from the Chinese

Internet. “The Propaganda Ministry issued blanket orders to the news me-

dia not to cover Zhang’s jewelry activities, according to a se nior Chinese

editor who asked not to be identifi ed. Filtering software was updated to

block all queries about “Wen’s wife” and “jewelry,” reported the Los Ange-

les Times.24

Similarly, during the time of the dictator Suharto, whose family stole

as much as $35 billion in government wealth, according to several estimates,

to publish an exposé of the Suharto empire would have meant guaranteed

arrest for any local reporter who attempted to do so. By contrast, the free,

and scandal- driven, press in Indonesia now produces endless exposés of cor-

ruption in high po liti cal circles. In addition, demo cratic Indonesia has devel-

oped a Supreme Audit Agency and other anticorruption watchdogs, which

generally produce in de pen dent, fair investigations of graft allegations. Yud-

hoyono, though certainly far less corrupt than Suharto by any standard, has

been battered by a long string of media reports about corruption linked to

his administration, including the Nazaruddin allegations and allegations

that the president ordered the bailout of a leading bank, Bank Century,

that made major campaign contributions to his vice president. These alle-

gations were given more fuel by a report, released in late 2009, by the

Supreme Audit Agency, which suggested that the vice president, who had

formerly governed Indonesia’s central bank, had used his powers as central

banker to help rescue Bank Century. The allegations became so numerous

that Yudhoyono was forced to go on national tele vi sion to address his role in

them, and to promise a tougher fi ght against graft. During Suharto’s time,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

110 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

such allegations simply would have been completely quashed, and the pres-

ident would not even have had to respond to them in public.25

These perceptions of corruption heighten economic uncertainty, since

average people simply hear more about graft than they used to under an au-

thoritarian regime, and they also add to civic disengagement from a po liti-

cal elite perceived as cynical and uninterested in the public welfare. As

economist Rock notes, under Suharto the private sector was, in a way,

protected from excessive graft— Suharto granted a “franchise” to a certain

number of se nior regime cronies to extort money from companies, but he

prevented any other offi cials who did not have this “franchise” from doing

so. Now, “demo cratization witnessed the collapse of the franchise system,”

making private companies in Indonesia even more uncertain about whether

their investments would be protected, or whether they would have to pay a

continual, unending string of bribes.26

In earlier global demo cratic waves, freedom of the press may have had

a similar impact, exposing corruption to the public. But the reach and scope

of media outlets were much smaller in the second and third waves of de-

mocracy, and so even if the press did print more stories on corruption, its

ability to quickly infl uence large sections of the public was limited. With

the Internet and social media, the media’s reach is far greater and faster.

Even in a developing nation like Indonesia, widespread Internet penetra-

tion and use of social media provide even the poorest men and women with

access to the latest news coverage— including numerous stories about cor-

ruption. Indonesia, in fact, now has the largest number of Facebook users

of any country other than the United States.27

Rising corruption, or even perceptions of rising corruption, can add to

pop u lar alienation with democracy. A meta- analysis of over thirty emerging

democracies around the world conducted by several of my research associ-

ates at the Council on Foreign Relations and myself used survey data be-

tween 2002 and 2007, the most recent years with comprehensive survey

information, to examine the correlation between support for democracy and

corruption. We conducted our analysis by using Barometer surveys from

various regions to examine support for democracy, and also utilized data

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 111

from the Pew Global Attitudes Survey, in which people in several regions

were questioned to assess whether they considered corruption a “very big

problem” in their country. We found that, in roughly one- quarter of the

countries, support for democracy decreased when perceptions of corruption

increased. Conversely, in several of the case studies, such as Bangladesh,

Argentina, and India, signifi cant decreases in perceptions of corruption

were correlated with increases in pop u lar support for democracy. These

results suggest that, if governments in emerging democracies can quickly

get graft under control, they can more easily consolidate demo cratic transi-

tions.28

In countries in this meta- analysis that showed a clear link, the relation-

ship between corruption and diminishing support for democracy was sub-

stantial— a fi nding supported by the work of other researchers such as

Yun- han Chu of National Taiwan University, who has found that corrup-

tion perceptions have eroded trust in government in many young Asian

democracies.29 In Pakistan, where even many middle class liberals privately

admit that graft has increased in recent years of civilian governments as

compared with past military regimes, the survey data shows that perceptions

of corruption have been bad for democracy. Between 2002 and 2007, the

number of Pakistanis who perceived that the country had a serious cor-

ruption problem grew by 6 percent; over the same period, support for de-

mocracy among the Pakistani population fell by nearly 9 percent. Similarly,

in Ukraine, where many middle class men and women grew frustrated

in the late 2000s with the government of Orange Revolution leader Viktor

Yushchenko because they saw graft rising despite the country’s greater po-

liti cal openness, the survey data also shows that this frustration has led to

disillusionment with democracy. Between 2002 and 2007, the percentage of

Ukrainians who believed that the country had a serious problem with cor-

ruption grew by 9 percent; over that same period, support among the popu-

lation for democracy fell by a sizable 11 percent.30

Other studies show similar results. Examining perceptions of corruption

in Africa between 2002 and 2005, several researchers found that “corruption

is a major, perhaps the major, obstacle to building pop u lar trust in state insti-

tutions and electoral pro cesses in Africa.” Corruption was the strongest factor

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

112 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

hurting Africans’ trust in demo cratic institutions— institutions whose func-

tioning was critical to these young democracies.31

In other cases, corruption fosters public dissatisfaction with elected of-

fi cials. This dissatisfaction can then lead to citizens looking to other, un-

elected actors to resolve po liti cal problems. This might not be such a problem:

one comprehensive survey, taken in the mid- 2000s, and covering all of South

Asia, found that less than 50 percent of Indians trusted po liti cal parties,

but that Indians had instead placed high degrees of trust in their country’s

judiciary and nonpartisan Election Commission, two important institu-

tions in a democracy. Even so, the rallies against corruption by Indian

hunger strikers in the summer of 2011, who openly disdained the po liti cal

system and elected politicians, drew large middle class crowds, suggesting

that even those low levels of trust in Indian politicians had fallen precipi-

tously.32

But at least in India, the public has placed trust in some demo cratic in-

stitutions. In places like Pakistan, Thailand, or Egypt, where the public today

has low levels of trust in po liti cal parties, middle class citizens instead often

have put their trust in the army, which, though it has played a central role in

those nations’ histories, can hardly be called guarantors of democracy.

As we have seen in the case of the Jakarta polls, this growth in corruption

also extends to election campaigns in young democracies, which, at fi rst,

become more corrupt and, potentially, divisive. As economist Paul Collier

shows in his analysis of demo cratic systems in Africa, initial demo cratic

elections in developing countries often create what he calls a “Darwinian

struggle for po liti cal survival in which the winner is the one who adopts the

most cost- effective means of attracting votes.”33 Lacking the strong institu-

tions capable of rewarding good governance and punishing cheating— such

as anticorruption watchdogs, a strong election monitoring commission,

and impartial courts— the most cost- effective means of winning votes in a

young and poor democracy, Collier found, is not delivering good gover-

nance but bribery, voter intimidation, and ballot fraud. And without an

established tradition of tolerance for opposition parties, these fi rst free elec-

tions turn into zero- sum battles, in which no party can afford to lose, and

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 113

so all parties are willing to use the most dramatic— and even violent—

tactics to triumph. And in each subsequent demo cratic election, as the stakes

of winning or losing become clearer— each party understands that, unless

it wins, it will be cut out of all patronage— the amount of vote buying and

intimidation tends to increase. In Nigeria, for instance, vote buying appar-

ently has increased in each demo cratic presidential election, with the me-

dian price paid for a vote rising with each election as well.

So, during the fi rst truly competitive elections in Kenya, for example,

in the early 2000s, it made sense, from a perspective of survival, for all the

parties contesting the poll to use bribery, voter and candidate intimidation,

and even outright killings to try to dominate polling districts during the

election campaign. All of the parties knew, after all, that if they lost an elec-

tion, their party, and all their po liti cal, business, and ethnic allies, would be

frozen out of power.34

Even in wealthier emerging democracies such as those in East Asia,

where one might think there would be more room for politicians to share

spoils— and thus less incentive to view elections simply as survival of the

fi ttest— democracy has actually led to spikes in election violence and vote

buying. A 2011 analysis of several emerging democracies in Asia, produced

by the United Nations Development Program (UNDP), found that while

elections can allow for public participation, in many emerging democracies

they are exacerbating violence and graft. Elections “can trigger violence. . . .

Elections are not in themselves suffi cient mechanisms for managing po liti-

cal change when the players have not bought into the rules of the game”— in

other words, contesting polls cleanly and peacefully, it noted. Electoral

democracy, it concluded, “has come at a high price [in emerging Asian de-

mocracies.] Each year hundreds of people lose their lives in connection with

competitive election.”35 In Thailand, Nepal, Bangladesh, the Philippines,

and Pakistan, among other emerging Asian democracies, elections have, as

in Africa, turned into winner- take- all contests in which any losing party

gets completely shut out, UNDP concluded. As a result, just as in Kenya or

Nigeria, Asian po liti cal parties are willing to go to any extent to win elec-

tions, since they know a loss means their power will be eviscerated. For ex-

ample, one estimate suggests that vote buying in Thailand has become so

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

114 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

entrenched, despite laws that punish it with prison terms, that this activity

puts some $1 billion into the economy during election time.36

In Indonesia, money politics now has become the norm during cam-

paign seasons— in Jakarta and nearly everywhere else in the archipelago.

During Suharto’s time, there were really no parties other than Golkar, the

dictator’s po liti cal vehicle. Golkar representatives might hand out small

amounts of Indonesian rupiah during the elections, which were held every

fi ve years and which resulted in Suharto and his party getting Saddam

Hussein– like vote tallies. But those disbursements of money were necessar-

ily limited by the fact that Suharto had no real opposition, and the dictator’s

party, together with the army, always could use the threat of force to get

people to vote for them as well.

Today, Indonesian po liti cal parties are far more competitive: in parlia-

mentary elections, at least fi ve sizable national parties now contest each elec-

tion. None really can rely on force to intimidate voters into supporting them,

so handing out money during campaigns, or on Election Day, has become

far more important. One prominent Indonesian academic, Effenda Ghazali,

looked at voter attitudes in several parts of the country, and found that the

amount people were paid for their votes had more than doubled between

the early 2000s and the late 2000s.37

Even a quick tour of campaign stops by Indonesian po liti cal parties

reveals hyperinfl ation in the price of votes. At rallies in one Jakarta suburb,

where migrants from around the country have built small, two- room houses

of concrete and wood, candidates from one leading Indonesian party can-

vass for support. While a candidate speaks on the suburb’s makeshift stage,

his aides hand out small baskets of rice, cooking oil, and peanuts to people

in the audience, and then the candidate leads the crowd in chants and fl ag-

waving in the party’s colors. Few in the crowd seem to even bother listening

to the speech; many are waiting for an appearance onstage of a pop u lar

local pop singer known for dancing while shaking her rump toward the

crowd.

But the men and women in the audience, mostly working class people

who came to the capital to work in construction or other manual labor, start

to pay more attention as the candidate’s aides wander through the audience

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Graft, Graft, and More Graft 115

with other presents. Inside new baskets being handed out are small hand-

fuls of rupiah, along with cards instructing people how to fi nd the party’s

symbol and colors on ballots. Men and women who a minute ago had been

relaxing on the ground, chewing sticks of spicy chicken, jump to their feet

and press forward— many grab one, two, three baskets with the cash inside

in a scene that is reminiscent of an American radio station promotion. But

several of the people who grabbed baskets turn to the party’s aides in disap-

pointment after looking inside. “This is half what we got from the other

parties,” says one.38

The ongoing vote buying, the perceptions of growing corruption among

elected politicians, the little bribes demanded over and over, have begun

to wear down many Indonesians. When asked, many Indonesian business-

people refl exively express pride in their young democracy, and in how their

country has grown since the chaos and economic crises of the late 1990s.

But when pushed a bit harder, they allow their frustration to surface quickly—

street vendors, taxi drivers, and even wealthy tycoons will promptly complain

about all the bribes they must pay to keep their businesses running. So per-

haps it should not have been surprising when the former dictator’s son,

known as “Tommy” Suharto, decided in mid- 2011 that he would enter

politics— even though his father had overseen numerous brutal campaigns

of repression and he himself had served a long jail sentence for allegedly mas-

terminding the murder of a Supreme Court judge. Tommy launched a new

po liti cal party and became chairman of its board, and laid plans for Indone-

sia’s national elections in 2014. “The people don’t believe in the [Yudhoyono]

government,” one of Tommy’s top po liti cal aides told reporters. “Thirteen

years of ‘reform’ hasn’t made people’s lives better.”39

Tommy seemed to have understood the zeitgeist. In a study by the In-

donesian research or ga ni za tion Survey Circle, released in late 2011, only 12

percent of respondents believed that the current group of politicians in

the demo cratic era were doing a better job than leaders during the era of

Suharto.40 An overwhelming number of respondents cited graft as one of the

biggest complaints about the demo cratic era; commentaries on the survey

noted that a sizable percentage of Indonesia’s elected members of parlia-

ment were targeted by corruption investigations within a year after taking

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

116 Graft, Graft, and More Graft

their seats. “This underscores the fact that for a majority of Indonesians,

democracy has not delivered a better life,” noted the Jakarta Globe, com-

menting on the results of the survey.41 In another poll released in May 2011,

residents of Indonesia, the supposed demo cratic success story of the 2000s,

said, by a margin of two to one, that conditions in the country were better

during Suharto’s time than under the government of demo cratically elected

Yudhoyono.42

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:29 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: The China Model

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.10

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

T he attendees of the annual World Economic Forum in Davos

are not exactly used to being told what to do. The Swiss resort

draws the global elite: the highest- powered investment bankers,

the top government offi cials and leaders, the biggest philanthropists, and

the most famous celebrities, who gather each year to attempt to solve the

world’s most pressing problems and still have time for eve ning cocktails.

But in January 2009, the Davos crowd had to listen to a blistering lec-

ture from a most unlikely source. Some thought that the fi rst se nior Chinese

leader to attend the World Economic Forum, premier Wen Jiabao, might

take a low- key approach to his speech to the Forum.1 But at Davos, that

genial grandpa was not in evidence. Months after Lehman Brothers col-

lapsed, triggering the global economic crisis, Wen told the Davos attendees

that the West was squarely to blame for the meltdown roiling the entire

world. An “excessive expansion of fi nancial institutions in blind pursuit of

profi t,” a failure of government supervision of the fi nancial sector, and an

“unsustainable model of development, characterized by prolonged low sav-

ings and high consumption” caused the crisis, said an angry Wen.2

Five years earlier, such a broadside from a Chinese leader would have

been unthinkable. Though in the 1990s and early 2000s China had used its

soft power to reassure its Asian neighbors and to expand its infl uence in

regions like Africa and Latin America, until the end of 2008 nearly every

top Chinese offi cial still lived by Deng Xiaoping’s old advice to build Chi-

na’s strength while maintaining a low profi le in international affairs.3 As

Deng told one visiting African leader in 1985, “Please don’t copy our model.

If there is any experience on our part, it is to formulate policies in light of

The China Model

7

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

118 The China Model

one’s own national conditions.” 4 In the mid- 2000s, American journalist

Joshua Cooper Ramo already had coined the term “Beijing Consensus” to

describe China’s brand of authoritarian capitalism, and in private some

Chinese academics had begun discussing whether Beijing might have les-

sons to teach other countries in Asia, Africa, or Latin America.5 Still, no

Chinese offi cials, academics, or other opinion leaders were willing to say, on

the record, that they believed China had a model of po liti cal and economic

development that other developing nations could follow.6 Many top leaders

publicly stuck to the line that China was a developing nation that still had

much to learn from the world.7

But in 2008 and 2009 the global economic crisis decimated the econo-

mies of nearly every leading democracy, while China surfed through the

downturn virtually unscathed, though Beijing did implement its own large

stimulus package, worth roughly $600 billion.8 China’s economy grew by

nearly 9 percent in 2009, while Japan’s shrunk by over 5 percent, and the

American economy contracted by 2.6 percent.9 By August 2010, China (not

including Hong Kong) held over $860 billion in U.S. trea suries; when Chi-

nese leaders returned to Davos the year after Wen’s scolding of the West,

they came not to chat but to hunt for distressed Western assets they could

buy up on the cheap.10 In the downturn’s wake, the crisis made many West-

ern leaders tentative, questioning whether not only their own economies

but also their po liti cal systems actually contained deep, possibly unfi xable

fl aws. The economic crisis, said former U.S. Deputy Trea sury Secretary

Roger Altman, has left “the American model . . . under a cloud.”11 “This

relatively unscathed position gives China the opportunity to solidify its

strategic advantages as the United States and Eu rope struggle to recover,”

Altman writes.

These fl aws appeared especially notable when compared with what

seemed like the streamlined, rapid decision making of the Chinese leader-

ship, which did not have to deal with such “obstacles” as a legislature,

judiciary, or free media that actually could question or block its actions.

“One- party autocracy certainly has its drawbacks. But when it is led by a

reasonably enlightened group of people, as in China today, it can also have

great advantages,” writes the infl uential New York Times foreign affairs

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 119

columnist Thomas Friedman. “One party can just impose the po liti cally

diffi cult but critically important policies needed to move a society for-

ward.”12 Even John Williamson, the economist who originally coined the

term “Washington Consensus,” admitted, in an essay in 2012, that the Bei-

jing Consensus appeared to be gaining ground rapidly, at the expense of

the Washington Consensus.

As Western leaders, policy makers, and journalists questioned whether

their own systems had failed, Chinese leaders began to promote their au-

thoritarian capitalist model of development more explicitly. After all, in

the wake of the crisis many Western governments, including France and the

United States, bailed out their fi nancial sectors and many of their leading

companies. These bailouts made it harder for Western leaders to criticize

Beijing’s economic interventions, and led some Chinese offi cials to question

whether Western democracies now were copying the China model. In Bei-

jing, a raft of new books came out promoting the China model of devel-

opment and blasting the failures of Western liberal capitalism. “It is very

possible that the Beijing Consensus can replace the Washington Consensus,”

Cui Zhiyuan, a professor at Tsinghua University in Beijing, told the Interna-

tional Herald Tribune in early 2010.13 Suddenly, too, the same Chinese lead-

ers who in the early and mid- 2000s still had played the role of the meek

learner became, in speeches and public appearances and writings, very much

the triumphalist teacher. In an article in the China Daily one think- tank ex-

pert from China’s Commerce Ministry writes, “The US’ top fi nancial offi -

cials need to shift their people’s attention from the country’s struggling

economy to cover up their incompetence and blame China for everything

that is going wrong in their country.”14

In previous reverse waves, eras when global demo cratic gains stalled

and went backward, there was no alternate example of development re-

motely as successful as China today; the Soviet Union claimed to be an al-

ternate example, but it never produced anywhere near the sustained growth

rates and successful, globally competitive companies of China today. In the

early 1960s, another time of a reverse wave following the post- WWII demo-

cratization in Eu rope and parts of Asia, the only real challenger to liberal,

capitalist democracy was the communist bloc. At the time, many developing

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

120 The China Model

nations did attempt to follow the Soviet economic model, partly because it

offered an alternative to the West, which was attractive to former colonies,

partly because the Soviet model came with signifi cant Soviet aid, and partly

because many leaders of newly in de pen dent nations, such as Tanzania’s Ju-

lius Nyerere, had studied in socialist systems, or in universities in the West

that had favorable views of socialism and believed a Soviet- style system

could work.

But even among many true believers, who remained convinced that the

Soviet Union and Mao’s China offered viable alternatives of development,

the massive disaster of Mao’s Great Leap Forward in 1958– 61, which led to

a famine that killed tens of millions, and the stagnation of the Eastern bloc

economies, revealed by émigrés, showed that, given time, the communist

system probably would collapse. After the fi rst generation of postcolonial

leaders, many newly in de pen dent states that had once embraced socialist

models began to slowly dismantle them. By the 1980s, when many newly

in de pen dent states were struggling with serious economic crises, and neo-

liberal reforms promoted by the West began to take hold, communist- style

economics were nearly dead.

Today, China— and to a lesser extent other successful authoritarian

capitalists— offer a viable alternative to the leading democracies. In many

ways, their systems, which we will see in more detail, pose the most serious

challenge to demo cratic capitalism since the rise of communism and fas-

cism in the 1920s and early 1930s. And in the wake of the global economic

crisis, and the dissatisfaction with democracy in many developing nations,

leaders in Asia, Africa, and Latin America are studying the Chinese model

far more closely— a model that, eventually, will help undermine democracy

in these leaders’ countries.

In recent years, the “China model” has become shorthand for economic

liberalization without po liti cal liberalization. But China’s model of devel-

opment is actually more complex. It builds on earlier, state- centered Asian

models of development such as in South Korea and Taiwan, while taking

uniquely Chinese steps designed to ensure that the Communist Party re-

mains central to economic and po liti cal policy making.15 Like previous Asian

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 121

modernizers, China in its reform era has devoted signifi cant resources to

primary education, resulting in youth literacy rates of nearly 98 percent; in

many other developing nations, the youth literacy rate is less than 70 per-

cent.16 Like other high- growth Asian economies, and the most reformist of

the Persian Gulf modernizers, China also has created highly favorable envi-

ronments for foreign investment, particularly in the special economic zones

along the country’s coast; in many years over the past two de cades China

has been the world’s top recipient of foreign direct investment.17 Yet in the

China model, the Beijing government maintains a high degree of control

over the economy, but it is hardly returning to socialism. Instead, Beijing

has developed a hybrid form of capitalism in which it has opened its econ-

omy to some extent, but it also ensures that the government controls strategic

industries, picks corporate winners, determines investments by state funds,

and pushes the banking sector to support national champion fi rms. Indeed,

though in the 1980s and 1990s China privatized many state fi rms, the cen-

tral government today still controls roughly 120 companies. Among these

are the biggest and most powerful corporations in China: of the forty- two

biggest companies in China, only three are privately owned. In the thirty-

nine economic sectors considered most important by the government, state

fi rms control roughly 85 percent of all assets, according to a study by China

economist Carl Walter. In China the party appoints se nior directors of many

of the largest companies, who are expected to become party members, if

they are not already. Working through these networks, the Beijing leader-

ship sets state priorities, gives signals to companies, and determines corpo-

rate agendas, but does so without the direct hand of the state appearing in

public. And even when the state does not directly control the most impor-

tant companies, Beijing increasingly has used nontariff barriers to encourage

what it calls “indigenous innovation” in industries it considers strategic, like

energy, computing, and others— barriers that favor certain local fi rms for

procurement and research and development.

What’s more, in this type of authoritarian capitalism, government in-

tervention in business is utilized in a way not possible in a free market de-

mocracy: to strengthen the power of the ruling regime and China’s position

internationally. When Beijing wants to increase investments in strategically

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

122 The China Model

important nations, such as Thailand or South Africa, it can put pressure on

China’s major banks, all of which are linked to the state, to boost lending to

Chinese companies operating in those nations. For example, Chinese tele-

communications giant Huawei, which is attempting to compete with multi-

nationals like Siemens, received some $30 billion in credit from state- controlled

China Development Bank, on terms its foreign competitors would have sali-

vated over. By contrast, though the Obama administration wanted to dras-

tically upgrade the United States’ relationship with Indonesia, an important

strategic partner, it could not convince many American companies to invest

there, and, unlike the Chinese leadership, it could not force them to do so.18

In short, the China model sees commerce as a means to promote na-

tional interests, and not just to empower (and potentially to make wealthy)

individuals. And for over three de cades, China’s model of development has

delivered staggering successes. Since the beginning of China’s reform and

opening in the late 1970s, the country has gone from a poor, mostly agrar-

ian nation to, in 2010, the second- largest economy in the world.19 Some

coastal Chinese cities, like Shenzhen and Shanghai, now boast gross do-

mestic products per capita equivalent to those of cities in Southern Eu rope

or Southeast Asia.20 In the pro cess, this growth has lifted hundreds of mil-

lions of Chinese out of poverty.21 With the economies of leading industrial-

ized democracies still suffering, today China, and to a lesser extent India,

are providing virtually the only growth in the whole global economy.22

Since 2008, not only top Chinese leaders but also people across the coun-

try clearly have become more confi dent about Beijing’s place in the world.

Some of this confi dence is only natural, part of China reclaiming its posi-

tion as a major world power, a role it occupied for centuries until it fell be-

hind the West’s modernization in the nineteenth century. But some of the

confi dence comes from China’s more recent rise during the global economic

crisis, which put Beijing in an international leadership role far before its

leaders expected. And, some of the confi dence comes from Chinese leaders,

diplomats, and scholars traveling more widely, and realizing that their demo-

cratic neighbors— Indonesia, the Philippines, Thailand, and many others

that used to lecture China about human rights and freedoms— actually are

falling behind China’s breakneck growth. “Chinese leaders used to come

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 123

here and want to learn from us,” one se nior Thai offi cial said. “Now it’s like

they don’t have anything left to learn. . . . They have no interest in listening

to us.”23

China’s newfound confi dence has manifested itself in many forms.

When the Nobel committee awarded the 2010 Peace Prize to Chinese dis-

sident Liu Xiaobo, jailed in China for or ga niz ing an online petition calling

for the rule of law, Beijing condemned Norway and other Eu ro pe an na-

tions, and applied intense pressure on Eu ro pe an offi cials, and on many from

Asian nations as well, not to attend the award ceremony.24 Ultimately, several

of the nations China pressured the hardest, like the Philippines, declined to

send representatives to the Nobel ceremony.

A few months earlier, Beijing had applied similar pressure on Eu ro-

pe an nations, this time to join with it in an unpre ce dented public call to

replace the dollar as the global reserve currency. Previously, Beijing had

been relatively willing to abide by the dollar as the major global currency,

but China, owning a massive amount of U.S. Trea suries, had become more

and more worried about America’s unsustainable debt and reckless fi scal

policies. China followed up on its call by helping Chinese fi rms, and foreign

companies, to begin using the renminbi more readily in international trans-

actions, as well as in funds based in Hong Kong.25 When, in the fall of 2011,

Eu ro pe an nations looked for saviors to solve their growing economic crisis,

China stepped in. Chinese offi cials signaled their willingness to contribute

as much as €100 billion to the Eu ro pe an Financial Stability Fund, or possi-

bly to a new bailout mechanism set up by the International Monetary Fund.

In Greece, China launched plans to invest billions in infrastructure, in-

cluding its ports, while also repeatedly offering to buy up Greek debt.26 But

China did so only while at the same time demanding that Eu rope nations

drop any claims against China for unfair trade policies. Eventually, when

these conditions could not be met, China withdrew the idea of trying to

bolster Eu rope’s ailing banks.

Beijing has become more forceful in dealing with Washington, too, an

assertiveness that can add to its appeal with developing countries who’ve

often looked for another major power, and particularly a power hailing from

Asia, to balance their relations with the United States. When the Obama

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

124 The China Model

White House informed Chinese offi cials in the summer of 2009 that it, like

every other recent American administration, planned to host the Dalai Lama

for a private meeting, Beijing aggressively lobbied the White House not to

meet the Tibetan leader. The White House acquiesced, and for the fi rst time

since the administration of George H. W. Bush the Dalai Lama came to

America without meeting the president, a huge victory for China.27 A few

weeks later, Chinese offi cials used a global conference on climate change to

furiously admonish their American counterparts for their position on global

warming, one of the fi rst times the Chinese had taken such a public ap-

proach to the issue. “There has been a change in China’s attitude,” Kenneth

G. Lieberthal, a former se nior National Security Council offi cial focusing

on China, told the Washington Post. “The Chinese fi nd with startling speed

that people have come to view them as a major global player. And that has

fed a sense of confi dence.”28 Or as one current se nior American offi cial who

deals with China said, “They are powerful, and now they’re fi nally acting

like it.”29

In 2010 and 2011, China also surprised its neighbors by stepping up its

demands for large swaths of the South China Sea, other contested waters,

and regions along its disputed land borders.30 In the summer and fall of

2010, China reacted so furiously to Japan’s decision to impound a Chinese

fi shing boat in disputed waters that it cut off shipments to Tokyo of rare

earth materials critical to the manufacture of modern electronics like cel-

lular phones and fi ber optics.31 Beijing also warned its neighbor Vietnam

not to work with Western oil companies like ExxonMobil on joint explora-

tions of potential oil and gas in the South China Sea, detained Philippine

and Viet nam ese boats, and claimed nearly the entire sea— Beijing’s claims

extended nearly to the shores of the Philippines, hundreds of miles from

China’s territory.32 When Southeast Asian nations, attending a regional

summit in the summer of 2010, protested Beijing’s stance on the South

China Sea and asked Washington to mediate their disputes with Beijing,

Chinese foreign minister Yang Jiechi lost his composure. He suddenly got

up and exited the meeting, leaving the room in an uncomfortable silence.

One hour later, he stormed back in and launched into a thirty- minute mono-

logue, practically screaming at the other participants. At one point Yang

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 125

mocked his hosts, the Viet nam ese; at another he declared, “China is a big

country and other countries are small countries, and that’s just a fact.” In

other words, he was implying that China could outmuscle these smaller

nations.33

This increasingly assertive Chinese diplomacy has alienated some coun-

tries, particularly in Asia. Yet along with more forceful diplomacy, Beijing

has started to proactively promote its model of development, and in some

ways its newfound confi dence, expressed in its more forceful relations with

the United States and other powers, only adds to its global appeal, since

other, smaller countries want to join forces with a clearly rising power. But

even as China has become more confi dent, its leadership still recognizes

that it cannot challenge American military power, at least not anytime soon.

As China analyst Stephen Halper writes, “In reality, Chinese leaders want

neither the strain on fi nances nor the negative and potentially costly atmo-

spherics that would accompany a genuine arms race with the United States.”34

Despite boosting its defense bud get by over 10 percent annually, China re-

mains a long way from developing a global blue water navy, or expedition-

ary forces capable of fi ghting far from China’s borders.35 Most years, the

Pentagon’s bud get surpasses the defense bud gets of all other major mili-

tary powers combined, and because of this disparity in spending Beijing

increasingly has focused on “asymmetric warfare”— ways for weaker mili-

tary powers to damage stronger ones, such as cyber attacks and ballistic

missiles.36 “We need to think more on how to preserve national integrity.

We have no intention of challenging the US [militarily,]” admitted Major

General Luo Yan, a se nior member of the People’s Liberation Army.37

Recognizing that China remains de cades from challenging the Penta-

gon, Beijing’s leaders realize they can compete in other ways, such as by pro-

moting their development model, and as other countries learn and adopt

aspects of the China model, they will become more likely to align with

China, to share China’s values, and to connect with China’s leaders. Over

the past two years, prominent Chinese academics have released a raft of

new books on the China model and its applicability to other countries, and

several Chinese media outlets called the 2010 World Expo in Shanghai, for

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

126 The China Model

which China reportedly spent some $60 billion, a platform to advertise its

development successes to other countries.38 On another occasion, according

to China scholar Randall Peerenboom, China and the World Bank jointly

hosted a forum called the Shanghai Global Learning Pro cess, where some

1,200 participants from 117 nations attended sessions designed partly to

explain how they could learn from China’s development experience.39 The

economic crisis, Chinese economist Cheng Enfu told reporters, “displays

the advantages of the Chinese model. . . . Some mainstream [Chinese] econ-

omists are saying that India should learn from China; Latin American

countries are trying to learn from China. When foreign countries send del-

egations to China, they show interest in the Chinese way of developing.” 40

By the early 2000s, China already had developed training programs for

foreign offi cials, usually from developing nations in Africa, Southeast Asia,

and Central Asia. These offi cials came to China for courses in economic

management, policing, and judicial practice, among other areas. At the time,

Chinese offi cials would not necessarily suggest that China had an economic

model to impart. But by the late 2000s, many of these courses explicitly fo-

cused on elements of the China model, from the way Beijing uses its power

to allocate loans and grants to certain companies, to China’s strategies for

co- opting entrepreneurs into the Communist Party, to China’s use of spe-

cial economic zones to attract foreign investment over the past thirty years.41

Attendees at these sessions described how, unlike in the past, their Chinese

counterparts explicitly contrasted the Chinese system and its ability to

rapidly handle crises and successfully pursue long- term goals— though they

did not explicitly say that China is an authoritarian country, of course—

with the gridlock of Western governments. One Viet nam ese offi cial who

repeatedly has traveled to China for such programs noted how the style

of the programs has changed over time. Now, he said, Chinese offi cials, far

more confi dent than even ten years ago, would introduce the example of

one or another Chinese city that had successfully attracted sizable invest-

ments, talking through how the city government coordinates all permits

and other needs, and moves favored projects swiftly through any approval

pro cess. Some of the offi cials would compare this with investments in India

or even wealthy democracies, noting how hard it was to get approvals for

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 127

even the smallest investments in many parts of these countries. Other Cen-

tral Asian attendees at Chinese training sessions noted how they increas-

ingly learned about the Chinese judicial system, in which the party has

almost complete control, and then returned to their home countries,

where their governments used similar types of control mea sures over their

judiciaries.

Beijing also has built close political- party- to- political- party ties with

several other developing nations. Increasingly, it has utilized these ties to

promote its model of po liti cal and economic development. For at least two

de cades, Viet nam ese offi cials have traveled to China and then consequently

have based many of their development policies on China’s strategies.42 More

recently, Chinese offi cials have worked on development planning with lead-

ing politicians in neighboring Mongolia, which demo cratized after 1989 but

where the public has become increasingly disenchanted with corruption and

weak growth. Chinese offi cials also have cooperated with United Rus sia,

the main pro- Kremlin party, whose leaders want to study how China has

opened its economy without giving up po liti cal control. In 2009, United

Rus sia held a special meeting with top Chinese leaders to learn Beijing’s

strategy of development and po liti cal power.43 China also has held training

sessions for many leaders from the Cambodian People’s Party, the party of

Prime Minister Hun Sen.44 Combined with the massive Chinese aid and

investment fl owing into Cambodia, where Beijing is now the largest donor

and biggest investor, these introductions to the China model have had a

signifi cant impact on Cambodia’s shaky democracy.45 “You already don’t

have a lot of strong demo cratic values here,” said one longtime se nior Cam-

bodian offi cial. “You have [government] people seeing how well China has

done, going to China all the time, what they come back [to Cambodia] with

is how much faster and easier China has had it without having to deal with

an opposition.” 46

These efforts to promote a China model of undemo cratic development

build on a decade- long effort by Beijing to amass soft power in the develop-

ing world— soft power that would then add to the appeal of China’s ideas

and China itself. Among other efforts, this strategy has included expand-

ing the international reach of Chinese media, such as by launching new

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

128 The China Model

China- funded supplements in newspapers in many different countries, and

by vastly expanding the reach and professionalism of the Chinese newswire

Xinhua, which recently bought a fl ashy new American bureau in the heart

of Times Square in New York.47 Today, according to its own fi gures, Chi-

na’s state- backed international tele vi sion channel reaches over sixty- fi ve mil-

lion viewers outside the country.48 This strategy also includes broadening

the appeal of Chinese culture by opening Confucius Institutes— programs

on Chinese language and culture, at universities from Uzbekistan to Tanza-

nia.49 It has involved a rapid and substantial expansion of China’s foreign

aid programs, so that Beijing is now the largest donor to many neighboring

nations like Cambodia, Burma, and Laos. A study by the Wagner School of

New York University found that Chinese aid to Africa grew from $838 mil-

lion in 2003 to nearly $18 billion in 2007, the most recent year for which

data was available.50 Another analysis of China’s overseas lending, compiled

by the Financial Times in 2010, found that China lent more money to devel-

oping nations in 2009 and 2010 than the World Bank had, a stark display of

Beijing’s growing foreign assistance.51 And the soft power initiative has also

included outreach to foreign students, providing scholarships, work- study

programs, and other incentives to young men and women from developing

countries. The number of foreign students studying in China grew from

roughly 52,000 in 2000 to 240,000 in 2009.52

Over the past de cade, too, China has set up networks of formal and

informal summits with other developing nations. With meetings held

either in China or in the developing world, these summits are designed to

bring together offi cials and opinion leaders.53 At fi rst, the summits offered

China the opportunity to emphasize its role as a potential strategic partner

and source of investment and trade. But over the past fi ve years some sum-

mits, like those with Southeast Asian and African leaders, also subtly ad-

vertised China’s model of development, according to numerous participants.

Several Thai politicians who attended the Boao Forum for Asia, a kind of

China- centered version of the World Economic Forum in Davos, noted that,

in recent years, some of the discussions at the meeting had shifted from a

kind of general talk of globalization and its impact in Asia to more specifi c

conversations about some of the failings of Western economic models ex-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 129

posed by the global economic crisis, and whether China’s type of develop-

ment might be less prone to such risks. “Many of the African leaders coming

here [to Beijing] for the Chinese- African summit are attracted not only by

opportunities for aid and trade, but also by the China model of develop-

ment,” argues Zhang Weiwei, a prominent Chinese scholar and former

aide to Deng Xiaoping, after leaders from nearly every African nation

traveled to Beijing in 2006 for a summit. These African leaders realize, he

writes, that for them the Chinese model of development will work better

than a Western model dependent on a liberal demo cratic government.54

The soft power initiative also has involved a coordinated effort to up-

grade the quality of China’s diplomatic corps, replacing an older generation

of media- shy, stiff bureaucrats with a younger group of Chinese men and

women, many of whom are fl uent in En glish and comfortable bantering

with local journalists. On one occasion Chinese reporters working in Thai-

land watched as the then U.S. ambassador Ralph Boyce appeared on a prom-

inent Thai talk show. Boyce was known in the diplomatic community for

his knowledge of Thailand and command of Thai; on the show he spoke

fl uently and elegantly. Not to be outdone, alongside him the Chinese ambas-

sador to Thailand also appeared, speaking fl uent Thai and appearing right

at home in the freewheeling tele vi sion talk show format. In one cable re-

leased by Wikileaks, even American diplomats stationed in Thailand ad-

mitted that Thai offi cials had become increasingly admiring of China and

its model of development, and less interested in the American model.

Until the past two or three years, the China model appealed mostly to the

world’s most repressive autocrats, eager to learn how China has modernized

its authoritarianism: Mahmoud Ahmadinejad of Iran, Bashar al- Assad of

Syria, and Islam Karimov of Uzbekistan. In Iran, se nior regime offi cials re-

portedly have engaged in intense debate about how to import China’s strategy

of nondemo cratic development to the Islamic Republic.55 In Syria, a similar

kind of debate reportedly has taken place among se nior offi cials surround-

ing Assad, while in Ethiopia, where strongman Meles Zenawi has ruled for

nearly two de cades, the foreign minister and other top offi cials have pub-

licly encouraged the country to follow China’s model of development.56

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

130 The China Model

In the past, these repressive regimes attracted most of the media cover-

age of the China model. But in recent years it is not just autocrats who have

been learning from Beijing. China’s soft power offensive has given it in-

creasing leverage over democracies in the developing world, and has made

Beijing’s model of development more attractive to leaders even in freer na-

tions, places where there has already been some degree of demo cratic transi-

tion. Increasingly, leaders and even average citizens of young democracies

like Indonesia, Thailand, Senegal, Venezuela, Nicaragua, or Bolivia—

countries where pop u lar support for democracy has weakened— have taken

an interest in China’s model, and as China’s model becomes more infl uen-

tial, it can weaken democracy in these countries, since it brings with it

growing state control over both economics and politics.

Because China’s advocacy of its model of development is still relatively

new, it will take years to see the full effect of its challenge to Western liberal

orthodoxy. Still, one can see some initial effects in developing democracies.

In Venezuela and Nicaragua, Beijing has ingratiated itself with the leader-

ship, offering $20 billion in loans to Caracas in the spring of 2010, a time of

economic downturn in Venezuela; China’s loans have helped Hugo Chavez

perpetuate his government, even in the face of signifi cant opposition, and

even as he has used increasingly antidemo cratic methods to crack down.57

As China has gained a larger presence in nations like Venezuela, Chavez

increasingly has sent top diplomats and bureaucrats to Beijing to specifi -

cally examine China’s strategies of development, and how they might be

applied in Central or South America.58

Similar shifts have taken place in Southeast Asia, where China’s soft

power and its economic strength have broadened its appeal, even as its

military aggressiveness simultaneously has sometimes hurt it. In acknowl-

edging China as becoming the predominant infl uence in Cambodia, as well

as the loss of leverage of Western donors over the government of Hun Sen,

several Cambodian offi cials said that the Cambodian prime minister increas-

ingly has based his po liti cal and economic strategies on China, from his use

of his po liti cal party to control big business to his use of the court system to

dominate the opposition. In par tic u lar, according to a number of Cambodian

activists and human rights specialists, advisers from China’s Communist

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 131

Party have given suggestions to Hun Sen’s party about how to utilize laws

for libel and defamation to scare the in de pen dent media, how to create a

network of se nior offi cials who can move in and out of major companies,

and how to train special police forces, including Hun Sen’s personal body-

guard, who will always be loyal to him, even in the face of street protests.

What’s more, China has pushed Hun Sen’s government to crack down on

various protesters and refugees who might be an embarrassment to Beijing.

When a group of Uighurs, who live in the western Chinese province that is

home to about ten million Muslim and ethnic Turkic Uighurs, fl ed to Cam-

bodia in the winter of 2009, Chinese offi cials applied signifi cant behind-

the- scenes pressure on Hun Sen’s government to expel the Uighurs, even

though they were classifi ed as refugees. In December 2009, the Cambodian

government deported the Uighurs back to China, where many of them

vanished. Beijing praised Cambodia as “a model of friendly cooperation”;

shortly after the deportation, China signed new aid deals with Cambodia

worth roughly $1 billion, the biggest single disbursement of aid to the coun-

try ever.

China allegedly has made similar efforts to push Laos, Vietnam, and

Thailand to deport Uighurs, Falun Gong practitioners, and other po liti cal

migrants fl eeing China, as it has used its growing power in Nepal to push

the Nepalese government to return Tibetans fl eeing China, even though

Nepal has for years provided shelter to many Tibetans. And in Central

Asia, where China increasingly conducts training seminars for local police,

judges, and other justice offi cials, offi cials there say that Beijing has pushed

them to use their judicial systems to arrest and deport Uighurs as well. In

fact, even Kyrgyzstan, which once was the freest nation in Central Asia,

and a home for regional prodemocracy activists, including Uighurs, has

tightened the noose, searching for and deporting Uighurs back to China,

where they are often arrested, jailed, and tortured.

Across Southeast Asia, in fact, China’s model has gained considerable ac-

claim. “There are, of course, no offi cial statements from [Southeast Asian]

countries about their decisions to follow the Beijing Consensus or not,”

writes prominent Indonesian scholar Ignatius Wibowo. “The attraction

to the Chinese model is unconscious.” Still, it is possible to quantify this

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

132 The China Model

“unconscious” appeal. Having analyzed surveys of po liti cal values in

Southeast Asia going back a de cade, Wibowo concludes that people in many

Southeast Asian countries share a willingness to abandon some of their

demo cratic values for higher growth and the kind of increasingly state-

directed economic system that many of these countries in fact had in their

authoritarian days, and that China still has today. Southeast Asian nations

“have shifted their development strategy from one based on free markets and

democracy to one based on semi- free markets and an illiberal po liti cal sys-

tem,” Wibowo writes. “The ‘Beijing Consensus’ clearly has gained ground in

Southeast Asia.”59 Indeed, by examining the po liti cal trajectory of the ten

states that belong to the Association of Southeast Asian Nations, Wibowo

found that with only a few exceptions, each country’s po liti cal model, exam-

ined through a series of po liti cal indicators, has moved in the direction

of  China and away from liberal democracy over the past de cade, largely

because these nations had watched China’s successes and contrasted them

with the West’s failures. Many Southeast Asian leaders and top offi cials were

implementing strategies of development modeled on China’s, including tak-

ing back state control of strategic industries, recentralizing po liti cal deci-

sion making, using the judicial system increasingly as a tool of state power,

and reestablishing one- party rule— all changes that undermine demo cratic

development. Supporting his claims, the most recent Economist Intelligence

Unit survey of global democracy, which analyzes nearly every nation in the

world, found that the global fi nancial and economic crisis “has increased

the attractiveness of the Chinese model of authoritarian capitalism for some

emerging markets”— which has added to democracy’s setbacks.

In Thailand, for example, growing numbers of politicians, bureaucrats,

and even journalists favorably contrast China’s undemo cratic model of

government decision making with Thailand’s messy and sometimes violent

pseudodemocracy.60 In the past fi ve years, as Thailand’s urban- based mid-

dle class, and its favored po liti cal parties, have taken back dominance of

politics, they have increasingly adopted tools of control similar to China.

These have included creating an Internet monitoring and blocking system

like China’s and skewing the judiciary, through judicial appointments and

“instructions” to judges from the royal palace, so that judicial rulings weaken

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The China Model 133

potential opposition parties and ensure the dominance of the ruling party.61

Although not every element of Thailand’s po liti cal change was explicitly

modeled on China, of course, many Thai offi cials, in the period after the

coup of 2006, noted how the use of the judiciary, the control of the Internet,

and other po liti cal tools did have some inspiration from China. Thailand’s

judiciary became so infl uential, and so obviously skewed against any oppo-

sition movements, that some opposition politicians and writers began to

complain that the country was turning into a “judiocracy”— an autocracy

of judges.62

Even outside Southeast Asia, in other parts of Asia, China’s gravita-

tional pull and its soft power have had an infl uence on democracies. Over-

all, concludes po liti cal scientist Yun- han Chu, who studied Asian Barometer

surveys about East Asians’ commitment to democracy, “Authoritarianism

remains a fi erce competitor of democracy in East Asia,” in no small part

because of the infl uence of China’s ability to foster economic success with-

out real po liti cal change, providing an alternative model that is clearly visible

to other East Asians who travel to China, work with Chinese companies,

buy Chinese products, or host Chinese offi cials.63 As he notes, China will, in

the coming years, become the center of East Asian trade and economic inte-

gration, giving it even more power. “Newly demo cratized [Asian] countries

[will] increasingly become eco nom ical ly integrated with and dependent

on non- democratic countries,” Chu writes. Perhaps unsurprisingly, given

China’s growing power and infl uence in its region, in a poll of global public

opinion, in which people in twenty countries were asked which world lead-

ers they had the most confi dence in, Chinese President Hu Jintao topped

the list.64

To be sure, China’s model of development, just like demo cratic capital-

ism, suffers from numerous fl aws. These potentially include an inability to

hold corrupt or foolish leaders to account, a lack of checks on state power,

and a reliance on benign and wise autocrats for the China model to work,

which is hardly a given— for every Deng Xiaoping, the po liti cally savvy and

foresighted architect of China’s economic reforms, one could fi nd ten Mobutu

Sese Sekos or Kim Jong Ils, dictators who used their power solely for venal

purposes. And as we will see later, those fl aws, though obscured by China’s

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

134 The China Model

recent successes, may in the long run spark a global backlash against Bei-

jing, a backlash that would empower demo crats in many developing na-

tions. Rising in e qual ity within China, between the favored urban areas and

the less- well- off interior rural provinces, also threatens to unhinge China’s

economic miracle, through either growing waves of protests by rural dwell-

ers or massive pop u lar migrations that unleash instability. Already, China

has shifted from one of the most equal— if poor— nations in Asia in the

late 1970s to one of the most unequal societies today in East Asia. But for

now, China has seen relative success in its attempt to quietly impart its

model of development to other nations.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:40 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: The Autocrats Strike Back

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.11

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

O ffering an alternative model of successful but undemo cratic

development to other nations, China and other authoritarian states

may implicitly be fostering today’s powerful antidemo cratic wave.

But China, Rus sia, and, to a lesser extent, Venezuela and Iran have at times

gone further. Worried by how the fourth wave of demo cratization, includ-

ing the color revolutions in places like Ukraine and Kyrgyzstan, has crept

up to their borders, Beijing and Moscow have developed a range of explicit

strategies to undermine democracy among their neighbors.1 And in a num-

ber of neighboring states, including Ukraine, Kyrgyzstan, and Cambodia,

these authoritarian powers have enjoyed some striking successes in under-

mining young democracies.

Between the late 1980s and the early 2000s, neither Moscow nor Beijing

made it a priority to forestall democracy in their neighborhoods. Weakened

by economic crises and, in the case of China, international pariah status fol-

lowing the 1989 Tiananmen crackdown, both Rus sia and China spent much

of the 1990s trying to put their economies on solid footing again, reassure

investors, and foster po liti cal stability at home. Still, both countries clearly

chafed at the West’s willingness to wield power right up to their borders.

NATO expanded to include Poland and other former Warsaw Pact nations,

putting it on Rus sia’s doorstep, and also talked of including Ukraine. Mean-

while, the United States not only fostered rapprochement with old enemies

in Asia like Vietnam but also consistently declared its right to patrol the

South China Sea and other waters near China and to adjudicate disputes in

these seas.2 And though many Rus sian liberals wanted their country to join

the leading Western organizations like the International Monetary Fund and

The Autocrats Strike Back

8

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

136 The Autocrats Strike Back

the Global Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, Washington refused on nu-

merous occasions, further alienating Moscow and weakening liberals in the

Kremlin.3

Quite a few Rus sians, including many opinion leaders, saw the NATO

expansion as one of many Western strategies to weaken and take advantage

of post- Soviet Rus sia. “Even pro- Western liberals worried that exclusion of

Rus sia from the emerging all- European security system based on NATO

would lead to its [Rus sia’s] marginalization,” wrote Rus sian analyst Dmitri

Trenin.4 “We do not think NATO expansion is necessary, and believe the

policy is a relapse into the Cold War,” warned Rus sian Foreign Minister Ser-

gei Lavrov.5 By the 2000s, Rus sians already angry at NATO expansion often

would argue that the color revolutions in Central Asia and the Caucasus,

which often involved some assistance from American and Eu ro pe an democ-

racy promotion groups, were the latest Western plots to weaken Rus sia.

Both China and Rus sia, once Vladimir Putin assumed the presidency,

also clearly feared that democracy in East or Central Asia would foster

regional instability and, potentially, dangerous anti- Russia and anti- China

sentiment. This was not a wholly irrational fear. In some Southeast Asian

nations, like Malaysia or Indonesia, and in some Central Asian and Cauca-

sian states, like Georgia, majorities had long seethed at wealthier or more

po liti cally advantaged Chinese and Rus sian minorities living in their midst.

Given the freedom of a newly demo cratic system, these majorities could use

their numerical dominance to repress ethnic Chinese or Rus sians. During a

previous era of freer politics in Indonesia, in the mid- 1960s, mobs massacred

thousands of Indonesian Chinese (ultimately, some 500,000 people were

killed, though they were not all Indonesian Chinese; China gave safe haven

to some fl eeing Indonesian Chinese) after accusing them of communist

leanings. The Suharto dictatorship, which came to power after the 1965– 66

massacres, suppressed much of this interethnic tension. But after Suharto

fell in 1998, in the chaos of Indonesia’s early demo cratic reforms, mobs again

attacked Indonesian Chinese communities in Jakarta and other cities, burn-

ing Chinese homes and businesses and allegedly raping and murdering

ethnic Chinese women.6

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 137

Of course, in many demo cratizing nations freer politics did not result

in stigmatizing minorities. In Thailand, where, under military dictators in

the 1950s, 1960s, and 1970s, Chinese were targeted and the teaching of Chi-

nese language was banned, the demo cratic era ushered in a new celebra-

tion of Chinese heritage.7 Politicians who once would have hid their ethnic

Chinese backgrounds now openly celebrated: visiting China in 2005, Thai

Prime Minister Thaksin Shinawatra made a high- profi le visit to his fami-

ly’s ancestral home in southern China, which would have been unthinkable

for an earlier generation of Thai leaders.8

More often, Beijing and Moscow simply seemed more comfortable

dealing with autocratic leaders— similar to those of the Putin- era Rus sian

system or the top ranks of the Chinese Communist Party— who could oper-

ate like powerful executives. Until recently, most Chinese offi cials in Wash-

ington still had a diffi cult time understanding the American system of checks

and balances, or comprehending that the American president could not sim-

ply do what ever he liked. For example, until recently Beijing invested little

in training its offi cials to lobby the U.S. Congress or other legislatures in

demo cratic nations. By ignoring Congress, it allowed its rival Taiwan, a far

smaller player, to dominate the congressional infl uence game, and conse-

quently lost important battles on Capitol Hill, such as the attempt by Chi-

nese oil giant CNOOC to take over the American petroleum fi rm Unocal

in 2005.9 With weak lobbying efforts in Congress, Chinese offi cials were

unable to convince Capitol Hill that the CNOOC takeover would not pose

a national security risk to the United States, and Unocal wound up being

sold to the American fi rm ChevronTexaco.10

The two authoritarian powers also obviously worried that regional

demo cratization might spill over into China or Rus sia, ultimately creating a

national movement for reform like the protests that led up to the 1989

Tiananmen crackdown. Again, this was not an irrational fear. In 1989, waves

of change in Eastern Eu rope had moved from one country to the next,

with citizens in some states modeling their reform efforts on what they

had seen next door. And China and Rus sia already contained large popula-

tions of ethnic minorities who might be swayed by watching neighboring

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

138 The Autocrats Strike Back

states demo cratize and offer greater freedoms and autonomy to ethnic

groups. Were these outlying areas to revolt against Beijing or Moscow, as

Chechnya did in the mid- 1990s, they could threaten the very integrity of the

state. The demo cratization of other ethnic Turkic nations like Turkey had a

profound impact on many Uighurs in Xinjiang, the vast western Chinese

province home to about ten million Muslim and ethnic Turkic Uighurs.

Long repressed by China, the Uighurs, who briefl y had a de facto state of

their own in the early twentieth century, often traveled to Central Asia and

Turkey to trade or to attend schools. Outside China these Uighurs saw

how some of their ethnic peers had built states with far greater freedom of

expression and religion and cultural identity than in China, where Muslim

worship in restive Xinjiang remained tightly controlled, with the government

dominating selections of imams, approving who could travel on pilgrimage,

and dictating religious curricula.11 “When I left East Turkestan [the Uighurs’

name for Xinjiang] then I realized that you didn’t have to have the govern-

ment control religion, there was no danger to having a state where we could

worship on our own, and it could still be a democracy,” one Uighur activist

said.12 The demo cratization of Mongolia, after the collapse of the Soviet

Union, had a similar galvanizing effect on Inner Mongolia, a province of

China home to many ethnic Mongolians. And Beijing and Moscow also

feared that demands for greater democracy among ethnic minorities could

spread into ethnic Rus sian or Han Chinese regions. In the 1980s, an era of

widespread discontent in China, major antigovernment riots in Tibet in

1987 and 1988 were followed closely by Han Chinese activists and certainly

added to the national climate of protest that culminated in the Tiananmen

uprising.13

By the mid- 2000s, several changes in Chinese and Rus sian politics, and in

the international environment, coalesced, giving Moscow and Beijing the

rationale (in their offi cials’ minds) and the means to fi ght democracy in their

backyards. For one, both giants regained their stability. The fi rst peaceful

and orderly po liti cal transitions in the history of the People’s Republic of

China, from Deng Xiaoping to Jiang Zemin, and then from Jiang to Hu

Jintao, made the Communist Party leadership more confi dent and stable—

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 139

and also more able to focus on events outside China’s borders.14 A renewed

fl ow of investment into China after the stain of Tiananmen faded also

helped booster the party’s power and legitimacy.15 By the late 1990s and early

2000s, as the rest of Asia tumbled into fi nancial crisis, and the United States

and Western institutions like the International Monetary Fund reacted

slowly to the Asian crisis, China assumed a larger regional role, publicly

refusing to devalue its currency, which might have triggered a worse

crisis, and increasing its aid disbursements to some of the hardest- hit Asian

countries.16 Following the Asian fi nancial crisis, many other states in the re-

gion never forgot China’s symbolically important pledge to help other coun-

tries, even if, ultimately, that pledge was not critical to resolving the crisis.

In Rus sia, Putin’s consolidation of po liti cal power, though disastrous for

Rus sian democracy, did create a kind of stability and confi dence in the Krem-

lin, confi dence that also provided an impetus to reassert power throughout

the former Soviet Union. A spike in the price of oil meanwhile helped re-

store petroleum- rich Rus sia’s economic stability. By the latter half of the

2000s, Rus sia under Putin had used its oil wealth to amass nearly $500 bil-

lion in currency reserves, and increasingly utilized the state- controlled gas

giant Gazprom to menace neighboring nations that did not go along with

Moscow’s foreign policy objectives.17

But even as Chinese and Rus sian leaders became more confi dent in the

early and mid- 2000s, the color revolutions worried the two authoritarian

giants, leading them to take more proactive action to stifl e democracy

on their borders. Beginning with the Rose Revolution in Georgia in 2003

(some would add the protests in Serbia in 2000), the term “color revolu-

tions” came to mean peaceful, pop u lar movements for demo cratic change,

primarily in the former Soviet Union and old Eastern bloc, though the con-

cept eventually expanded to include Lebanon and Burma and, in 2010, the

Jasmine Revolution in Tunisia. The 2003 Georgia uprising, which toppled

president (and former Soviet foreign minister) Eduard Shevardnadze, led to

elections won by pro- Western leader Mikheil Saakashvili. Several Geor-

gian nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) that received funding from

American philanthropist George Soros, a prominent advocate of demo cratic

change in the former Eastern bloc, played a role in the Rose Revolution, as

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

140 The Autocrats Strike Back

Soros- funded NGOs helped train reformist politicians and or ga nized other

meetings for civil society activists. Though these NGOs’ role in the Rose

Revolution was overstated by many Rus sian commentators, their mere

presence, combined with the dramatic reversal in po liti cal fortunes in

Georgia, both infuriated and scared Moscow. The state- dominated Rus sian

press demonized Saakashvili, and Putin displayed an obvious contempt for

the Georgian leader (he later reportedly told French president Nicolas

Sarkozy that he had wanted to “hang Saakashvili by the balls”).18

The Rose Revolution was followed a year later by an Orange one in

Ukraine that pushed out President Leonid Kuchma, a leader who governed

autocratically and who had presided over a degeneration of freedoms in

Ukraine. As in Georgia, the Western- leaning opposition leader and favorite

of the protesters triumphed in the election following the revolution— in

Ukraine the winner was Viktor Yushchenko— leading many Rus sians to

suspect the revolt was an American undertaking.19 (Other than rhetorically

praising the Orange demonstrators and funding the National Endowment

for Democracy, which had some grantees in Ukraine, Congress and the

White House had played no role in Ukraine.) Yushchenko’s views of

Moscow certainly weren’t helped by an incident during his election cam-

paign in which someone apparently poisoned him with dioxin, nearly kill-

ing him and permanently disfi guring his face— his youthful, robust visage

became a landscape of pockmarks and cysts that resembled a Slavic Manuel

Noriega.20 Toxicologists told the BBC that the sophisticated dioxin poison

used on Yushchenko could have been produced in only a handful of labora-

tories in the world, nearly all of which are located in Rus sia or the United

States.21

By 2005, when a Tulip Revolution in Kyrgyzstan followed the Orange

one and drove out Kyrgyz autocrat Askar Akayev, who had maintained

close ties with the Kremlin, both Moscow and Beijing clearly were rattled.

“The Rus sian leadership viewed the outbreak of the color revolutions across

the former Soviet republics from 2003 to 2005 with deep apprehension,”

concluded Jeanne Wilson, a Rus sian specialist at Harvard. “In the Rus sian

view the Rose Revolution in Georgia, the Orange Revolution in Ukraine

and the Tulip Revolution in Kyrgyzstan indicated the efforts of Western

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 141

actors, foremost the United States, to initiate regime change in the post- Soviet

states, an ambitious undertaking that potentially extended to Rus sia itself.”22

And according to Hong Kong– based publications, after the Kyrgyz

revolution Chinese president Hu Jintao commissioned an internal party

report, titled “Fighting the People’s War Without Gunsmoke,” that outlined

how the color revolutions had toppled other regimes and proposed ways the

Chinese Communist Party could prevent such a possibility from occurring in

China.23 The Chinese leadership, too, saw the hand of the United States and

its intelligence agencies rather than local po liti cal factors as the main reason

for the color revolutions. “The ability of the color revolutions to succeed can-

not be separated from the behind the scenes manipulation by the United

States,” argued one commentator in the People’s Daily, the party’s best- known

mouthpiece.24 Refl ecting this viewpoint, the Chinese leadership reportedly

sent intelligence agents to Georgia, Ukraine, and Kyrgyzstan to analyze why

the revolts occurred, and to look for the hand of the United States.25 Beijing

later reportedly commissioned several state- linked think tanks to produce

analyses on the color revolutions. At a symposium on the color revolutions,

Chinese think- tank experts and intelligence offi cials presented recommen-

dations for how China could forestall its own similar pop u lar revolt.26

The revolts in the Middle East in late 2010 and early 2011 also clearly

rattled both Beijing and Moscow. Almost immediately after the initial dem-

onstrations in Tunisia and Egypt, the Chinese authorities intensifi ed their

Web fi ltering, so that Internet users in China who tried to search for the word

“Egypt” got few or no results.27 According to Chinese offi cials and press ac-

counts, the se nior leadership in Beijing also held emergency meetings to con-

sider how the Middle East protests might impact China. When an unknown

group in China posted an online call for a “Jasmine Revolution,” echoing the

Middle East protests, Beijing cracked down hard. It stepped up arrests of

human rights activists and imposed new restrictions on foreign journalists,

limits on their reporting that had not been used in China in years. Some for-

eign journalists who tried to evade the restrictions and venture out to cover

potential protests in Beijing were beaten by the Chinese security forces.28

Chinese reporters said that the climate had become the most repressive for

local journalists in at least two de cades, while even foreign scholars who

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

142 The Autocrats Strike Back

previously had never had trouble with the authorities found themselves

suddenly blocked when they attempted to do work in China.

The Chinese security forces employed such tough mea sures even

though, in most recent surveys, the majority of urban middle class Chinese,

who have prospered enormously since China’s reform period began in the

late 1970s, did not seem to want to change their government. In a 2009 poll

conducted by the Program on International Policy Attitudes, China was the

only country in which a majority of citizens supported their government’s

response to the global economic crisis— 63 percent of respondents said their

government’s efforts to address the economic crisis were “about right.”29 Of

all the countries surveyed in the poll. Another comprehensive analysis of

Chinese citizens by the U.S.- based East- West Center found that “as China’s

economic reform and growth have progressed, public interest in promoting

liberal democracy seems to have diminished,”30 since the public believes

reform might threaten economic and social gains.

China’s state- controlled press cast the Middle East protests in the most

negative light possible. It accused protesters in Arab- Muslim countries of

creating chaos that would detract from growth and potentially hurt living

standards, partly by sparking a wave of rural, poorer people— currently kept

out of richer cities by many formal and informal barriers— who would fl ood

into urban areas, competing for jobs with the urban middle classes. “The

vast majority of the people [in the Middle East] are strongly dissatisfi ed

[with the protests], so the per for mance by the minority becomes a self-

delusional ruckus,” the Beijing Daily said in one typical editorial.31

Compared with the 1990s, by the late 2000s Rus sia and China also had

the means to act on their desire to limit democracy’s spread along their bor-

ders. China’s soft power offensive had spread beyond Southeast Asia into

Central Asia and even the Caucasus, and, by training thousands of offi cials

annually from countries like Kyrgyzstan and Cambodia, Beijing now was

in a position to exert sizable infl uence over foreign governments’ decision

making. From virtually nothing, China also had become a major aid donor

in Central Asia. Many Central Asian states, like Kyrgyzstan, also had be-

come dependent on Chinese investment to develop their infrastructure, or

simply to keep their economy afl oat.32 Chinese construction fi rms laid the

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 143

new roads in Kyrgyzstan and built the new pipelines. A new Chinese Peace

Corps– like program to boost people- to- people contacts with neighboring

nations, called the China Association of Youth Volunteers, added to China’s

soft power reach.33

Rus sia, too, had assumed a far greater infl uence over Central Asia and

other former Soviet states than it enjoyed in the immediate aftermath of the

collapse of the Soviet Union. Through Gazprom, the Kremlin controlled gas

deliveries for its neighbors, and in many Caucasian and Central Asian states,

where se nior leaders had begun their po liti cal careers in the Soviet Union,

Moscow’s rhetorical and cultural infl uence still mattered as well. The con-

tinuing high price of oil, which fattened the Kremlin’s trea sury, also made

Moscow’s antidemo cratic regional initiatives a rounding error in the national

bud get. In fact, as Charlie Szrom and Thomas Brugato of the American En-

terprise Institute found, from 2000 to 2007 there was an empirical correlation

between the price of oil and the Kremlin’s foreign policy aggressiveness,

with Moscow becoming more forceful when the price of oil rose.34

Worried by the color revolutions, Moscow and Beijing fi rst shored up their

own control. While in the 1980s and early 1990s Beijing had allowed vibrant

debate at the highest levels of government about transition to more open

and demo cratic politics, after Hu Jintao became president in 2003, this de-

bate largely died, and the Communist Party consolidated its control of lead-

ing companies, top offi cials and policy makers, journalists, and other opinion

leaders. The se nior leadership under Hu, in fact, contained few leaders any-

where near as liberal as Zhao Ziyang, the premier who served under Deng

Xiaoping in the 1980s and who was purged after the 1989 Tiananmen crack-

down.35 China cracked down on foreign NGOs to make sure they couldn’t

serve as instigators of unrest. Chinese security forces raided the offi ces of

several local NGOs backed by American democracy promotion organiza-

tions, and after 2005 Beijing imposed much tougher restrictions on local

NGOs, resulting in the closure of thousands of them.36 According to a re-

port by the Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences, the government started

spending a sum of 514 billion yuan (over $60 billion) annually on what it

calls “stability maintenance,” the largest allocation of the national bud get

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

144 The Autocrats Strike Back

after military expenditures.37 And, following the July 2009 protests by ethnic

Uighurs in Urumqi, the largest city in Xinjiang, Beijing turned the vast west-

ern province, larger than Western Eu rope, into a communications black hole,

shutting off Internet and international mobile phone access to the province

for nearly ten months.38 Beijing imposed similar restrictions after a new wave

of protests by ethnic Mongolians in Inner Mongolia province in early 2011.

While China essentially has no elections, after the color revolutions the

Kremlin made it even harder for Rus sia’s tiny and besieged po liti cal opposi-

tion to win any votes, building up the vicious pro- Kremlin and pro- Putin

Nashi youth movement and calling on members to prevent a color revolu-

tion in Rus sia led by Western- backed instigators— the Rus sian opposition

parties.39 These youth activists targeted the few remaining opposition lead-

ers, who were harassed and frequently attacked. Meanwhile, after leveling

much of the Chechen capital, Grozny, during several wars, the Kremlin un-

der Putin essentially installed a Moscow loyalist, Ramzan Kadyrov, as pres-

ident of the Chechen republic. In Chechnya, Kadyrov did create a semblance

of stability and growth, but did so largely by brutally repressing any anti-

Kremlin or pro- autonomy sentiment.40

But these actions were hardly surprising or, really, new— as authoritar-

ian regimes, Moscow and Beijing long had come up with ever- more- inventive

ways to maintain their hold on power at home. But after 2005, what was

different was that the two authoritarian powers tried to extend their anti-

democracy battle abroad. First, they tried to delegitimize the color revo-

lutions, by arguing that the color revolutions were not genuine pop u lar

movements but actually Western attempts at regime change that violated

the sovereignty of in de pen dent countries. This argument, though not really

supported by facts on the ground in Georgia, Ukraine, or Kyrgyzstan, did

resonate with many people around the world, since the Bush administra-

tion had of course touted democracy promotion as a reason for the invasion

of Iraq. In the wake of the Iraq war, the defense of national sovereignty,

long a foundation of Beijing’s foreign policy, since it did not want foreign

nations involving themselves with Tibet or Taiwan, made the Chinese

leadership an anti- Bush champion to many other nations. In so linking Iraq

and democracy promotion, the White House had tarred the name of

American democracy promotion, but it also had given Rus sia and China

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 145

ammunition for their defense of sovereignty and provided the opportunity

for the two countries to question the color revolutions.

In May 2005, Rus sian Foreign Minister Igor Ivanov previewed this

strategy of linking support for autocrats to a defense of sovereignty, arguing

in an interview that the color revolutions were “unconstitutional” overthrows

of legitimate leaders, and actually would result in greater po liti cal oppression

and instability in the international system.41 Another se nior Kremlin offi cial,

Vladislav Surkov, later would tell the German magazine Der Spiegel that the

color revolutions were simply coups by another name.42 The Rus sian Duma

soon picked up this claim, holding sessions to discuss the illegitimacy of the

Orange Revolution and then using its representatives at the Council of

Eu rope to raise the issue.43 The state- dominated Rus sian press, too, piled on,

calling the Orange protest the “orange virus” or “orange plague,” according

to Russia- watcher Thomas Ambrosio.44 The Rus sian leaders, of course, did

not differentiate between a revolution to topple an authoritarian leader who

had not been elected legitimately, and one to overthrow a fairly elected leader,

as would happen in Thailand, for instance, in 2006. To the Kremlin, a gov-

ernment in power was automatically legitimate, and so any overthrow was

necessarily wrong. Still, Ivanov’s claims carried weight internationally. “The

great issue that divides the U.N. is no longer Communism versus capitalism,

as it once was; it is sovereignty,” wrote James Traub, one of the most astute

observers of the United Nations. By standing up for “sovereignty,” even in

farcical cases like autocrats trying to prevent color revolutions, Rus sia and

China gained supporters at the UN, including many developing countries—

and not only authoritarian ones— with histories of intervention by foreign

powers.45 To be sure, the UN in the late 2000s did adopt the principle of

Responsibility to Protect, or R2P, in which the international community

could intervene in a country, violating its sovereignty, in the case of war

crimes, genocide, and crimes against humanity.46 But many developing

nations only halfheartedly backed the concept of Responsibility to Protect,

and both they and the authoritarian powers watered down the concept be-

tween its introduction and fi nal adoption.

Indonesia offers an example of a nation that, despite its demo cratization,

supported many of China and Rus sia’s ideas on sovereignty. Indonesia had

been a Cold War battleground, with tensions between rightists, Muslim

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

146 The Autocrats Strike Back

organizations, and communists resulting in a bloodletting in 1965 and 1966

that resulted in between a half- million and one million deaths, according to

reliable estimates.47 Even today, a demo cratic government in Jakarta still over-

sees massive human rights abuses in outlying provinces like Papua, where

the security forces are accused of torture, disappearances, and killings.48

So, Indonesian leaders even today see much to support in China and Rus sia’s

concept of sovereignty. During a state visit to China in 2005 by Indonesian

President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono, he and China’s leaders together

affi rmed their aversion to “meddling” by foreign actors in their internal

affairs— whether that meant human rights organizations criticizing abuses

by the Indonesian security forces, or foreign governments calling for some

real reforms in Tibet or Xinjiang.49

Together, Rus sia and China also used the Shanghai Cooperation Or ga-

ni za tion (SCO), a regional group linking the two powers with several Central

Asian nations, to make the argument that color revolutions, and demo cratic

change in general, were violations of national sovereignty. At an SCO sum-

mit in 2005, the or ga ni za tion announced that “the right of every people to

its own path of development must be fully guaranteed,” a coded critique of

the color revolutions.50 It would then condemn the color revolutions as akin to

“terrorism,” attempting to link the autocrats’ fi ght against the color demon-

strators to the United States’ global war on terror. By issuing these statements

in an internationally recognized or ga ni za tion, the authoritarian powers

obtained greater global credibility for this position as defenders of absolute

sovereignty. The SCO, wrote Ambrosio, was attempting to be not another

intergovernmental talk shop but “the embodiment of a new set of values and

norms governing the future development of Central Asia. . . . Those seeking

to promote democracy [in Eurasia] will meet another, less expected layer of

re sis tance. Not only will the autocratic regimes themselves oppose demo-

cratization, but the opposition [to democracy] will fi nd resonance at the

intergovernmental level as well.”51

The or ga ni za tion also clearly portrayed electoral democracy as a kind

of Western— foreign—idea, one that was not necessarily suited for Cen-

tral Asia. Thus, when color revolutions broke out in Central Asia, SCO

offi cials could claim that the protests were somehow unsuited to Central

Asia’s traditions.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 147

In other cases, China has worked to shore up autocrats facing pop u lar

pressure, or has even helped authoritarian rulers track down and arrest

their own dissidents and critics. In one notable example, after large- scale

demonstrations in Uzbekistan in 2005, the authoritarian Uzbek regime

cracked down on protesters, killing at least several hundred in the city of

Andijon when government forces fi red indiscriminately into crowds. In

response, Uzbek activists called for foreign governments to pressure their

government to own up to the massacre and to reform. Many governments

complied, including not only the United States but also other Asian nations.

China took the opposite approach: Not long after the massacre, Beijing

praised the crackdown as necessary and then welcomed Uzbek leader

Islam Karimov in Beijing with a state visit and a gun salute, showing that

China would stand fi rmly behind him. More dangerously, China then

worked with other nations in the region to deny asylum to any refugees

fl eeing Uzbekistan.

Meanwhile, Rus sia and other Central Asian autocracies like Kazakh-

stan used their positions in the Or ga ni za tion for Security and Cooperation

in Eu rope (OSCE) to change the focus of that group from human rights

and demo cratization to other issues like counterterrorism and security co-

operation, according to numerous participants in OSCE forums.52 Such a

shift would be critical, since in the past the OSCE had been one of the lead-

ing organizations monitoring elections— and potentially criticizing whether

they were free and fair. At several OSCE meetings, Rus sia threatened that

it would cut its funding for the or ga ni za tion if election monitoring re-

mained a primary focus of the group.53 Similarly, the Kremlin allegedly used

its delegation to the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Eu rope, an

or ga ni za tion of parliamentarians, to tamp down criticism of pro- Russian

Ukrainian leaders and to critique pro– Orange Revolution Ukrainian politi-

cians.54 And Rus sia, along with several other former Soviet states, created

their own election monitoring system to observe polls in the old Soviet

Union. But unlike most internationally accepted election monitoring sys-

tems, the one created by Rus sia relied on a small circle of trusted Kremlin

allies, rather than on groups of monitors selected at random from a range of

NGOs like the Carter Center. As Ambrosio found, in nearly every election

in the former Soviet Union, these Kremlin- allied monitors approved votes

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

148 The Autocrats Strike Back

as free and fair, often in sharp contrast to the reporting of those same polls

by Western Eu ro pe an monitoring organizations.55 When Eu ro pe an moni-

toring groups criticized these polls, the Kremlin, and other autocrats in the

former Soviet Union, could hold up their own monitors as evidence of free

polling and then accuse the Eu ro pe ans of applying inaccurate standards.

“The differing conclusions allowed Rus sia to discredit the external observ-

ers’ fi ndings by fostering a seemingly unwinnable ‘he said- she said’ debate,”

Ambrosio found.56

The two authoritarian powers also took more specifi c actions to under-

mine regional democracy. If Beijing and the Kremlin could undermine

demo crats, and show that their governments were less effective, more cor-

rupt, and worse for development than the authoritarian regimes that previ-

ously had run countries like Ukraine, they might be able to convince the

public in those countries to accept a return to autocratic rule— a return that

would forestall any regional demo cratic wave that might touch the two

powers.

In Ukraine, the Kremlin’s party, United Rus sia, signed an agreement

to cooperate with the party of pro- Russian Ukrainian leader Viktor Yanu-

kovych, who was hardly sympathetic to the Orange revolt.57 This deal in-

cluded plans by the Kremlin to help Yanukovych’s party in the next election.

Moscow later provided Kremlin- backed po liti cal con sul tants to advise

Yanukovych’s presidential campaign, and proved willing to sanction Ukrai-

nian elections marred by serious vote rigging, elections in which pro- Russia

candidates triumphed.58 In the winter of 2005– 06, the Kremlin went fur-

ther. Facing a government run by the Orange favorite Yushchenko, Moscow

cut off Ukraine’s discounts on natural gas. Western Eu ro pe an nations forced

the Kremlin to back off its gas threat, but the new price it negotiated with

Ukraine still was twice the old one. Later, the Kremlin would further

threaten the Orange government by questioning Ukraine’s borders and

highlighting the rights of Rus sian speakers in the Ukraine, widely believed

to be a means of further inserting the Kremlin into Ukrainian politics. The

Kremlin’s assistance, combined with the poor governing per for mance of

the post– Orange Revolution government in Kiev, did allow Yanukovych

to regain his power, and in 2010 he won the presidency. As Yanukovych

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 149

consolidated his power, arresting many of the top offi cials from the Orange

government including the former prime minister, Yulia Tymoshenko, in-

vestigating domestic and foreign NGOs working in Ukraine, and appar-

ently pressuring the media to portray him only positively, Moscow backed

him staunchly. While Moscow had tried to hike gas prices for Ukraine un-

der his pre de ces sor, with Yanukovych the Kremlin negotiated a new deal to

sell gas to Ukraine at subsidized low rates again, a deal that could help boost

Ukraine’s economy, and thus suggest that a more authoritarian leader could

deliver stronger growth than the fractious demo crats who came into offi ce

following the Orange Revolution.59

Similarly, in Georgia, Kyrgyzstan, and other former Soviet nations like

Moldova, the Kremlin intervened directly in attempts to reverse color revo-

lutions or to prevent new ones from occurring. In so doing, Rus sia actually

violated these nations’ sovereignty far more than any actions by American

democracy promotion organizations or funders like Soros. The Kremlin’s

youth group, Nashi, known for its aggressive tactics against democracy ac-

tivists, launched branches in other Central Asian nations, and another pro-

Kremlin youth or ga ni za tion signed an agreement to help youth groups in

Kiev.60 In Moldova, the poorest country in Eu rope but an increasingly open

democracy, the Kremlin has used its Ukrainian allies to pressure the Moldo-

van government, intermittently barred Moldovan exports from entering Rus-

sia, and taken other steps to promote parties skeptical about demo cratization.

In Kyrgyzstan, Rus sian advisers helped a series of leaders emulate the Krem-

lin’s model of po liti cal control. In part because of this Rus sian infl uence, the

respected International Crisis Group found, “Parliamentary democracy in

Kyrgyzstan has been hobbled. . . . A good example of how the Vladimir

Putin model of governance is being copied in Central Asia.” By 2010, the

top politicians in four Kyrgyz parties were traveling regularly to Moscow,

where they could compete for the Kremlin’s fi nancial support and rhetori-

cal backing.61

In Georgia, which under Saakashvili became a favorite of the Bush

administration, the Kremlin denounced the color revolution as a violation

of sovereignty and a rollback of democracy.62 Then, weeks after Moscow

cut off Ukraine’s subsidized gas in the winter of 2005– 06, an explosion

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

150 The Autocrats Strike Back

disrupted natural gas pipelines from Rus sia to Georgia, plunging Georgia

into a state of fear during an exceptionally cold winter.63 Still, having failed

to force a change in the government of Georgia, including the imposition

of economic sanctions in 2006, Putin ratcheted up tensions, abetted by

Saakashvili, who himself seemed to delight in angering the Kremlin. In Au-

gust 2008, Rus sian forces took advantage of skirmishes between Georgian

troops and separatist insurgents to attack Georgia, advancing to within a

few miles of the Georgian capital. The Rus sian assault, which included the

blocking of Georgia’s harbor and the deployment of tanks out of propor-

tion to the initial skirmishing, had far more to do with teaching Georgia a

lesson— and possibly showing other demo cratizing neighbors how Moscow

would treat them— than with the ostensible dispute over Georgian- Russian

border regions. Although Rus sia portrayed its actions as a move to protect

ethnic Rus sians in the South Ossetia region of Georgia, years earlier Rus sian

intelligence ser vices and military forces had clearly tried to foster separatist

sentiment among ethnic Rus sians in South Ossetia, distributing Rus sian

passports to South Ossetians and taking many other steps to prod the re-

gion to break away, according to several reports by Eu ro pe an human rights

groups.

Perhaps even more dangerous than the direct intervention in neighbor-

ing nations, both China and Rus sia began to redefi ne the very meaning of

democracy so that, in true Orwellian fashion, the word started to lose its

meaning, which was exactly what the authoritarian powers wanted. “Rarely

has democracy been so acclaimed yet so breached,” noted Human Rights

Watch in its 2008 survey of global freedoms. “Today, democracy has be-

come the sine qua non of legitimacy . . . yet the credentials of the claimants

have not kept pace with democracy’s growing popularity. . . . Determined

not to let mere facts stand in the way [autocratic] rulers have mastered the

art of demo cratic rhetoric that bears little relationship to the principle of

governing.”64

Under Putin, the Kremlin, working with many Rus sian academics,

developed the idea of “sovereign democracy,” a concept that would provide

the Kremlin with the ideological underpinnings for Putin’s autocracy. As

one of Putin’s closest advisers defi ned it, sovereign democracy meant a

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

The Autocrats Strike Back 151

“democracy” run by a highly centralized state and in which civil society is

used by the state to monitor government offi cials, yet society is not in de pen-

dent of the government.65 Sovereign democracy also meant, according to

Kremlin strategists, that each nation was free to choose its own form of

“democracy,” even if that meant holding essentially fake elections designed to

buttress an autocrat— a leader’s “sovereignty” inoculated him against for-

eign criticism of the fairness of his or her “democracy.” To maintain the

facade of democracy, in 2006 the Kremlin even created a fake opposition

party, called A Just Rus sia, designed to simulate the appearance of competi-

tion with the Kremlin- backed United Rus sia, which dominates Rus sian

politics.66

The Kremlin even created its own international NGOs that were sup-

posedly focused on democracy promotion and seemed, from the outside, to

be mirror images of Western groups like America’s National Endowment

for Democracy. But these Rus sian “NGOs” actually offered expertise and

funding to foreign leaders to help them forestall new color revolutions.67 In

Kyrgyzstan, Rus sia allegedly helped launch several NGOs, such as the Co-

ali tion of People’s Demo crats, which mostly spent its time condemning the

United States as well as opposition Kyrgyz politicians.68 In Ukraine, an

or ga ni za tion called the Rus sian Press Club and run by an adviser to Putin

posed as an NGO and helped facilitate Rus sia’s involvement in Ukrainian

elections.69 Moscow also copied a trick used for years by China, which has

fought back against American criticism of its rights record by issuing its own

annual survey of human rights in the United States, which often refers to

historical abuses like slavery.70 In 2008, Rus sia launched an “NGO” called

the Institute for Democracy and Cooperation; its job was to monitor the

human rights climate in Western nations like the United States and France.

It produced a steady stream of articles and press briefi ngs promoting Rus sia’s

style of “democracy” and taking apart America’s democracy promotion

efforts.

The Chinese leadership also wants to alter the meaning of democracy. In

his report to the 17th Party Congress, held in October 2007, President Hu

Jintao used the words “democracy” or “demo cratic” roughly sixty times, ac-

cording to one analysis.71 In its annual report on human rights, too, “Progress

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

152 The Autocrats Strike Back

in China’s Human Rights,” Beijing featured a defi nition of human rights that

emphasized economic rights and material gains for average people in China,

twisting the traditional defi nition of human rights, which historically has fo-

cused more on social and po liti cal freedoms.72 This altering of the defi nition

of rights to focus primarily on economic gains was echoed by many elected

autocrats, men and women like Cambodia’s Hun Sen or Venezuela’s Hugo

Chavez. As the international monitoring or ga ni za tion Freedom House noted,

Chavez has consistently touted Venezuela’s (praiseworthy) economic gains on

his watch, such as reductions in poverty, as indicators of the progress on rights

the country has made— and as a means of avoiding discussion on po liti cal

rights, which have gone backward during his time in offi ce.73 At the United

Nations Human Rights Council, China has similarly made arguments that

twist the traditional defi nition of human rights, while trying to change the

way the Council operates so that only governments, and not human rights

groups or other civil society organizations, could make reports on human

rights to the Council.74

Many elected autocrats, like Cambodia’s Hun Sen or Malaysia’s Najib

Tun Razak, have explicitly modeled their defenses of human rights on

China’s, claiming that, like China, they have brought signifi cant economic

progress and economic liberalism to their citizens, and that these gains

overshadow any concerns about po liti cal repression.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:47:51 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: Failure of the Emerging Powers

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.12

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

R epresenting the world’s largest democracy, which has sewn

together a nation of a billion people, as well as countless ethnic

groups, castes, and languages, Indian offi cials long have boasted of

their nation’s deep and founding commitment to democracy. And as China

and India increasingly have become global competitors— and China’s gleam-

ing infrastructure, rapid decision making, and high growth rates have

outshone India’s— Delhi has emphasized its rhetorical commitment to

democracy only more.

But to Myo, a Burmese activist, demo cratic India doesn’t look much dif-

ferent from authoritarian China.1 Worse, maybe. “At least with China, you

expect that they are going to support dictators, so it’s not that surprising,”

Myo said. “But with India, it’s not what I expected, so it was a slap to [Bur-

mese activists.]”

After working as a democracy activist in Burma, underground, for many

years, Myo fl ed the country in the mid- 2000s to work in exile. Before he left,

he sat in a dingy noodle shop in Rangoon, where customers slurped steam-

ing bowls of Burmese mohingar noodles seasoned with bits of lime and cab-

bage and slices of egg. Myo picked a table wedged deep into one dark corner

of the restaurant, where it would be hard for anyone to overhear conversa-

tion. He said he had been working for a publishing company in Rangoon,

but he covertly had to smuggle po liti cal messages into the writings he pub-

lished in magazines that focused on safe topics like soccer or Burmese rap.2

“It’s kind of a game everyone here plays, but after a while it gets so tiring,” he

said, as he stirred bits of oil into his soup broth. “I’d like to once not have to

try to fi gure out how to fool the censors over a simple article.”

Failure of the Emerging Powers

9

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

154 Failure of the Emerging Powers

At fi rst, after leaving Burma Myo traveled to India, where he’d hoped

that the world’s largest democracy would prove hospitable to activists push-

ing for human rights and democracy in a repressive state on India’s borders.

“I’d heard that, before, India had been very welcoming to Burmese activ-

ists, particularly after 1988 [a period of antigovernment rioting in Burma],

so I expected it would still be,” he said. But Myo was wrong. In the 1990s,

some Indian offi cials had tried to assist Burmese democracy activists, and

India’s then- defense minister George Fernandes, a prominent human rights

advocate, even allowed some Burmese exiles to take shelter in his personal

family compound.3 But by the 2000s, Delhi had reversed its Burma policy

180 degrees. Rather than criticizing the Burmese junta, it now engaged the

generals under a new policy it called “Look East,” hosting Se nior General

Than Shwe on a state visit, during which, with no obvious irony, he visited

the monument of the revered Mahatma Gandhi.4 India ignored interna-

tional resolutions condemning the Burmese regime’s massive human rights

abuses, and it launched a policy to boost Indian investment in Burma, par-

ticularly in the valuable petroleum industry. Delhi began providing arms to

Burma, and in the fall of 2007, while tens of thousands of Burmese monks

were protesting against the government in the streets of Rangoon, Burma’s

biggest city, India’s petroleum minister traveled to Naypyidaw, the new capi-

tal of Burma that had been built by the military, to sign new agreements on

oil and gas.5 He made no mention of the massive protests going on in Ran-

goon, which ultimately would be put down with brutal force.

After Than Shwe’s visit to Gandhi’s monument, a Burma specialist for

Amnesty International commented that “it was entirely unpalatable . . . that

India could allow one of the world’s most fl agrant violators of human rights

to stain the legacy of a man who led masses to peacefully overthrow a re-

pressive colonial overlord . . . or to symbolically forsake its support for [Bur-

mese opposition leader] Aung San Suu Kyi, herself a sort of Burmese version

of Gandhi.”6 Amnesty could have launched a similar salvo at nearly every

major emerging democracy around the world. It could have blasted South

Africa, which Nelson Mandela vowed would make the promotion of de-

mocracy and human rights a pillar of its foreign policy, but which has for

years tolerated Robert Mugabe’s brutal regime next door in Zimbabwe.7 It

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 155

could have lambasted Brazil, which even as it has grown more powerful has

cozied up to Ira ni an dictator Mahmoud Ahmadinejad as well as to local

elected autocrats like Venezuela’s Hugo Chavez.8

By the late 2000s and early 2010s, many Western offi cials still hoped that

the big emerging democracies, the Brazils, Indonesias, and South Africas,

would eventually become regional and global champions of human rights

and demo cratization. To some Western observers, this made natural sense,

since these countries themselves had fought hard for their own democra-

cies, and surely saw the importance of strengthening demo cratic systems in

the countries around them. And yet, as India showed with Burma, such

hopes often proved naive. Unlike, say, the Netherlands or Canada, countries

like India and Indonesia suffered de cades of foreign interventions during the

Cold War that left their leaders skeptical of any policies that might violate

other countries’ sovereignty. And more often than not, these major emerg-

ing democracies shared as many strategic interests with their undemo cratic

neighbors, whom they actually had to live next to, as with the faraway West.

The end of the Cold War may have sped up the emergence of new democra-

cies in the world, but it was not until the late 1990s and early 2000s that the

United States, and other Western nations, began aggressively trying to enlist

emerging powers like India in global democracy promotion. Working with

the leaders of several new democracies, including India, the Clinton admin-

istration helped establish the Community of Democracies, a global meeting

of nations that fi rst convened in Poland in 2000.9 The group was supposed to

help promote an expansion and deepening of demo cratic norms throughout

the world, and it eventually expanded, in 2004, to create a democracies’ cau-

cus at the United Nations.10 Still, despite a request from Washington, India

declined to serve as the leader of the UN democracy caucus.11

The community of democracies established some shared demo cratic

norms and, at the UN, created a fund to help support civil society groups

that monitor elections and take other steps to promote freedom.12 At roughly

the same time, America’s National Endowment for Democracy, working

with civil society groups in many other nations, launched the World Move-

ment for Democracy, which brought together democracy activists from

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

156 Failure of the Emerging Powers

around the globe to support prodemocracy organizations within autocratic

nations, as well as groups operating in existing democracies. And some

regional democracy organizations sprung up as well, from the Inter-

Parliamentary Caucus of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations to the

Offi ce for the Promotion of Democracy of the Or ga ni za tion of American

States. At one gathering of the World Movement for Democracy, held in Ja-

karta in the spring of 2010, Indonesian President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono

struck all the right rhetorical notes. “I am convinced,” Yudhoyono declared,

“that ultimately the 21st century instinct is the demo cratic instinct. . . . No

po liti cal system can ignore this.”13 Indonesia also hosted the annual Bali

Democracy Forum, at which representatives of many different emerging

democracies come together to share their experiences and learn from each

other’s stories.14

In 2008, Arizona Senator John McCain would propose a League of De-

mocracies that would strengthen cooperation among demo cratic nations.15

This concept previously had been outlined in several essays by foreign policy

specialists James Lindsay and Ivo Daalder, who argued that a “Concert of

Democracies” could work together on a range of security and economic chal-

lenges that require multilateral cooperation, as well as on promoting democ-

racy and human rights.16 Such a concert, they noted, need not be a formal

structure, with a permanent infrastructure, but could be more of an infor-

mal grouping of democracies.

Enlisting emerging powers like Brazil, India, or Indonesia in an inter-

national partnership of democracies made obvious sense; the concept of a

Concert of Democracies, in theory, could promote more effective multilat-

eral cooperation. Not only would the emerging powers’ cooperation in such

an initiative reduce any fears that democracy promotion was a stealth Amer-

ican plan for regime change around the world, but the emerging powers

often wielded far more infl uence in their own regions than the United States

or other Western democracies did. The United States slapped sanctions on

Burma in 1997 that, since that time, have signifi cantly reduced America’s

role in the country, but India, Thailand, and Indonesia, three democracies

near Burma, implemented no sanctions, and enjoy sizable trade and security

relationships with the Burmese junta.17 South Africa provides Zimbabwe

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 157

with electricity, food aid, and other lifelines, and so Pretoria carries by far

the most weight in Harare, no matter how much Robert Mugabe rails at

imagined diabolic American and British intervention in his country.18 And

while the United States wields enormous infl uence in the imagination of

many Latin American leaders, due to Washington’s history of interventions

in the Western Hemi sphere, it is Brazil’s increasingly powerful economy,

and left- leaning leaders, that now have greater infl uence over many South

and Central American leaders, particularly those from socialist backgrounds

like Venezuela’s Hugo Chavez and Nicaragua’s Daniel Ortega.

At times, the enthusiasm responsible for concepts like a League of De-

mocracies has seemed warranted. Besides the growth of these new inter-

national organizations of democracies, some emerging powers had taken a

stand, at times, in their own neighborhoods. In the late 1990s, under the

government of Prime Minister Chuan Leekpai, Bangkok took a tougher ap-

proach to the Burmese junta than it had under any previous administration.

Distancing itself from other Southeast Asian countries’ engagement with

Burma, Chuan’s government began criticizing the junta’s human rights

abuses and offering mea sured support for Suu Kyi and her National League

for Democracy.19 Chuan himself told American offi cials, “As prime minister

he never visited Burma. . . . He didn’t want to demonstrate any form of sup-

port or sense of legitimacy to the [Burmese] regime.”

But these examples are relatively rare. Besides its see- no- evil Burma

policy, India took a hands- off approach to its neighbor Sri Lanka, which

under the government of President Mahinda Rajpaksa crushed the Tamil

Tiger rebel movement in the spring of 2009, and in the pro cess tried to de-

stroy Sri Lanka’s press, civil society, and opposition parties, as well as indis-

criminately shelled Tamil civilians in the north of the country.20 At the UN,

Delhi blocked a resolution tabled in the Human Rights Council that would

have condemned Rajpaksa’s actions.21 Instead India praised the Sri Lankan

government for its handling of the aftermath of the war against the Tigers,

during which the Sri Lankan government allegedly executed Tigers who

surrendered and garrisoned tens of thousands of Tamil civilians in prison-

like camps.22 And after Chuan’s party lost in the 2001 national elections to

Thaksin Shinawatra, Thailand once again launched close ties with the

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

158 Failure of the Emerging Powers

Burmese military regime and all but ignored human rights abuses by its

neighbor. Thaksin claimed his government “worked to bring Myanmar

[Burma] in from the cold,” and helped push the junta to draft a proposal for a

transition to democracy— a proposal widely criticized by international hu-

man rights groups as actually paving the way to a sham election in Burma

that installed the military’s favored party in power.23 Under Thaksin, Thai-

land also drastically increased its trade with and investment in Burma: Be-

tween 2003 and 2008, Burma’s exports to Thailand more than doubled,

including sizable exports of natural gas.24

After a coup deposed Thaksin in 2006, a military- backed government

in Bangkok continued the policy of engagement, with Thai companies in

2010 making a $13.3- billion investment in a new Burmese deep- sea port,

the largest- ever Thai investment in its neighbor.25 Indeed, in 2010 and 2011,

Burma received some $20 billion in new foreign investment, the highest

year- on- year fi gure in its history; the vast majority of that investment came

from neighboring nations, including democracies like India, Thailand, and

South Korea.26 Thailand, which during the Vietnam War era sheltered tens

of thousands of Indochinese refugees, in 2009 also forced some three thou-

sand Hmong, an ethnic minority group, back to Laos, even though many

of the Hmong, who once fought against the communists in Vientiane,

might face persecution back at home.27 And in fact, after being pushed

back to Laos many of the Hmong were corralled into areas that appeared

to be prison camps, and foreign reporters who attempted to visit these areas

were banned. Some of the Hmong refugees simply vanished.28

Like Thailand and India, South Africa, Turkey, and Brazil sometimes

mouth the rhetoric of rights and democracy promotion. After the end of

apartheid, many human rights activists had high hopes for South Africa’s

ruling African National Congress (ANC), which after all had benefi ted

from a global pressure movement when its members were fi ghting against

white rule. Under Mandela, the ANC passed one of the most progressive

constitutions in the world, and South African leaders helped broker an end

to confl icts across the continent. ANC leaders at times condemned atrocities

in Zimbabwe, as well as abuses in other countries like Burma and Sri

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 159

Lanka.29 Yet in recent years Pretoria has used its infl uence at the UN, and

at African organizations, not only to protect the regime in Zimbabwe but

also to veto a UN Security Council resolution condemning rights abuses in

Burma.30 Asked during a visit to Harare about Zimbabwe’s co ali tion gov-

ernment, in which Mugabe used security forces to intimidate and kill mem-

bers of the opposition Movement for Demo cratic Change, South African

President Jacob Zuma blithely told reporters that “it is indeed very encour-

aging to note the signifi cant progress that has been made under the auspices

of the inclusive government” in Zimbabwe.31 Perhaps unable to conceal his

delight, Mugabe, speaking after Zuma, declared, “The inclusive government

is alive and well.”32 Mugabe’s allies would continue beating supporters of

other po liti cal parties, using trumped- up criminal charges to intimidate op-

position politicians, and persecuting independent- minded judges, reporters,

and civil society activists, according to a comprehensive investigation by

Human Rights Watch.33

In 2011, Zuma seemed to take a slightly tougher line toward Zimbabwe,

declaring at a regional conference in March 2011 that state violence against

opposition politicians must stop; one of Zuma’s top advisers, Lindiwe Zulu,

declared that “people [in Zimbabwe] want to see democracy.” Still, Zuma

took few concrete actions to pressure Zimbabwe to hold free and fair elec-

tions, even as Zimbabwean researchers released reports showing that voter

rolls in the country were stuffed with at least two million ineligible voters,

all likely to “support” Mugabe’s party.

Pretoria also opposed the multinational effort to end the brutal regime

of Libya’s Muammar Qadaffi , ignored international efforts to bring Suda-

nese leader Omar al- Bashir to justice for crimes against humanity at the

International Criminal Court, and generally remained mute about reports

of massive rights violations in other young African democracies, from Kenya

to Nigeria.34 Even after Qadaffi ’s regime had already fallen, and the dictator

and his family were on the run, Zuma’s government refused to recognize the

new, transitional government of Libya and played a lead role in getting the

African Union to delay recognition. The South African leadership refused

even to allow the Dalai Lama to make a visit to the country in 2009 for a

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

160 Failure of the Emerging Powers

conference of Nobel laureates, presumably for fear of angering China— a

decision that drew the rebuke of Archbishop Desmond Tutu, South Afri-

ca’s own Nobel Peace laureate.35

While Brazilian President Lula did speak out against some egregious

human rights abuses, and offered asylum to an Ira ni an woman sentenced

to be stoned to death for adultery, his government mostly ignored democ-

racy promotion and human rights in other nations. Lula called on Venezu-

elan leader Hugo Chavez to tone down his fi ery anti- American rhetoric,

according to one U.S. embassy cable released by Wikileaks, but he did not

push the Venezuelan to address some of his autocratic tendencies.36 Ques-

tioned by a Newsweek reporter about why Venezuela was allowed to partici-

pate in a South American trade bloc that is supposed to be open only to full

democracies that respect human rights, Lula responded, “Give me one ex-

ample of how Venezuela is not demo cratic.” When the reporter listed Chavez’s

crackdown on in de pen dent media, trade unions, and po liti cal rivals, Lula

casually said, “That’s not the [Venezuelan] government’s version.”37 On an-

other occasion, Lula called Chavez “the best president of Venezuela in the

last 100 years.”38 And even though Lula himself got his start in trade unions

and opposition politics during what was a relatively repressive atmosphere

in Brazil at that time, he also pointedly refused to join regional condemna-

tion of human rights abuses in Cuba. When a prominent Cuban po liti cal

prisoner named Orlando Zapata Tamayo went on a hunger strike (he ulti-

mately died in the midst of his strike, approximately two and a half months

later), Lula seemed to ridicule Tamayo’s struggle, likening the activist to a

criminal who was trying to gain publicity to get out of jail. Meeting with

Cuban leader Raul Castro, Lula pointedly declined to even mention the

hunger strike or other abuses.39 Along with Turkey, Lula also took a simi-

larly accommodating view toward Ira ni an leader Mahmoud Ahmadinejad,

even after Ahmadinejad’s government crushed the Green protest movement

that erupted in mid- 2009, jailing hundreds of opposition supporters and al-

legedly torturing and even killing some of the most prominent opposition

leaders.40 Together, Lula and Turkish Prime Minister Recep Tayyip Erdo-

gan traveled to Tehran, where they appeared in an embrace together with

Ahmadinejad after allegedly brokering a solution to the Ira ni an nuclear

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 161

program— one that most experts on Iran believed simply bought Tehran

more time to develop a nuclear weapons program.41 Lula’s successor, Dilma

Rouseff, who also had been persecuted by past military governments in

Brazil, stepped back from some of Lula’s most obvious embraces of abusers,

such as his courting of Iran. But she continued the country’s close ties to

Chavez, rarely criticizing the Venezuelan leader.

There are exceptions to the emerging powers’ abdication. Poland, the

largest and most powerful of the newer entrants to the Eu ro pe an Union,

and a country that had its own demo cratic revolution, has used its infl uence

to support reformers in other Central and Eastern Eu ro pe an nations, such

as Belarus. As the Belorus sian government cracked down on opposition

movements in the winter of 2010– 11, Poland’s leaders decried the repression

and called for the Eu ro pe an Union to enact strict punishments against Be-

larus, including travel bans on its leaders and bank account freezes. Poland

also bankrolled opposition radio and tele vi sion stations broadcasting un-

censored news into Belarus.42

But Poland is an exception; Brazil and South Africa are the norm.

Often, these weak policies drew international condemnation, like Amnesty’s

chastising of India for is approach to the Burmese junta. Even President

Obama, who wanted to consolidate his pre de ces sor’s historic outreach to

India, chided Delhi mildly during a trip to India in the fall of 2010. “If I can

be frank, in international fora, India has often shied away from some of

these issues [like Burma],” Obama said, to the annoyance of his hosts.43 (The

Obama administration would later launch its own engagement with the

Burmese government, but would take a cautious approach, retaining sanc-

tions on new investment in the country and keeping American aid fl ows

into Burma to a trickle.) But the most stinging critiques came from the citi-

zens of affected countries themselves, men and women like Myo who had

hoped for more from the new demo cratic powers. “I am saddened with

India. I would like to have thought that India would be standing behind us.

That it would have followed in the tradition of Mahatma Gandhi and

Jawaharlal Nehru,” Suu Kyi told the Indian Express newspaper.44 Or as

another Burmese exile said, after years of living like a fugitive in Thailand

and watching the Thai government coddle the Burmese generals: “Thai

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

162 Failure of the Emerging Powers

people will protest for democracy here [in Thailand] but in Burma they’d

just as soon watch us die.”45

The emerging powers’ abdication of interest in international human

rights or democracy did more than just hurt the efforts of activists like Suu

Kyi or Myo. By taking a limited— or nonexistent— role in international

democracy promotion efforts, countries like South Africa or Brazil or Tur-

key made it easier for autocratic leaders to paint democracy promotion as a

Western, and alien, activity, or even to portray it as an illegal intervention

similar to Western meddling in the Cold War in such places as Iran, Gua-

temala, and Chile, where Western intelligence organizations backed coups

against left- leaning leaders. Eva Golinger, a prominent Venezuelan- American

attorney who often advocates the worldview of Chavez’s government, charged

that democracy promotion was the latest American excuse for forceful re-

gime change, a view echoed by leaders of many other autocratic regimes.46

Again, as Western powers bombed Libya in the winter and spring of 2011, to

assist rebel forces battling Muammar Qadaffi ’s regime, many emerging

demo cratic powers harshly criticized the intervention, creating space for

some of Qadaffi ’s closest friends, like Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez, to

condemn the intervention as neo- imperialism.47 Turkey, for example, strongly

opposed the Libya intervention, with Turkish Prime Minister Erdogan call-

ing it “unthinkable” and “absurd.” South Africa did the same, calling for an

investigation into the war crimes committed in the toppling of Qadaffi , and

mostly ignoring that Qadaffi himself had not only committed massive

abuses over his forty- year rule but also played a role in stoking sub- Saharan

African confl icts from Chad to Liberia.

Indeed, by studying the voting patterns of the major emerging democ-

racies at the United Nations, the Democracy Co ali tion Project and Ted

Piccone of the Brookings Institution clearly show that most of these new

giants adhere to strict principles of nonintervention and sovereignty.48

India’s voting record at the United Nations— the General Assembly, the

Rights Council, and the Security Council— shows that while it occasionally

supports democracy, it “maintains that democracy must not be imposed on

other countries” and so still favors nonintervention, the study revealed. In-

donesia’s voting record reveals that it opposes nearly every human rights

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 163

and democracy initiative at the United Nations, even though within the

Association of Southeast Asian Nations, where Indonesia is the leading

member, Jakarta has forcefully pushed for the creation of a human rights

body. Brazil’s voting patterns, though more unpredictable, also tend to

favor nonintervention, unless “supporting democracy or human rights will

help [Brazil] to further its own goals of consolidating regional leadership,”

Piccone’s study notes. Turkey, which benefi ted signifi cantly in the 1990s

and early 2000s from democracy assistance from Eu rope and the United

States, also generally has avoided pushing for rights in its UN votes, al-

though in the past year it has become more critical of Arab autocracies, such

as Syria, that have brutalized their own citizens. (In October 2011, Turkish

Foreign Minister Ahmet Davutoglu criticized the UN for not forcefully

condemning Syria’s crackdown on its citizens, saying, “What is taking place

in Syria is not a domestic issue of Syria. It has become a tragedy for the hu-

manity.”)49 And South Africa is perhaps the most disappointing in the study

of UN voting rec ords. Repeatedly at the United Nations, South Africa’s

postapartheid leadership has allied itself with autocratic regimes in votes,

generally ignoring democracy movements in these authoritarian countries.50

Like India and Indonesia, South Africa normally just abstained from any

resolutions scrutinizing human rights abuses in other nations, even in such

extreme examples as North Korea and Sudan, whose governments alleg-

edly had committed massive crimes against humanity including, potentially,

genocide. South Africa also refused to join a call for a special UN Human

Rights Council session on Burma, whose abuses ranked on par with those of

North Korea and Sudan.51 Among emerging demo cratic powers studied by

Piccone, only South Korea consistently voted for resolutions condemning au-

thoritarian regimes like Burma and Sudan, or for resolutions creating man-

dates to monitor human rights abuses in these authoritarian states.52

Though they attracted criticism, the policies of these emerging demo cratic

powers made some sense— in their own domestic contexts. The concept of

nations’ absolute sovereignty, promoted by authoritarian nations like China,

also resonated intensely with the new emerging demo cratic powers. Many of

them, like India and Indonesia, had been leading members of the nonaligned,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

164 Failure of the Emerging Powers

anti- imperialism movement during the Cold War, and felt extremely un-

comfortable joining any international co ali tion that sought to undermine

other nations’ sovereignty, even if potentially for a good reason.53 “The inter-

nal anticolonial strain in the newly in de pen dent India morphed into sus-

tained anti- imperialist posturing within the po liti cal discourse on world

affairs [during the Cold War],” notes India specialist C Raja Mohan.54 India

allied itself with the Soviet Union, while the United States tilted toward

Pakistan. Though the end of the Soviet empire, and the bankruptcy of In-

dia’s state- dominated economic model in the early 1990s, would undermine

some Indian leaders’ faith in nonalignment and socialism, among Indian

elites and, particularly, older members of the Indian left this antipathy

toward any international efforts led by Western powers, and this defense of

absolute sovereignty, remained strong. What’s more, India— like China,

Indonesia, and many other newer powers, demo cratic or not— still wor-

ries about maintaining its own territorial integrity, particularly in relation

to Kashmir, and so it wondered whether any international effort, even on

democracy or human rights, might eventually rebound against Delhi.

India’s attitudes were hardly unique. Other emerging powers, includ-

ing Indonesia and Turkey, want to avoid criticism of their own human rights

abuses, in restive regions like Papua, a province in eastern Indonesia where

security forces have harshly repressed dissent, or in Kurdish regions of Tur-

key. And during the Cold War, African National Congress leaders like

Zuma and his pre de ces sor, Thabo Mbeki, watched as the United States

vetoed congressional legislation that would have punished apartheid, and as

Western nations pursued a relationship with South African scientists even

as some government- linked apartheid era scientists pursued programs to

poison ANC leaders.55 Not surprisingly, many ANC leaders developed an

intense animus toward the West; some close associates of Mbeki believed

that his fear of outside powers, including scientists, trying to destroy the

ANC was one factor behind his strange, highly counterproductive beliefs

about AIDS, including questioning whether HIV causes AIDS and allow-

ing his government to recommend natural remedies, including garlic and

lemons, to treat HIV.56 Other emerging powers today also were victimized

by Western interventions during the Cold War: the Eisenhower adminis-

tration backed an ill- fated rebellion by outlying Indonesian islands against

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 165

the Sukarno government in the late 1950s. So, in countries like Indonesia,

where a younger, post– Cold War generation of po liti cal leaders has not yet

taken power, most of the po liti cal class still instinctively views aggressive

democracy promotion— and virtually any Western initiatives that threaten

countries’ sovereignty— with suspicion, even if some Indonesian liberals

supported efforts like the Bali Democracy Forum.

Combined with this lingering suspicion of the West, leaders in many

emerging powers realize that, on issues other than democracy and human

rights, their interests do not always coincide with those of established

democracies— and that, even on democracy promotion and rights advo-

cacy, the institutions and structures were created by Western powers, dur-

ing the Cold War, with little input from countries like Brazil or India.

If democracies are going to challenge autocracies’ sovereignty, nations like

South Africa, Brazil, and India want to have the authority to help decide

when such challenges to sovereignty are appropriate and when they are not.

And as long as they are not granted that authority, whether through the

United Nations or other international institutions, Pretoria or Brasilia will

take stands at the United Nations supporting the sovereignty of even atro-

cious regimes like Burma or Iran. At summits of the so- called BRIC nations

(Brazil, Rus sia, India, and China), these emerging powers have challenged

many established international institutions, including the makeup of the UN

Security Council and the use of the dollar as the world’s reserve currency.57

Though two of these BRIC members are autocracies, the demo cratic mem-

bers supported challenges to international institutions just as strongly.

Indeed, as a developing nation that does not want to be penalized for

polluting the environment as severely as a developed country, India has

allied with China to push developed nations, like the United States, to play

a larger role in reducing emissions, and to argue that Delhi and Beijing

cannot afford prohibitive emissions caps, which would undermine their

growth. India also has allied itself with China and Saudi Arabia, among

other autocracies, in trying to reduce the power of the International Mone-

tary Fund in managing global fi nancial crises.58

In many cases, too, these new demo cratic powers, less secure in their

regional environments than, say, Britain or Norway, are more willing to live

with stable but autocratic neighbors than to risk destabilizing their regions.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

166 Failure of the Emerging Powers

The British and Norwegian governments need not fear, today, that problems

in Sweden or Ireland could destabilize the United Kingdom or Norway. But

India and South Africa do not enjoy such luxury. The chaotic border be-

tween India and Burma allows a myriad of armed insurgent groups, includ-

ing several fi ghting for their own homelands in India’s fractious northeast,

to smuggle weapons, people, and narcotics; the porous frontier between

South Africa and Zimbabwe includes large networks of people smuggling.59

And, the instability that already exists makes leaders in these emerging

democracies very wary of encouraging any more change, even if that change

might ultimately benefi t a vast majority of people.

Democracy advocates inside Burma or Zimbabwe would argue that

these autocratic regimes, by their nature, foster instability— massive refugee

outfl ows that suck up neighbors’ resources, waves of pop u lar unrest that

occasionally spill over borders, illicit economic activity like drug smuggling.

After all, at least a million Burmese refugees already have fl ed to Thailand

(the real number is probably much higher), and some two million Zimba-

bweans have crossed the border into South Africa.60 Yet despite the dangers

Burma or Zimbabwe exports, sizable fear exists among leaders in Bangkok

or Delhi or Pretoria that, in a po liti cal transition, the chaos and instability

exported would be far worse. “The situation [on the Thai- Burmese border]

isn’t good now, but it’s been mostly the same for de cades,” one Thai offi cial

said. “So no one wants to mess with it.”61

Of course, in some cases, certain constituencies within the emerging

powers prosper from their relationships with autocracies, and so have no

reason to support democracy promotion and human rights advocacy. The

Thai military and police, for example, long have utilized their presence

along the Burmese border, and their connections in Burma, to exploit natu-

ral resources and drugs that trade across the border. (In the 1950s, Thai

Police General Phao Sriyonand allegedly became one of the largest opium

traffi ckers in Asia.)62 Brazilian construction companies have established a

large presence in Venezuela, a presence that necessarily requires some court-

ing of Chavez’s government.63 Such interests exist in Western democracies,

too: American oil fi rms do business in Equatorial Guinea, where they lav-

ishly support that petro- state’s thuggish regime, and French oil companies

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 167

prosper from their ties to Gabon, where they enjoy a cozy relationship with

Gabon’s nepotistic regime.64 But in these longer- established democracies,

businesses’ relationships with authoritarian regimes often are balanced by

the advocacy of well- established human rights groups, democracy promo-

tion organizations, muckraking journalists, and other civil society associa-

tions. American oil fi rms may invest in Equatorial Guinea, but Mother

Jones will write a biting story chronicling their dealings, and human rights

groups will make sure this article gets into the hands of congressional in-

vestigators probing Equatorial Guinea; French oil companies may do busi-

ness in Gabon, but oil transparency organizations based in Paris and London

will make sure that sunlight is thrown on their corporate practices. But in

younger or weaker democracies like Thailand or South Africa or even Brazil,

civil society and the press are not necessarily so strong, and so powerful

groups that favor doing business with authoritarian neighbors can prevail

more easily. In Thailand, offering any criticism in the media of the army’s

policies, even over a subject like doing business in Burma, could prove haz-

ardous to a reporter’s health.

All these concerns— that change fosters instability, that Indian or

Brazilian or South African business groups will be hurt by their govern-

ments advocating democracy, that democracy promotion will link leaders

too closely with the United States— are exacerbated by having to compete

with authoritarian powers for the resources and the friendship of nations

like Burma, Venezuela, or Iran. In the early 1990s, the period when some

Indian offi cials like George Fernandes more strongly backed the Burmese

prodemocracy movement, Delhi could in some ways afford to antagonize

the Burmese government. At that time, the Burmese junta was still strug-

gling to attract investment following years of xenophobic socialism, and

India’s potential rival, China, had not yet established a sizable economic

presence in Burma. But by the early 2000s, when India sharply altered its

Burma policy, engaging the generals, it did so in large part because it feared

it was losing to China in a battle for Burma’s resources— its oil, gas, deep-

sea ports, and other attractions. In the 2000s and early 2010s, Chinese com-

panies built a new petroleum pipeline for annually transporting roughly

240,000 barrels of oil to China per day, as well as some twelve billion cubic

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

168 Failure of the Emerging Powers

meters of gas. Smaller Chinese fi rms came to dominate business across

northern Burma, where they imported electronics, industrial goods, and

virtually every other fi nished product and exported gems, logs, and other

natural resources to China.65 Chinese fi rms built a port in Burma that

could help Chinese intelligence gather information on Indian activities and,

feared some Indian strategists, could be part of a larger plan to encircle

India with Chinese ports.66

Concerned it was losing out strategically, eco nom ical ly, and diplomati-

cally, India changed course with Burma. The Burmese regime made sure

that its giant demo cratic neighbor received some benefi t from its policy

shift, though India certainly never gained the type of economic infl uence in

Burma that China has. India obtained the right to build several hydro-

power dams in Burma, and was given a chance to modernize a different

Burmese port.67 “This is a major strategic victory for us,” Indian power and

commerce minister Jairam Ramesh told Indian reporters.68

This fear of losing out to China on business and strategic deals if

an  emerging democracy focused too much on promoting democracy was

hardly restricted to Burma. Indian concerns about China’s growing infl u-

ence in Sri Lanka, where Beijing also was building new ports, added to

Delhi’s decision to remain quiet, in 2008 and 2009, as Colombo committed

massive human rights abuses in the waning days of the battle against the

Tamil Tigers.69 A desire to push back against the rising infl uence of China

in Central Asian states like Kyrgyzstan and Kazakhstan, where many people

are of Turkic heritage and have cultural ties to Turkey, surely was a factor

in Ankara’s diplomatic overtures to the region, which also make little men-

tion of democracy or human rights abuses, even though Turkey routinely

positions itself as a kind of model Muslim democracy. And China’s rapid

and sizable investments across sub- Saharan Africa, where it has gone from

having little presence two de cades ago to being the continent’s largest trad-

ing partner and greatest source of fi nance and aid, has made other emerg-

ing powers in Africa, including South Africa and India, reconsider whether

they might lose commercial deals if they prioritize human rights and de-

mocracy in places like Angola and Congo, two countries where China has

made billions in investments.70

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the Emerging Powers 169

In Delhi, Pretoria, Brasilia, and other capitals of emerging powers,

some opinion leaders argue that, in the long run, democracy would be these

states’ competitive advantage, and that they would devalue that advantage

by seeking to out- China China, which they could never do anyway. “We

came to be seen as no different from China in pursuing a policy of uncon-

ditional support to the [Burmese] junta,” wrote Indian strategic analyst B

Raman, a former se nior offi cial in the Indian intelligence agency— a senti-

ment confi rmed to me by many Burmese activists, who wonder why India

would try to match China’s policy toward Burma when it could naturally

appeal to Burma’s reformers, who one day, most likely, will run the Bur-

mese government.71 After all, China’s support for the Burmese govern-

ment, along with an infl ux of Chinese businesspeople into central Burma,

led to a spike in anti- China sentiment, symbolized by a near- riot in the

Burmese city of Mandalay in the spring of 2011, after an argument between

Burmese and Chinese gem traders.72 Activists instead urge their leaders to

look back to their nations’ demo cratic heritage, or to their history of opposi-

tion to their own military dictatorships. And they suggest that, in the long

run, when citizens of nations like Zimbabwe or Iran or Burma have freed

themselves of their current autocratic rulers, those demo crats now in power

would remember— and reward— nations that stood by them when they

were fi ghting in opposition. But how could they be so sure? After all, when

they, the leaders of the ANC, or the Brazilian trade union opposition, had

fi nally reached the presidential palace, they quickly seemed to forget demo-

crats in other countries.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:02 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press

Chapter Title: Failure of the West

Book Title: Democracy in Retreat Book Subtitle: The Revolt of the Middle Class and the Worldwide Decline of Representative Government Book Author(s): Joshua Kurlantzick Published by: Yale University Press. (2013) Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bh31.13

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact [email protected].

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Yale University Press is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Democracy in Retreat

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

A s we have seen, democracy in the early part of the twenty- fi rst

century faces a serious range of threats, from empowered authori-

tarians to conservative middle classes to emerging giants uninter-

ested in democracy promotion. Yet the idea that democracy eventually,

ultimately, will be the end state of every nation on earth remains a powerful

concept. This idea of the inevitability of progress has existed for centuries,

since the Enlightenment, but in the past twenty years it was enunciated so

clearly by Fukuyama— an inevitability still publicly embraced by nearly

every major Western leader, despite the global democracy recession of the

past de cade, and despite the West’s own unwillingness to actually come to

the aid of embattled demo crats around the world. Obama himself, in a

2010 speech to the United Nations General Assembly captured this con-

cept of the inevitability of demo cratization, even if he was not prepared to

stake his presidency on promoting this idea in the Middle East. “History is

on the side of liberty,” Obama told the gathering of world leaders. “Democ-

racy, more than any other form of government, delivers for our citizens.”1

As we will see in the next chapter, in the long run democracy probably

is the best po liti cal system— not only because it allows people essential free-

doms but also because it provides the transparency and rule of law that in

the long run foster prosperity. Still, it is a mistake to assume that just be-

cause democracy has survived previous reverse waves in the 1930s and late

1960s— and in other times when undemo cratic governments gained global

power and nascent democracies in places like Germany and Latin America

and Greece fell prey to coups and other government takeovers— it is

predestined to survive in the developing world today. As po liti cal scientist

Failure of the West

10

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 171

Azar Gat notes in his study of the history of democracy, the Allies did not

win the Second World War because (excepting the Soviet Union) they were

demo cratic and held some moral high ground. They won because they

were the world’s industrial powers, facing off against two medium- sized

powers, Germany and Japan, which had nowhere near the industrial might

or the population of the Allies.2 Similarly, the Soviet Union collapsed in the

late 1980s not primarily because of its lack of po liti cal freedom, though its

collapse did trigger demo cratic change in other Eastern Eu ro pe an states,

but because its noncapitalist economic model, always fl awed, had reached

its limits and fi nally had begun to die.

What’s more, today democracy faces greater challenges than in the

previous two major reverse waves mentioned above. Though the Cold War

is now long over and some of the strategic factors that led the United States

and other Western powers to support autocratic rulers around the world

have vanished, other developments have empowered autocracy, including

the growing power of China, the global economic crisis, the decline of the

West, and the poor leadership of emerging democracies. These challenges

have no easy solutions, particularly when the United States’ democracy pro-

motion efforts have proven so shortsighted and infl exible.

We have touched upon some of the reasons why this current reverse wave of

antidemo cratization may be more serious than the reverse waves in the

1930s, 1960s, and early 1970s. But it is important to look at these threats to

democracy today together, and at how Western nations are failing in their

democracy promotion efforts. For one, the third and fourth waves are

vulnerable partly because democracy proliferated to a larger, more diverse

group of countries— in parts of the developing world like the Middle East

and Africa that had not played a part in the previous waves. In some ways,

of course, this spread strengthens democracy— when only a tiny handful

of countries, primarily in Eu rope and North America, fi t the defi nition of

democracies enunciated in the fi rst chapter, the possibility always existed

that, due to war or po liti cal change, democracy could be wiped off the

planet entirely. This is not going to happen today, since democracy, at least

in some form, has spread so widely around the globe. But, as we have seen,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

172 Failure of the West

in the third and fourth waves, democracy came far faster to many nations

than in the previous waves, to countries that had only recently gained in de-

pen dence, or still lacked the foundations for solid growth, or remained

quite poor, or had such a weak rule of law that demo cratization made graft

worse. Because their demo cratic foundations are so weak, these third and

fourth wave nations are far more vulnerable to reversals than are many of

the countries in the fi rst and second waves of democracy’s spread, many

of which had more time to consolidate change and create stable demo cratic

institutions before facing the reverse waves of the 1930s and 1960s.

Because of the weakness of the newest democracies, the duration pre-

ceding the reversal of some of their gains has shortened, compared with

previous reverse waves. And since the reverse waves come so much more

quickly today, they pose a serious threat to these young democracies. While

third wave nations like Thailand took more than a de cade before recalci-

trant, conservative elements of the middle class, combined with an aggres-

sive military, were able to undermine even the most nascent reforms, in

countries that have seen the Arab uprisings, such as Egypt, this reversal took

less than a year to occur. In other third wave nations like the countries of

Eastern Eu rope, working class anger at the lack of improvements in eco-

nomic well- being during the demo cratic, post– Berlin Wall period, eventu-

ally led, over a de cade or more, to growing dissatisfaction with democracy

and, in some countries like Rus sia and Ukraine, a revival of authoritarian

leaders who promised higher growth and stability in exchange for weak-

ened demo cratic freedoms. In fourth wave countries like Malawi and Indo-

nesia, this dissatisfaction with the lack of equitable growth, and the rise and

spread of corruption, led to pop u lar sympathy for authoritarian rule in less

than a de cade from the time of demo cratization. Only a year after the ini-

tial uprisings in Egypt, Libya, and Tunisia, weak growth, crime, chaos, and

growing corruption already led to authoritarian nostalgia among the mid-

dle and upper classes.

Although the role of outside actors in demo cratization can be overstated,

they can play a substantial part; American democracy promotion does

matter, especially in states where the United States historically has wielded

outsized infl uence, such as Thailand or Liberia. “The strong, positive in-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 173

corporation of democracy as a mutually reinforcing goal alongside US eco-

nomic and security interests in some places . . . has helped fi rm up the idea

in these countries or regions that democracy is the normal, expected out-

come,” writes Thomas Carothers of the Carnegie Endowment for Interna-

tional Peace. In addition, he notes, during the 1990s, American assistance

for reform- minded civil society groups helped promote democracy in many

nations, and American diplomatic involvement at times helped stop threat-

ened coups in places like Ec ua dor and Paraguay.3 Indeed, a study of Amer-

ican democracy aid in the 1990s by researchers from Vanderbilt University

found that U.S. democracy assistance generally helped speed the pace of suc-

cessful demo cratization in developing nations.4 Meanwhile, the Eu ro pe an

Union’s increasingly aggressive democracy promotion, as well as the allure

of joining the EU itself, created powerful incentives for nations in Eastern

Eu rope in the 1990s to maintain reformist policies and alter their laws to

conform to the progressive norms of the EU. After the end of the Cold

War, the EU also provided substantial economic assistance to former East-

ern bloc countries like Poland, offered expertise in creating new po liti cal

institutions, and monitored their progress toward democracy, as part of the

preparation for future EU accession.5

Yet Western nations have too often made critical mistakes in their

democracy promotion: they have focused too much attention on whether

countries hold regular national elections, on the emergence of one charis-

matic and reform- minded “big man” leader like Susilo Bambang Yudhoy-

ono in Indonesia or Ellen Johnson- Sirleaf in Liberia, and on the ability of

new democracies to follow a pro cess of demo cratization that has become a

one- size- fi ts- all routine. This one- size- fi ts- all demo cratization strategy rarely

takes into account local cultural and economic conditions. What’s more,

Western powers, including the United States, too often do not look at either

the quality of the elections, the strength of other institutions besides elec-

tions, the complex characteristics of their favored “big man,” or— perhaps

most important— the level of public support in that nation for demo-

cratization.

Often, the focus on regular elections con ve niently makes it easier to

argue that a developing country is a success and move on; the West has

been relatively comfortable with weak democracies. As democracy theorist

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

174 Failure of the West

Larry Diamond notes, “Despite . . . po liti cal scientists warning of ‘the

fallacy of electoralism,’ the United States and many of its demo cratic allies

have remained far too comfortable with this superfi cial form of democ-

racy.”6 Counting a developing nation as a success thus allows Western na-

tions to justify an alliance with that country, or providing aid to it, or investing

there. This despite the fact that, in many developing nations, transitioning

from authoritarianism local citizens recognize that regular elections, even

if held freely and fairly, might not be the highest priority at the outset of

their demo cratic era. Two months after the collapse of Hosni Mubarak, a

poll of Egyptians, taken by the Pew Research Center, found that only about

half of Egyptians thought “honest, multiparty elections” were most impor-

tant in the country’s transition. Nearly 80 percent, by comparison, believed

that “a fair judiciary” was most important, and over 80 percent believed that

“improved economic conditions” were most important.7

It was in Cambodia in the late 1990s and early 2000s that I fi rst noticed this

easy ac cep tance of elections as the end- all of demo cratic change. Nonprofi t

workers at that time gathered most eve nings at one of the bars in Phnom

Penh along the slow- moving, chocolaty Mekong River to drink Tiger beer

over ice and snack on bowls of sliced chicken fl avored with piquant sliced

ginger and tiny, powerful chilis. In the run- up to the election in 1999, Cam-

bodian human rights groups and opposition parties had been reporting

numerous instances of intimidation, from beatings of opposition campaign-

ers to money being handed out to village chiefs to convince people to vote

for the ruling party. This type of intimidation had become common in

Cambodia during the 1990s, where the legacy of the Khmer Rouge geno-

cide had left a shattered and traumatized population, a high incidence of

violence, and a surplus of weapons. The crime pages of the local news-

papers read like horror scripts, with stories of villages beating to death petty

thieves, or people handling disputes by taking an axe to the other person.8

All of the aid workers, many of whom had lived in Cambodia since the

beginning of the massive UN assistance program in the early 1990s, which

ultimately cost over $3 billion and was charged to Western donors, had

heard about the intimidation; some had traveled to villages and had seen

the effects in person. The enormous reconstruction effort was partly due to

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 175

Western nations’ guilt over having done nothing during the Khmer Rouge

era, and partly because of a desire to court Cambodia as a new strategic ally.

Many of the aid workers remembered that, back in 1993, Prime Minister

Hun Sen of the ruling party had actually lost the national election and then

used the threat of force to convince the real winner to allow him to form a

co ali tion government. Only two years earlier, in 1997, a group of Americans

working for the International Republican Institute (IRI) had attended a

rally of the opposition Sam Rainsy Party, along with around two hundred

party supporters. In what seemed to be a well- planned attack, someone

tossed four grenades into the crowd, and the explosions killed at least six-

teen people and maimed at least a hundred, scattering limbs and other

body parts in the street.9 The leader of the IRI mission in Cambodia was

seriously wounded in the attack.

But when anyone brought up the problems with the elections, and the

general chaos, intimidation, and thuggery that was coming to characterize

all of Cambodian politics, no one wanted to respond. Turning the conversa-

tion to the unpleasant, even brutal nature of Cambodian politics would

force people to put down beers or stop talking about the latest affairs in

Phnom Penh’s incestuous foreigner society, or to admit that their massive

reconstruction effort was failing. As in Af ghan i stan later, the Cambodia

effort came to revolve around national elections, one big man, and a pro-

cess— a certain sequencing of elections, list of laws to be passed, and other

proscribed reforms— developed in post- Soviet states, but which bore little

resemblance to the people and problems of Cambodia, where local- level

government, and basic education about demo cratic pro cesses, were in far

greater need than in Eastern Eu rope. “Look at how far they [Cambodia]

have come since the Khmer Rouge era,” one aid worker said. “You have to

admit it’s impressive— even if there are problems with the election, they are

having an election, one generation after a genocide.” “Sure, there are some

problems,” said another aid worker who’d spent considerable time in vil-

lages where opposing the ruling party could be tantamount to a death sen-

tence. “But they’re still holding an election.”

Of course, compared with the past— in this case a past that constituted

one of the most genocidal regimes in history— elections where people cam-

paigning are only sometimes beaten up or harassed rather than murdered

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

176 Failure of the West

en masse were a step forward, but how long could the country be mea sured

against that low standard? How would any free elections be preserved in

the long run if the country’s po liti cal culture became more and more vio-

lent and repressive? How could Western donors push a demo cratization

pro cess on Cambodia developed in post- Soviet Eastern Eu rope, where coun-

tries were far richer and more stable, and had more experience with demo-

cratic politics? How could any donors put their trust in Hun Sen, leaving

no other po liti cal options other than the big man?

When I put these questions to foreign aid experts in Cambodia, or even

to local human rights activists, no one wanted to answer. And ten years

after my experience, in the late 1990s, Cambodia had not made much more

progress. As veteran journalist Joel Brinkley shows in Cambodia’s Curse, an

exhaustive investigation of the country’s current troubles, the UN and other

Western donors in Cambodia are still falling into “the fallacy of electoralism”—

they have focused almost exclusively on holding elections as a sign of prog-

ress, all but ignoring the other, more important, foundations of a free society.

As long as the Cambodian government holds regular elections, even elections

with no pretense of fair competition, Western donors continued to support

the government with aid, and mostly ignore it otherwise: in 2010, donors

pledged over $1 billion to Cambodia, even while at the same time noting that

corruption had become endemic in the country. And in this vacuum of any

external infl uence, Cambodia’s big man, long- ruling prime minister, Hun

Sen, and his cronies have robbed the country blind, sold off much of its

valuable land to China, and used unfair laws and outright thuggery to crush

the opposition.

The opposition parties that existed in the 1990s, during the early part

of the UN period, have crumbled in the face of per sis tent pressure from

Hun Sen’s Cambodian’s People’s Party, which now dominates the legisla-

ture as a one- party giant like Mexico’s old Partido Revolucionario Institu-

cional. Other opposition politicians are simply bought off: Brinkley describes

a common stratagem in which opposition politicians who agree to throw in

with the ruling party are given control of parts of certain ministries, which

allow them to loot public coffers.

Meanwhile, powerful men and women act with total impunity— they

can grab land, steal from the public trea sury, or even kill peasants without

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 177

facing any repercussions. In one too- common type of incident that occurred

in August 2008, a nephew of the prime minister ran down another man on

a motorcycle with his Escalade SUV, tearing off the other man’s arm and

leg and leaving him bleeding to death in the middle of a crowded street in

the capital. As the motorcycle driver expired on the street, military police

comforted Hun Sen’s nephew and took the license plates off of his car,

making it diffi cult for anyone to report the crime.10

If Cambodia illustrated the failure of electoralism, perhaps nowhere has

the reliance upon one big man been more disastrous than in Af ghan i stan, a

country that theoretically has been the center of the Obama administration’s

foreign policy efforts, despite the fact that it fi ts few of the qualities of other

countries ready for demo cratization, like Thailand, Rus sia, or Venezuela—

stability, urbanization, a history of some demo cratic institutions. From early

after the victory over the Taliban, the United States pinned its hopes on

Hamid Karzai, a man believed to combine Pashtun legitimacy and Western

liberal ideals— he and his family had lived in the West for de cades.11 As

in Liberia, Nigeria, Indonesia, and many other developing nations, in Af-

ghan i stan American offi cials failed to invest time studying and connecting

with a broad range of opinion leaders, and identifying a wide range of

potential demo cratic allies after the fall of the Taliban. Consequently, the

White House wound up personifying hopes for reform in the being of one

supposedly transformative leader— Karzai.

Karzai’s power would be legitimized through national presidential and

parliamentary elections, which he and the West could point to as obvious

signs of Af ghan i stan’s progress. But the focus on him, and legitimizing him

through national elections, even if they were fraudulent, distracted attention—

and funding— from fostering deeper demo cratic institutions, such as in-

vesting in creating a stable judiciary like the one that was critical to the

development of democracy in Israel’s early years, a decentralized series of

local and village elections like those that have transformed Indonesia, or a

vibrant civil society of NGOs like those that emerged in Taiwan’s early

years of transition. The United States and NATO developed some small

programs in all of these areas, but they were downplayed compared with

the military offensive, the backing for Karzai, and the holding of regular

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

178 Failure of the West

national elections, which could be held up to Afghans and Americans, and

to the media, as a sign of progress toward democracy.

In fact, Af ghan i stan, like Indonesia, could have been perfect for

decentralization— giving more power to local leaders through village and

township elections. The country had a tradition of local consultation and

governance, through the jirga pro cess, and was as ethnically diverse, if not

as geo graph i cally spread out, as a place like Indonesia. Indeed, in many vil-

lages across Af ghan i stan local leaders in the mid- 2000s had themselves

established such types of decentralized democracy, often with some help

from foreign aid organizations. Called local development councils, these

small groups managed local infrastructure projects that the central govern-

ment ignored, addressed local social welfare issues, and sometimes took the

place of the local courts in adjudicating disputes. The local development

councils proved enormously pop u lar, despite their meager funding from

the national government and a few foreign NGOs. As the Economist re-

ported, in some parts of the country they had become so pop u lar that,

when central government funds for the councils ran out for one year, villag-

ers worked together to petition foreign NGOs for aid.12 But Karzai appar-

ently saw even these local councils as a threat to his rule, and the kind of

progress made through these local- level efforts— new wells, more effective

annual audits of local government— rarely got much attention in the inter-

national media, and were hard to tout in a speech explaining Af ghan i stan

policy to the American public.

Perhaps these failures of democracy promotion might have mattered less,

but unlike the reverse waves of the 1960s and early 1970s, nascent democra-

cies today have new models of development that mix successful capitalism

with undemo cratic rule. As Gat points out, from the end of World War II

until very recently such alternative models did not exist; the only alternative

for smaller countries that chose capitalism over communism (itself not a

successful economic model) was to embrace demo cratization.13 But as we

have seen, that is no longer the case: smaller countries can copy the example

of China— and, to a lesser extent, Vietnam, the United Arab Emirates, Qatar,

or other successful authoritarian capitalists— and thus delink prosperous

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 179

free market capitalism from demo cratization. At a time when the quality

of governance in Western democracies has plummeted, refl ected by the

constant partisan deadlock in Congress, the two de cades of paralysis in

Japan, and the Eu ro pe an Union’s inability to agree on effective mea sures to

resolve its fi nancial crises, these alternative options of governance seem ever

more alluring. After all, Western citizens themselves seem to be losing faith

in their own governing models, resulting in waves of pop u lar protest on

both the left and the right, from the Occupy movement to the Tea Party

movement to the somewhat anarchic violent antistate protests in Greece

and Italy. As Charles Kupchan notes in an essay on the governability crisis,

and the rise of the authoritarian model, Western nations will essentially

have to copy some of the Chinese strategies, such as “strategic economic plan-

ning on an unpre ce dented scale [in order to prevent po liti cal and economic

collapse]. . . . State capitalism has its distinct advantages, at least for now.”14

And certainly, Kupchan notes, as citizens of developing nations see the West’s

leaders fl oundering, and Western living standards eroding, and Western

publics protesting and rioting, they will wonder why they should listen to

anything Western democracy promotion advocates say. Or as one State De-

partment offi cial focusing on democracy promotion said, “How can with a

straight face we be telling countries in Africa and the Middle East that they

need to develop better systems for governing when we can’t even pass a

bud get [in Congress]?”15

In the long run, the lack of transparency and openness may hinder the

rise of these authoritarian capitalists. China, for one, already faces a cor-

ruption epidemic so large that one China scholar estimates puts the cost to

government at $86 billion annually, and the lack of sunlight in Dubai’s fi nan-

cial and real estate markets helped precipitate a massive crash in the emirate

in the late 2000s.16 Still, in the short run most of the authoritarian capitalists,

and particularly China, have amassed relatively successful economic rec ords,

and so smaller countries no longer have to choose between demo cratic capi-

talism and authoritarian noncapitalism. No longer having to take into

account conservative middle classes— which, as we have seen, now have

serious doubts about democracy— they can enjoy economic benefi ts without

allowing po liti cal freedom for all their compatriots, which is an increasingly

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

180 Failure of the West

attractive bargain. Many members of the People’s Alliance for Democracy,

the conservative middle class Thai or ga ni za tion that, through street protests

and other demonstrations, has debilitated democracy and called for a return

of unelected leaders, spoke favorably of China’s model of development, a

model that would allow them to maintain their businesses and their wealth

without having to deal with the pop u lar power of the working classes.17

This sentiment praising China’s model is heard over and over from middle

class men and women in Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, Cambodia, and

many other countries.

In the aftermath of the Arab uprisings, such sentiments were heard, too,

in places like Egypt, where growth collapsed in 2011, partly because tourists,

so critical to the economy, were scared away, and partly because crime, graft,

and uncertainty undermined business and drove some of the brightest

talents out of the country. But having seen the successes of Gulf states like

Qatar, and of China, an increasingly powerful investor in Egypt, Egypt’s

business community increasingly wondered whether it might not have

prospered more under Mubarak, said Egypt expert David Schenker of the

Washington Institute for Near East Policy. The dictator, after all, had in

the 2000s committed to liberal economic reforms. Or, Schenker said, some

Egyptian business elites wondered whether they might do better under

some future Chinese- style autocratic government, even if that meant tolerat-

ing a far less open po liti cal system than in the year after Mubarak’s fall.18

Though the exigencies of the Cold War are a memory— the divide into

Soviet and American camps that led the United States to back dictators

from Zaire to Indonesia— other strategic changes have not necessarily proven

more hospitable to democracy. The war on terror in many ways mimics the

Cold War, with Washington offering new pledges of support to undemo-

cratic nations, like Malaysia or Morocco, countries whose leaders can more

readily hold prisoners indefi nitely and conduct brutal interrogations of

suspects.19 I recent years, in fact, as the Malaysian government has launched

a wide crackdown on hundreds of opposition activists trying to hold rallies

promoting clean and fair elections, with riot police beating demonstrators

including longtime opposition leader Anwar Ibrahim, the United States and

other Western governments have barely paid notice. The Clinton adminis-

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 181

tration had explicitly criticized the Malaysian government’s Internal Secu-

rity Act, which allowed Kuala Lumpur to detain people indefi nitely. But the

Bush and Obama administrations muted that critique as Malaysia’s ability to

hold detainees became a valuable tool in combating terrorism.

Af ghan i stan again has been the apex of how exigency has trumped

democracy— even as the United States receives few benefi ts for making sup-

posedly “strategic” decisions. In Af ghan i stan’s 2009 presidential elections,

it became obvious months before the actual vote that Karzai and his allies

would rig the election, preventing Abdullah Abdullah, the former foreign

minister and a man generally viewed as more stable and liberal than Karzai,

from having any chance of winning. Karzai had handpicked an election

commission totally biased toward him, and on voting day it became clear

that whole regions had voted for one candidate, normally Karzai. In many

cases, polling sites counted their votes without ever opening them in public

view.20 An in de pen dent election monitor concluded that 1.3 million votes

had clear evidence of fraud; of these, 900,000 were for Karzai.21 Before the

vote, the government had made little real effort to create an in de pen dent

election watchdog, a court system that could scrutinize election violations,

or even a national apparatus to get polling places open. There was no legis-

lation designed to handle the fact that many candidates had criminal,

even murderous, backgrounds; indeed, the entire electoral system lacked

credibility among most voters, according to an analysis of the pro cess by

Scott Worden of the Af ghan i stan Electoral Complaints Commission, a

UN- appointed body during the 2009 vote.22

But the White House, and American diplomats on the ground, por-

trayed the election as a triumph for democracy, since Karzai, for all his

fraud, fi nally allowed a runoff between him and Abdullah— which Karzai

won handily. Diplomats from other countries pushed the United States to

condemn the election; Canadian ambassador to Af ghan i stan William Cros-

bie apparently told the Americans in early 2010 they should be “prepared

for a confrontation with Karzai” in order to stop him from rigging the 2010

parliamentary elections as he had the 2009 presidential election.23 Ameri-

can offi cials mostly ignored this advice, and no top American leader con-

demned the cheating and fraud in the election.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

182 Failure of the West

Indeed, the United States remained convinced that Karzai alone could

deliver effective counterterrorism cooperation, help cement the offensive

against the Taliban, and keep some kind of order. As in many other devel-

oping nations, U.S. offi cials seemed to feel that, once they had bet so much

on a “great man,” they had to double and redouble that bet; there was pre-

cious little willingness to step back and examine whether any possible alter-

native would be better both for American strategic aims and for the future

of Af ghan i stan’s democracy.24 They did so even after Karzai handed over

control of much of southern Af ghan i stan to his brother, who was reported

to be one of the largest drug traffi ckers in the country (before he was killed

by insurgents), and after the Afghan president pardoned or simply ignored

other drug traffi ckers moving massive quantities of opium in and out of the

country, thereby undermining a major initiative of the NATO program to

reduce opium production and create alternative economic strategies.25 In

the vacuum of leadership, the Taliban grew bolder and bolder, putting more

and more of the weight of fi ghting the insurgency in the hands of the United

States and its NATO allies, and allowing the Taliban to gain de facto con-

trol of more and more territory.

Too often, the Obama administration, like the Bush administration before

it, fell into another democracy promotion problem: failing to work with

developing nations’ leaders to manage their citizens’ expectations of what

democracy, and assistance, would actually do for them. Rarely did the White

House work with developing world leaders to approach democracy promo-

tion a different way, like a permanent po liti cal campaign. Approaching it

like a campaign would have meant, for one, trying to help manage pop u lar

expectations about what gains in the standard of living and effective gover-

nance democracy actually would bring to a developing country, at least in

the early years of demo cratization. It might have meant admitting that now

there are viable, serious alternatives to democracy in authoritarian states

like China, and that the West’s crises of governance have undermined some

of the appeal of liberal democracy to developing nations.

But American presidents and many leaders of developing nations in-

stead often promised to developing nations not only that democracy would

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 183

sweep the globe, bringing enormous po liti cal and economic benefi ts to aver-

age people, but that the United States would greatly assist that transforma-

tion. As Bush declared in his second inaugural address, “The policy of the

United States [is] to seek and support the growth of demo cratic movements

and institutions in every nation and culture. . . . The survival of liberty in our

land increasingly depends on the success of liberty in other lands. The best

hope for peace in our world is the expansion of freedom in all the world”26 In

2005 Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice promised, during a trip to Egypt,

that the United States would abandon its policy of backing Arab autocrats,

saying, “We are supporting the demo cratic aspirations of all people. . . .

Our goal instead is to help others fi nd their own voice, to attain their own

freedom.”27 When democracy had spread to developing nations, Bush—

and, later, Obama— repeatedly suggested it would pacify civil confl icts,

unleash new waves of prosperity, and reduce in e qual ity.

Fostering these perceptions of democracy’s infallibility mattered. A Pew

Research poll taken only months after Egypt’s initial Tahrir Square uprising

showed that more than half of Egyptians believed that demo cratization

would make Egypt more prosperous— 56 percent of Egyptians expected the

economy to improve over the next year with Mubarak gone, even though

Mubarak actually had pursued relatively liberal economic policies during

the last de cade of his rule.28 Similarly, numerous studies of African states in

the early 2000s showed that large majorities of people believed democracy

would increase growth rates and reduce societal in e qual ity. Yet as we have

seen, in the early period of demo cratization growth often stagnates as newly

empowered parties push populist mea sures and compete for spoils, graft can

get worse, and civil confl ict can intensify.

Both the Obama and the Bush administrations knew democracy could

come, in the early stages, with such problems.29 Many American offi cials

working on democracy promotion had read the literature showing that, in

its early stages, democracy is not necessarily more linked to higher growth

than is authoritarian rule; some had worked in places like Kenya or the

Balkans where the initial period of demo cratization had made civil confl ict

worse; quite a few had read the literature, such as the books and articles

by Edward Mansfi eld and Jack Snyder, suggesting that countries initially

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

184 Failure of the West

transitioning to democracy may actually be more likely than authoritarian

states to engage in confl icts because they fall prey to nationalism, ethnic

confl ict, and interclass strife, without the stable institutions to rein in belli-

cose leaders like Vladimir Putin or Slobodan Milosevic.30 But neither West-

ern offi cials nor leaders of developing nations tried to manage public

expectations for what democracy would bring.

And partly because hopes had been raised so high in many developing

nations, the reality of democracy’s early stages proved such a letdown— a

major reason, as we have seen in places from Malawi to the Philippines to

Rus sia, why public support for democracy dropped in many developing

nations in the 2000s and early 2010s. Even in the countries of Central and

Eastern Eu rope, which were far wealthier than nations like the Philippines,

the economic downturn of the late 2000s and early 2010s, combined with

populations’ overestimation of how joining the EU and building democ-

racy would help stabilize their economies, led to precipitous drops in public

support for democracy in many Central and Eastern Eu ro pe an nations.

Conversely, in countries where the fi rst group of postauthoritarian lead-

ers made a serious effort to manage expectations, the population often has

been willing to accept slower growth, slower attempts to reduce in e qual ity,

and a longer time frame for effective economic reforms. In South Africa,

for example, shortly after assuming the presidency in 1994 Nelson Mandela

made clear, in a series of speeches, that he would not begin a rapid program

of land redistribution, that white capital remained necessary to the econ-

omy, and that serious in e qual ity would remain for years due to the adjust-

ments of the postapartheid era. South Africa’s poor were not thrilled by

these speeches, and some did demand a more rapid land redistribution

program than the moderate one that was designed. But public support for

Mandela’s administration stayed strong and, more importantly (since one

could attribute that support to Mandela’s enormous reserve of public good-

will), support for democracy as the preferred po liti cal system remained

high throughout the terms of Mandela and his far less beloved successor,

Thabo Mbeki. When questioned in polls, poor South Africans expressed

anger about how democracy had not led to equitable growth, enriching

mostly a small, new black middle class, but they remained committed to

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 185

demo cratic governance— and often told pollsters that they understood the

slow nature of change in a new democracy, exactly the message Mandela

had emphasized. Even under the term of Mbeki’s successor, Jacob Zuma, as

grievances over the lack of redistribution built up and led to larger public

protests against the government and against Zuma himself, they never seri-

ously threatened South Africa’s democracy.

Along with some local leaders’ failure to cater to the poor, the Bush and

Obama administrations further alienated working classes critical to suc-

cessful demo cratization by failing to make their democracy promotion

efforts as inclusive as possible. This lack of inclusion went beyond simply

focusing on one big man. “It was made clear to USAID and other embassy

staff working on the ground in Jordan that, if there was civil society, democ-

racy promotion programs that the [the government] didn’t want, those would

be gotten rid of,” said Tom Melia, a specialist on democracy assistance at

Freedom House who later went to work for the State Department.31 Indeed,

a comprehensive Freedom House report, released in 2009, found that

American offi cials “have sought to distance themselves from civil society

and human rights leaders who were not favored by the host government,”

even though the very defi nition of civil society often places its leaders in

opposition to government.32 In many cases, the Obama White House now

refuses to provide funding to any local NGOs that were not registered with

host governments, even though many governments have used registration

laws as a means of weeding out civil society groups they disapproved of.33

And when American diplomats visited developing countries, they shied

away from meeting a broad swath of po liti cal parties, which they would not

have thought twice about if they had been in France or Germany or Can-

ada, where American diplomats and offi cials have regular contacts with par-

ties currently in opposition, such as Canada’s Liberals. Many of the parties

ignored by Western offi cials in developing nations— Thailand’s Thai Rak

Thai, for instance— tended to be those representing the working classes, and

led by men and women who did not speak En glish or have much knowledge

of the United States, compared with more traditional liberal, secular, and

elite parties. But as in Thailand, those more populist parties eventually would

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

186 Failure of the West

triumph in the demo cratic system since they appealed to large majorities

of the population, leaving American diplomats, and American democracy

promotion efforts, largely unprepared for their assumption of power. When

Assistant Secretary of State Kurt Campbell visited Thailand in 2009 and

2010, he occasionally tried to meet leaders not from the ruling Demo crat

Party but from other, more populist parties. Many Demo crat Party leaders

objected to Campbell’s breakfasts with the opposition, saying that American

offi cials had set no pre ce dent of meeting anyone but top government offi -

cials. They were right— Campbell’s breakfasts were unique, and few other

American offi cials followed his lead.34

This myopia also suggested to working classes in many countries that

the United States did not care to support demo cratization if elections did

not lead to outcomes Washington felt comfortable with. At its worst, this

myopic focus on only one or two elite- led parties in developing countries led

to at least tacit American support for extraconstitutional efforts by con-

servative middle classes to overthrow demo cratically elected, if unsavory,

leaders. As pressure built up in Thailand in 2006 among middle class Thais

unhappy with the government of Thaksin Shinawatra, American offi cials

said little publicly about the possibility of a coup. Many privately told Thai

peers that it would not be a disaster to see Thaksin replaced, since it might

result in the return of Abhisit’s Demo crat Party, the favorite of the military

and the crown.35 The American ambassador at the time, Ralph Boyce, clearly

saw a potential coup coming and warned offi cials in Washington and in

other Western embassies. But even after the coup occurred, in September

2006, the United States did little to sanction Thailand, continuing to hold

high- profi le joint military exercises with the Thai armed forces, which se-

nior Thai leaders interpreted as support for their actions. (The United States

did make some token downgrades of its ties with Thailand.) In one diplo-

matic cable released by Wikileaks, the U.S. ambassador in Thailand met

privately with the coup leader shortly after the putsch. Though the ambas-

sador had not been in favor of the coup, he knew that Washington was not

going to punish the Thai government severely, and he advised the coup

leader on how he could quickly show the United States and other Western

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 187

nations that Thailand was still on a demo cratic track, which would result

in completely restored diplomatic relations.36

Similarly, in Venezuela the Bush administration in 2002 refrained from

condemning a coup attempt against President Hugo Chavez; before the at-

tempt collapsed, press secretary Ari Fleischer seemed to be blaming the coup

on Chavez and quickly welcoming the coup leaders as legitimate. Chavez

has since been able to portray the United States’ Venezuela policy as decid-

edly undemo cratic, undermining any efforts by the United States to reach a

broad swath of Venezuelans beyond anti- Chavez middle classes and elites

with aid programs or other democracy assistance. Then, in 2011 the Obama

administration risked making the same mistake in another region, with

administration offi cials privately briefi ng reporters and suggesting that

the administration was not happy with the victory of Islamic parties in Mo-

rocco and Tunisia and other Arab states, before enough time had passed to

determine whether these parties were willing to govern within secular and

liberal demo cratic norms, and sometimes without distinguishing between

more hard- line and more moderate Islamic parties.

Even if the White House had developed a masterful democracy promotion

strategy, any policy requires funding to back it up. But too often rhetoric,

as in George W. Bush’s Second Inaugural Address, was not matched by re-

sources, or at least the wise use of resources. In most years the Bush admin-

istration did increase bud gets for democracy promotion, but it drastically

undermined the use of those funds by linking the war in Iraq to democ-

racy promotion, as well as by undercutting Bush’s rhetoric with undemo-

cratic practices such as rendition and torture. Bush’s policies essentially

equated democracy promotion with military intervention and regime

change, poisoning the idea of democracy promotion by suggesting that it

could be touted as a reason for the United States, unilaterally, to overthrow

governments that Washington opposed. Bush himself reportedly said in

April 2004, a time when American marines were fi ghting a bloody battle in

Fallujah, “If somebody tries to stop the march to democracy, we will seek

them out and kill them!”37

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

188 Failure of the West

While the Bush administration had welcomed many dissidents to Wash-

ington, a strategy that at least helped pacify some middle class and elite opin-

ion leaders from developing countries, the Obama administration seemed

strangely aloof to dissidents, which only further alienated opinion leaders

from countries like Thailand, Malaysia, China, or Egypt. When several

prominent Ira ni an dissidents came to Washington in the summer of 2009

following the massive Green uprising in Tehran, they could not obtain meet-

ings with any se nior Obama administration offi cials.38 Similarly, many

Uighurs, Tibetans, Cubans, and other dissidents found it hard to get a meet-

ing with administration offi cials. Rabeeya Kadeer, the Uighur equivalent of

the Dalai Lama who had met with George W. Bush, found herself shunted

off to low- level State Department offi cials by Obama.39 Even when the

Dalai Lama visited Washington in 2009, the Obama administration did

not allow him to meet the president, the fi rst time the Tibetan leader had

come to Washington and not seen the president in nearly two de cades.40

Determined to take a new and less confrontational approach to democ-

racy promotion, the Obama administration shifted away from Bush’s belli-

cose tone, which was probably a wise idea. Added to the desire of drawing

a line between himself and George W. Bush, and the weakened position of

a debt- ridden, febrile American economy, Barack Obama himself seems to

have a natural inclination toward pragmatism and consensus. As historian

Walter Russell Mead notes in a lengthy essay on Obama’s foreign policy, the

president fell into the Jeffersonian tradition of American leaders who want

to “reduce America’s costs and risks overseas by limiting U.S. commitments

[and] believe that the United States can best spread democracy and support

peace by becoming an example of democracy at home.” 41

But the new president, too, failed to match rhetoric with the effective

use of resources. Between 2009 and 2011, the Obama administration re-

peatedly cut funding for core democracy promotion programs in some of

the biggest battlegrounds for demo cratization, despite the fact that several

of these programs had performed well in both internal and external audits

of fi nances and delivery of results. Although the White House in fi scal year

2011 and 2012 asked for funding to support some fi ve hundred new State

Department positions, these were primarily in consular departments. The

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 189

White House repeatedly cut democracy funding to Egypt, halving it to

$25 million annually in 2009, and then cut it again in 2010 and 2011, while

slashing the State Department’s broader Democracy Fund by 21 percent in

early 2011. The administration also cut the most important government-

affi liated democracy promotion or ga ni za tion, the National Endowment for

Democracy, reducing subsidies for it in 2011 by roughly 12 percent.42 “The

administration was looking across the board, and looking for places to cut,

and they were choosing to cut democracy assistance, and prioritizing other

areas, it wasn’t just democracy assistance getting cut along with everything,”

said Tom Melia of Freedom House, who later went to work for the State

Department.43 The White House also eliminated high- level positions on the

National Security Council that, under the Bush administration, had been

devoted to democracy promotion.44 At the State Department, the adminis-

tration appointed an Assistant Secretary for Democracy, Human Rights,

and Labor, Michael Posner, who in his previous work had been mostly fo-

cused on cleaning up America’s own abuses.45 This was not a bad thing—

the Bush administration indeed left major issues to resolve. But it meant

that the top offi cial in the State Department focused on democracy promo-

tion actually had had little experience with promoting democracy abroad

before he came to the job.

To be sure, in a tough fi scal climate, and dealing with a Congress con-

trolled by the opposition party beginning in 2010, the Obama administra-

tion was constrained, and the White House did not necessarily always cut

democracy funds in exchange for worse- performing or less useful programs.

But in many cases, it did. Overall, foreign aid funding decreased in the 2012

bud get, and congressional staffers made clear that there was little chance for

increases in the 2013 bud get. And the White House was not exactly getting a

lot of help from its friends and allies: consumed by its own fi scal crises, the

Eu ro pe an Union failed to agree in 2011 to create its own version of the Na-

tional Endowment for Democracy, a longtime goal of Eu ro pe an democracy

advocates.46 At the United Nations, the new secretary- general, Ban Ki- moon,

seemed uncomfortable with the rhetoric of democracy, and often took a

soft line. In dealing with some of the most recalcitrant nations, Ban usually

just backed down: Ban meekly left Burma in 2009 and 2010 after the regime

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

190 Failure of the West

refused to allow him to meet opposition leader Aung San Suu Kyi.47 By

contrast, when Kofi Annan served as secretary- general, he was far more

willing to criticize autocratic leaders who denied the UN human rights

rapporteurs access to their countries.

But of all foreign aid, democracy promotion funding has been but a

rounding error in the federal bud get, and it might well not have been held

up in Congress because, of all foreign aid programs, democracy promotion

has tended to be the most pop u lar on the Hill and with constituents, and it

also had been thoroughly examined by internal and external auditors, far

more than most other foreign aid programs. Indeed, in interviews with se-

nior staffers for GOP senators and representatives working on appropria-

tions, most said that they would have gone along had the administration

pushed hard for stable or higher levels of democracy funding.48 “If the ad-

ministration had come to us, and made clear that wanted to restore [i.e.,

maintain] funding for democracy aid in the bud get, I don’t think that would

have been a problem on appropriations,” said one se nior congressional

staffer. “No one wants to look like they are cutting money for democracy

and for protesters and activists.” 49

Even when the Obama administration did maintain or even increase fund-

ing for democracy promotion programs, it failed to shift programming to-

ward local needs, and away from USAID and State Department formulas.

I compared USAID democracy assistance strategies in twelve developing

nations, including countries as diverse as East Timor, Mozambique, and

Bosnia. Almost without exception, the strategic planning documents, the

priorities for the programs, and the actual methods of implementation were

the same for each country. Successful democracy promotion must be fl exible,

adapting to local conditions and involving a wide range of local actors. But in

country after country, this was not happening with USAID and State.

This survey was hardly unique. In a similar study of American democ-

racy promotion efforts, Matthew Alan Hill of the University of London

found that USAID rarely employed case- specifi c strategies, in part because

it knew that if it used strategies that already had been vetted throughout the

entire bureaucracy and procurement pro cess, it was unlikely to be criticized

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 191

later. “Af ghan i stan had four years of drought, famine, and a greater level of

absolute poverty than Bosnia, but Bosnia had lost over half its population

during the confl ict. . . . Despite these differences there was an assumption

that democracy could be developed using the same strategy in each case,”

he found.50 “The sub- program areas [i.e., the specifi cs of assistance on the

ground] are nearly identical.” Or, as Thomas Carothers of the Carnegie

Endowment noted after participating in multiple USAID assessments,

American democracy promotion remained wedded to pro cess, leading to

“lamentable patterns of infl exibility, cumbersomeness, lack of innovation,

and mechanical application.”51

At times, Western leaders like Obama simply seemed to abdicate democ-

racy promotion, assuming that the spread of new technology would take on

the burden of fomenting po liti cal change. Indeed, many Western leaders

and writers argue that technology is a new factor and will strengthen the

third and fourth wave democracies, smoothing their paths to freedom. Cell

phones, the Web, Internet calling technologies like Skype, and social media

sites like Facebook will, in theory, allow activists to or ga nize large numbers

of people quickly and easily, and without subjecting their communications

to government surveillance. In some respects, Western leaders seem to want

to believe in the power of transformative technology because technology,

combined with globalization, would let them off the hook— if the Internet

is going to change societies, then all Washington has to do is support Inter-

net freedom in other nations, without the kind of hard choices of publicly

backing real activists in countries like Thailand or Malaysia, where the

American government has close ties with ruling governments.

What’s more, techno- optimists believe, the spread of the Internet and

mobile communications will make it nearly impossible for governments to

censor information from their publics, since savvy netizens could always

access free, unfettered information online or by calling outside the country.

The new technology also theoretically will make it easier for activists to

share their thoughts with the wider public, without having to use tradi-

tional platforms like tele vi sion and the print media. “The networked popu-

lation is gaining greater access to information, more opportunities to engage

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

192 Failure of the West

in public speech, and an enhanced ability to undertake collective action,”

wrote Clay Shirky of New York University, one of the most prominent

techno- optimist writers. In 2000 President Bill Clinton said, “In the new

century liberty will spread by . . . cable modem,” and other prominent West-

ern leaders followed up with similarly optimistic projections. Clinton’s succes-

sor, George W. Bush, promised, “If the Internet were to take hold in China,

freedom’s genie would be out of the bottle,” and, under President Obama,

Secretary of State Hillary Clinton launched a new American initiative to

promote global Internet freedom. Announcing the initiative, Hillary Clin-

ton declared, “Now, in many respects, information has never been so free.

There are more ways to spread more ideas to more people than at any mo-

ment in history. And even in authoritarian countries, information networks

are helping people discover new facts and making governments more ac-

countable.”52 Some cyberactivists even got the Internet nominated for the

2010 Nobel Peace Prize, theoretically for its transformative impact on global

po liti cal life.53

The media, too, are hardly immune from techno- exuberance, touting

the growth of the Internet as a de facto sign of po liti cal opening and exu-

berantly highlighting the use of new technology in virtually every po liti cal

protest or civil society gathering. Even New York Times columnist Thomas

Friedman, a longtime cynic regarding change in the Middle East, wrote,

“The Internet and globalization are acting like nutcrackers to open societ-

ies.”54 Friedman’s colleague, columnist Nicholas Kristof, wrote that in “the

quintessential 21st century confl ict . . . on one side are government thugs

fi ring bullets [and] on the other side are young protesters fi ring tweets.”55

The impact of technology is so great, both for activists and for authori-

tarian governments, that it should be neither celebrated as a revolutionary

tool destined to promote democracy nor feared as a powerful device of

autocracy. Instead, technology can cut both ways, a prospect few of the new

techno- utopians seem to realize. Some successes by activists or ga niz ing

through the Web, or through cell phones, have stoked this enthusiasm. Fili-

pino activists gathering in Manila in early 2001 to protest corruption or ga-

nized their marches through text messages, a template that later rallies in

Manila would follow.56 In the Orange and Rose revolutions in Ukraine and

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 193

Georgia, many activists used mobile phones and text messages to or ga nize

demonstrations, while in Moldova in 2009, protests or ga nized largely by

text messages, Facebook, and the microblogging site Twitter helped restore

a legitimate government after a clearly fraudulent election.

In the winter of 2010– 11, Tunisian and then Egyptian and Bahraini

activists used social media and mobile technology to or ga nize antigovern-

ment protests and disseminate articles that chronicled the corruption and

repression of the governments of Zine el Abidine Ben Ali and Hosni

Mubarak. In January 2011, Ben Ali’s government collapsed, and he fl ed the

country, followed soon after by Mubarak.57 In the central areas of Tunis, ac-

tivists painted graffi ti that read, “Thank you Facebook.”58 One of the heroes

of the anti- Mubarak revolution was a local Google executive, Wael Ghonim,

who was detained for over a week by Mubarak’s security forces.59

Activists in other Arab- Muslim countries employed similar usage of

cell phones, text messages, and social media, and major technology com-

panies like Google launched divisions designed to develop tools that might

help demo cratic activists around the world.60 By the early 2010s, some activ-

ists in developing nations began to travel to other countries to share infor-

mation on the best ways to use new technology for or ga niz ing.61

The impact of the Internet, social media, and mobile communications

technology on demo cratic change is far too nuanced, and complex, to be

explored in depth here— there are entire books dedicated to this question.

But it is clear that while social media, the Internet, and mobile phones have

helped activists push for greater democracy in some developing nations,

they also at times have enabled governments to monitor and censure activ-

ists, and even to forestall demo cratization entirely.

Simply the spread of Internet access certainly has not ensured freer

politics or demo cratic consolidation. Technology often matters most in the

early stages of demo cratic change, when activists can use social media or

cell phones to or ga nize public protests and other high- profi le activities,

which rouse people out of their everyday routines, and require less long- term

commitment. But in societies that have already begun transitions to democ-

racy, and where what is required for demo cratic consolidation is sustained,

diligent reformist advocacy— such as monitoring government transparency,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

194 Failure of the West

launching NGOs and in de pen dent media outlets, and maintaining pres-

sure on government offi cials, judges, or other civil servants— these emerg-

ing technologies, which do not develop bonds as close as those in old- fashioned

or ga niz ing, appear less effective. The weak bonds built by technology’s new

tools such as social media often wilt under pressure from governments, and

are not strong enough to keep citizens coming back to the regular, more

mundane institutions of civil society critical for a democracy— town hall

meetings, ongoing public demonstrations, or elections for local offi ces. Writer

Malcolm Gladwell has dubbed this “slacktivism”— the idea that the Inter-

net leads to casual participation in groups, since the barriers to entry are

very low, compared with old- fashioned or ga niz ing, which requires people

to leave their homes, attend meetings in another place, and participate in

rallies where they would potentially face physical danger. “The platforms

of social media are built around weak ties. Twitter is a way of following, or

being followed, by people you may never have met,” Gladwell writes. “Weak

ties seldom lead to high- risk activism.”62 In his native Belarus, writer Evgeny

Morozov, author of the prominent new techno- skeptic book The Net Delu-

sion: The Dark Side of Internet Freedom, saw the effect of such weak bonds.

Belorus sian activists, he found, focus on the Internet, which appears to

them capable of doing “politics remotely, anonymously, and on the cheap.”63

But, he fi nds, no social media or online or ga niz ing in Belarus has been able

to match the government’s control, or generate the type of grassroots move-

ment necessary to seriously challenge the government through consistent

and repetitive actions.

Authoritarian governments, and even elected autocrats like Hun Sen,

Putin, or Chavez, increasingly understand that, outside of charismatic street

protests, technology often creates weak bonds— bonds that they can exploit

or crush. In Thailand the growth of the Internet, while allowing some

degree of discussion of topics like labor rights, environmental concerns, cor-

ruption, the future of the powerful Thai monarchy, and military repression,

has not clearly helped boost opposition politics, except when the opposi-

tion has used technology to help or ga nize rallies in Bangkok. Thai opposi tion

activists admit that, in getting participation for regular activities like petition-

writing or weekly protests, old- fashioned methods like calling friends and

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 195

neighbors have proven more effective. The Thai Internet, which has pene-

trated most Thai house holds, also has given rise to hard- core, nationalist,

royalist, and progovernment activists who use the Web to attack— and

sometimes to cause the arrest of— opposition politicians who do try to dis-

cuss the future of the monarchy, even if they make only the most benign

comments about the royal family.64 And during the Arab uprisings of 2010

and 2011, many autocratic Arab regimes launched similar types of attacks

on opposition leaders. Bahrain’s government used Facebook to create a

smear campaign against Mohammed al- Maskati, a prominent human rights

activist, while Sudan’s government allegedly used Facebook to barrage

opposition movements, and anyone else, with reams of false information

about prodemocracy movements’ aims and gatherings.

Many authoritarians and elected autocrats also have developed highly

sophisticated methods of monitoring and fi ltering websites, often based on

China’s comprehensive “Great Firewall,” which make it harder for people

to use technology to or ga nize or gain access to free news. Unlike older forms

of communication, like face- to- face or ga niz ing in dissident Eastern Eu-

rope, the Internet’s bonds often prove weak enough that fi ltering and block-

ing successfully prevent activists from or ga niz ing. Thailand now blocks some

100,000 websites, according to an analysis by one Thai NGO; theoretically,

this blocking is to prevent online discourse harmful to the Thai monarchy,

but in reality it serves to censor a wide range of po liti cal opposition.65 Since

Thailand’s Internet laws banning content offensive to the monarchy are so

broad that they could be used against virtually any Internet user, they scare

all users, keeping many even from exploring sites that mention the royal

family but that otherwise are devoted to criticism of the Thai government.

Even some of the most prominent Thai academics and writers who’d con-

sidered themselves immune from po liti cal pressure now report that they

increasingly watch what they say and post online.66

Other nascent democracies, like Malaysia, have attempted or considered

similar blocks to prevent opposition parties or other civil society groups from

or ga niz ing online, or they apparently have used “denial of ser vice” attacks to

shut down opposition groups’ websites and forums.67 Singapore has drafted

broad Internet laws that could implicate many Web users, and has reinforced

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

196 Failure of the West

paranoia by occasionally notifying the public that the government- linked

Internet provider has snooped through users’ Web accounts.68

Some authoritarian or elected autocrat governments also use state- backed

commentators to control online discourse and threaten po liti cal opponents.

After all, activists have no monopoly on the Web. In emerging democracies,

as in the West, most Internet users are not logging on to join a po liti cal cause

but to play games, read soccer scores, download music, or watch pornogra-

phy. And governments can use the Internet to promote their messages, to

fl ood the Net with progovernment writings, to swamp the blogs and other

accounts of activists, or simply to create enough mindless entertainment that

average people do not focus on online politics. The Internet is perfect for

these kinds of distractions. As writers like Cass Sunstein have noted, the

Internet is particularly well suited to disseminating false and unreliable infor-

mation, since it has no fact- checking and tends to create echo chambers, in

which people with similar beliefs search for information that confi rms

their ideas.69

Rus sia seems to have particularly perfected using the Internet to

distract and confuse the populace. The Kremlin has its own funded “Web

brigades” that attack liberals and praise Prime Minister Putin, and the

Kremlin also apparently is considering creating a “national search engine”

modeled on Google but that will fi lter out content that Moscow considers

dangerous to the state.70 The Kremlin also has launched many other strate-

gies to co- opt bloggers by creating state- controlled online forums for them.

As Morozov notes in The Net Delusion, the Rus sian state not only has co-

opted bloggers but also has played a role in producing a wide range of on-

line entertainment programming that is both highly enjoyable and clearly

nationalist and pro- Kremlin. This entertainment includes a beautiful blonde

blogger named Maria Sergeyeva, who both praises Vladimir Putin and blogs

about her personal life like Paris Hilton or some comparable American ce-

lebrity.71 “At some point, economies of scale begin to kick in,” writes Moro-

zov. “The presence of paid commentators [advocating for the government

online] may signifi cantly boost the number of genuine supporters of the re-

gime, and the new converts can now do some proselytizing of their own.”72

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Failure of the West 197

Worse, by creating their own personal Web pages or Facebook pages,

activists are building the kinds of dossiers about themselves that, in the old

days, government security ser vices had to work hard to piece together,

using timely legwork and bugging of dissidents’ homes, which could take

months or even years. Now this information is easily available online. It also

has become easier for the security ser vices to follow dissidents, since they can

track groups of them online rather than having to infi ltrate actual meetings

of dissidents in people’s homes or bars. Many Syrian and Ira ni an protesters,

for example, believe that Damascus and Tehran use protest leaders’ Facebook

pages and other online identifi ers to fi nd them and their friends during anti-

government demonstrations.73 Similarly, in Thailand, many activists believe

that the government has used monitoring of social media to follow and, in

some cases, detain people opposed to the military- backed government.74

The technology that became available in earlier waves of demo cratization

was not so easy for regimes to adapt for their own purposes. Part of the

challenge for activists and foreign powers trying to support democracy is to

develop ways that new technology can mimic the strong bonds and effective

penetration of older communication technologies. Fax machines, which

dissidents in Eastern Eu rope used before 1989, and shortwave radios were

basically an upgrade on old- fashioned printing presses that could circulate

samizdat literature or advertisements for rallies, but they did not allow gov-

ernments to collate massive amounts of information about democracy activ-

ists. And although the fax machine was more modern than state- controlled

radio and television— communication methods that people in authoritarian

states tended to fi nd boring and consequently often ignored— regimes found

that faxing was neither a more complete nor more sophisticated way to fl ood

their country with their own propaganda and entertainment. The oldest tool

of all, oral messages relayed from person to person, among small groups of

friends and neighbors, remains the most effective form of communication;

when a close friend or neighbor invites someone to participate in an activity,

the likelihood that he or she will do so is high, since the person will have to

see that friend or neighbor again, and since he or she can experience a real

sense of close community by joining friends in such group activities. Indeed,

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

198 Failure of the West

recent experiments by po liti cal scientists Aaron Strauss and Allison Dale

have found that text messaging and e-mails—particularly when sent from

strangers and not from friends or relatives— are relatively in effec tive in

voter mobilization, in terms of increasing voter turnout. Numerous other

studies have found similar results, concluding that e-mail and other similar

tools are in effec tive in voter mobilization. But, if activists can transform

social media or cell phone networking to mimic the effects of more tradi-

tional or ga niz ing, authoritarian governments will have much more to fear.

This content downloaded from 169.228.74.230 on Tue, 07 Jan 2020 19:48:13 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms